Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
Introduction 1
How to use this manual 2
Printing this manual 5
Legal notice 6
Hardware requirements 9
Product support 10
Hardware locks and insurance 11
New features 12
Getting Started 49
Getting started 49
Starting SPACE GASS 50
Command line options 51
The main SPACE GASS window 53
The status line 55
Using the mouse 57
Dialogue boxes 58
Data entry 60
Managing job files 62
Starting a new job 63
Opening a job 64
Merging jobs 65
Saving a job 66
Deleting a job 67
Cleaning up a job 68
Running a macro 69
Running a script 70
Job status 73
Shortcuts 74
Input Methods 77
Input methods 77
iii
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
iv
Table of Contents
v
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
vi
Table of Contents
Analysis 475
Analysis 475
vii
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
viii
Table of Contents
Output 705
Output 705
Page setup 709
View text report 712
Print preview 713
Print text report 715
Print graphics 716
The status report 717
ix
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Bibliography 817
Bibliography 817
Index 821
x
Introduction
Introduction
SPACE GASS 12.5
77th Edition, April 2016
SPACE GASS is a general purpose structural analysis and design program for 2D and 3D
frames, trusses, grillages, beams and plates. It includes a full complement of features that
make it suitable for any job from small beams, trusses and portal frames to large high rise
buildings, towers and bridges.
Its emphasis on graphics means that you easily see the status of your model at all times. In
fact, the extensive range of graphical editing tools allow you to input your model or make
changes entirely within the graphical editor. Of course, if you prefer to work with datasheets
or other methods of input then they are available too.
A structure wizard automatically generates the initial data for many typical structures which
you can then manipulate to create the exact model you want.
State of the art solvers for linear and non-linear static analysis, dynamic analysis and buckling
analysis are available. Steel and concrete design modules for various international codes of
practice are also available.
Graphical and text reports can be generated for any parts of the structural model.
Comprehensive filters that can be defined graphically allow you to customize your graphical
views and output reports to include just want you want to see.
Although SPACE GASS is a comprehensive program with many advanced features, its
logical menu structure, toolbars and graphical emphasis makes it easy to learn and use, even
for first time users. If you have questions or need help then you will probably find the answers
in this manual.
1
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Hints are non-essential, but useful, pieces of information which will improve your
understanding of the program. Hints sometimes identify a special way of doing something and
are typically quite specific.
Important notes should be carefully read and understood. They outline information that is
vital to the effective use of the software.
Notes identify articles of information which are meant as an aside to aid your understanding
of SPACE GASS. Some notes are quite general in nature and do not give reference to a
specific procedure. Notes may also serve to draw your attention to specific interpretation.
HINTS
IMPORTANT NOTES
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
This is an example of the SPACE GASS important note style and icon.
NOTES
2
Introduction
Chapter 12 "Analysis"
The static, dynamic and buckling analysis modules, together with their options and control
parameters are fully described here.
3
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Chapter 16 "Output"
Describes the types of output reports and graphics hardcopies that can be obtained and the
options that are available for sorting, formatting, enveloping, positioning on the page, etc.
Appendix F "Bibliography"
A list of references.
4
Introduction
5
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Legal notice
End User License Agreement
Notice to Licensee:
This End User License Agreement (the "Agreement") is a legal agreement between you and
I.T.S. Integrated Technical Software Pty Ltd (ACN 086 605 567) ("ITS"), a registered
company under the Corporations Law of the State of Victoria, Australia. BY USING THIS
PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. If you do not agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement or
if you do not have the authority to agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement on
behalf of the licensee then you MUST NOT USE THE PRODUCT. Provided the Product has
not been used and is not a loan, student or evaluation version, you may return it to your place
of purchase for a full refund.
1. Definitions. For the purposes of this Agreement, the following terms shall have the
following meanings:
1.1 "Product" shall mean and include the SPACE GASS software, updates, CDs,
computer disks, Security Devices, help files, reference manual or other instructions,
technical support or any other software, items or information of any kind provided by
ITS or obtained from the www.spacegass.com web site.
1.3 "Security Devices" shall mean and include hardware or software that limits the
number of users that may operate the Software simultaneously, or imposes an Expiry
Date beyond which the Software cannot be used, or prevents certain parts of the
Software from being used.
1.4 "Expiry Date" shall mean the date imposed by any Security Devices beyond
which the Software cannot be used.
2. License. The Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as
well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Product is licensed, not sold.
2.1 Grant of License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, ITS
grants to you a non-exclusive license to use the Product during the term of this
Agreement.
2.2 User Limit. The Software may be installed on an unlimited number of computers,
however the maximum number of users operating it simultaneously may not exceed
the user limit imposed by the Security Devices.
2.3 Reference Manual. You may make such copies of the reference manual as are
reasonably necessary for your use of the Product by the permitted number of
simultaneous users, but you may not make copies of the reference manual for any
other purpose without the prior written consent of ITS.
3. Ownership; Proprietary Rights. ITS shall at all times be the owner of and have all rights
to the Product, and all intellectual property associated therewith, including but not limited to
patents, copyrights, trade names and marks, domain names, and trade secrets related thereto.
The Product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Nothing herein
6
Introduction
shall cause or imply a sale, license or transfer of any intellectual property rights of ITS to you
or to any third party, except as expressly set forth herein. You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the Software.
You may not attempt to reverse engineer, duplicate or bypass any Security Devices.
To the extent that the Product involves providing a service, in the event of any error or defect
in the provision of that service ITS may, at its option;
Because some states and jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability, the
above limitation may not apply to you.
6. Indemnification. You, at your sole expense, will defend, indemnify and hold ITS harmless
from and with respect to any loss or damage (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs)
incurred in connection with, any suit or proceeding brought by a third party against ITS
insofar as such suit or proceeding shall be based upon (i) any claim arising out of or relating
to your use of the Product except where such claim alleges that the Software infringes or
constitutes wrongful use of any copyright, trade secret, patent or trade mark of any third
party; or (ii) any claim arising out of or relating to any act or omission by you. You will pay
any damages and costs assessed against ITS (or paid or payable by ITS pursuant to a
settlement agreement) in connection with such a suit or proceeding.
7. Changes to the Product. ITS may change the Product from time to time without notice to
you and shall not be under any obligation to provide you with any notification of such change.
8. Non-Transferability. You may not rent, lease, sub-license, lend or transfer the Product to
another person or legal entity without the prior written consent of ITS.
9. Term and Termination. The term of this Agreement shall commence on the date that you
install or use the Product and shall continue (unless earlier terminated as provided herein)
until the Expiry Date, or in perpetuity if no Expiry Date is imposed. Without prejudice to any
other rights, ITS may terminate this Agreement at any time if you fail to comply with its
terms and conditions.
Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason whatsoever, you shall cease all use of the
Product and remove all copies of the Software from your computers.
7
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
10. General.
10.1 Assignment. You may not assign or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights, duties or obligations hereunder and this Agreement may not be involuntarily
assigned or assigned by operation of law, without the prior written consent of ITS,
which consent may be granted or withheld by ITS in its sole discretion.
10.3 Governing Law. You agree that the use of the Product by you shall be governed
by the laws of the State of Victoria and the Commonwealth of Australia, and you
consent to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of that State and the
Commonwealth.
10.4 Attorneys’ Fees. If any legal action is brought arising out of or relating to this
Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to receive its reasonable attorneys’
fees and court costs in addition to any other relief it may be entitled.
10.5 Entire Agreement. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement of
the agreement of the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes all prior and concurrent agreements, promises, proposals, representations
and warranties, oral or written, with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8
Introduction
Hardware requirements
Windows 7, 8 or 10 (Windows 10, 64-bit preferred).
Intel or AMD CPU (Intel multi-core preferred).
Any modern graphics card with at least 2Gb RAM (NVIDIA preferred).
For more detailed information, including tips on how to get the maximum speed out of
SPACE GASS, refer to www.spacegass.com/hardware.
9
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Product support
Product support includes:
I.T.S. reserves the right to charge for telephone, facsimile or email support.
10
Introduction
The hardware lock cannot be replaced for a nominal fee if it is lost or stolen and, for this
reason, it is recommended that the user insure the software package and hardware lock for the
full current market value of the software.
11
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
New features
The key new features added in SPACE GASS since v10 are as follows. Note that minor new
features, enhancements and bug fixes are not listed here.
Version 12.50
This is a major new version containing a significant number of enhancements and new
features. SPACE GASS now also supports hardware acceleration in all modern graphics
cards. Previously this was restricted to some NVIDIA graphics cards. For more information
on this and how to optimize SPACE GASS for maximum performance refer to
www.spacegass.com/hardware.
Version 12.27
Includes a new moving loads tool that allows for stationary and moving loads in the form of
vehicles, pressure patches and line loads. Loads can now be applied to plates as well as
members, plus a proximity distance setting lets you model multi-level roadways with
different loads on each level.
Added support for IS800 seismic checks (IS800 chapter 12) to the steel member design
module.
Version 12.26
Adopted a less conservative approach when calculating m for segments unrestrained at one
end with steel member design in accordance with AS4100 and NZS3404.
Version 12.25
Version 12.24
Version 12.23
Version 12.20
This is a semi-major upgrade that includes many changes, enhancements and fixes. It is also
the first version that has all of the tools of the traditional SPACE GASS window now
available in the renderer (along with many new tools that are only available in the renderer).
Tools for querying and viewing steel member design results have been added to the renderer.
You can also label the steel member number, load factor and governing load case on each
steel member in the model.
12
Introduction
A load case title column has been added to the combination load cases datasheet.
Seismic checks in accordance with chapter 12 of NZS3404 have been added to the steel
member design module. The clauses checked are table 12.4(1), table 12.4(3), 12.4.1.2,
12.5.2, 12.5.3.1, table 12.5, 12.7.2.1, 12.8.3.1(a), 12.8.3.1(b), 12.8.3.1(c) and 12.10.3.1.
Version 12.00
This is a major upgrade containing many new features and substantial performance
improvements, especially in the analysis solvers and graphics engine. It also makes the
renderer the main interface for the program.
Introduced a new "Paradise" solver for the static, buckling and dynamic frequency analysis
modules. It is a sparse matrix solver that fully utilizes the parallel processing capabilities of
modern multi-core CPUs. The new solver is usually between 10 and 100 times faster than
SPACE GASS 11. The most dramatic speed savings occur with jobs that have a large matrix
frontwidth and lots of load cases.
The renderer graphics now fully utilizes the parallel processors on the graphics card rather
than doing the graphics calculations on the main CPU. This means that deflection diagrams,
bending moment diagrams, shear force diagrams, etc. can be scaled up and down smoothly
regardless of the size of the job, even in fully rendered 3D mode.
The renderer has been given a major overhaul with a new user interface that now has almost
all of the functionality of the traditional SPACE GASS window. This means that you can do
everything in the renderer without constantly having to switch back to the traditional SPACE
GASS window. The new functionality in the renderer includes:
New user interface that can be configured with different skins and user defined
layouts.
Substantial performance increases and no annoying delays or pauses.
Opening and saving of jobs.
Generating reports.
Structure wizards.
Datasheets.
Node, member and plate drawing and editing tools.
Loading input and editing tools.
Filtering.
Scaling.
Static, buckling and dynamic analysis.
Steel and concrete design.
Display of all analysis result diagrams such as deflections, moments, contours, etc.
Ability to show fully rendered deflections rather than just wireframe.
Animated mode shapes.
Version 11.09
Released an all new Steel Connection Design module for AS4100 that complies with the
latest ASI design guides.
Released a new Steel Member Design module for AS4600 that works with the cold formed
sections from manufacturer including Lysaght, Stramit, Duragal and others. Supported
sections include Cees, Zeds, angles, tophats, channels, back-to-back Cees, CHSs, SHSs and
13
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
RHSs. New cold formed section libraries for Lysaght, Stramit and Duragal have also been
included.
The Portal frame builder now automatically creates all of the main connections in the
building. They can then be used in the steel connection design module.
Allow a steel member design to be performed via a script file with the user being able to
control the design groups, sections properties and load cases considered.
Version 11.08
Various new script commands have been added that allow you to have more control over
importing/exporting and analysis. You can also pause the script to see what stage it is up to
at any point.
Version 11.05
Released a Portal Frame Builder module for the modelling of portal frame buildings in
SPACE GASS. It generates the full structural model plus dead loads, live loads, wind loads
and steel member design data. The module supports gable (symmetrical and asymmetrical)
and monoslope roofs, overhangs, knee braces, haunches, fly bracing, uneven frame spacings,
openings, roof/wall bracing and end wall props. Wind loads are generated in accordance
with AS/NZS 1170.2:2011 for all regions in Australia and New Zealand.
Version 11.01
Released a Sea Load module for the calculation of wave, current, marine growth and
buoyancy loads on submerged structures in marine and offshore environments.
Version 11.00
This is a major new version that includes a new 3D renderer with full editing capabilities. Of
course you can still edit your model in the traditional SPACE GASS window, however the
editing tools in the renderer are generally more advanced and offer additional features over
the traditional editing tools.
Some of the load input tools, design data tools and analysis results diagrams are not yet
available in the renderer, however they will be added soon.
Member force and moment envelope reports can now be limited to the maximum and
minimum values taken from just one end of the members rather than from both ends.
The analysis engine has also had a major make-over with finite and large displacement
theory added, plus options for secant or tangent matrix solutions, residual or full loading,
and residual convergence criteria. An "Auto" optimizer setting has also been added that
senses the most efficient optimization method before the main analysis calculations begin. It
removes the necessity for you to manually use trial and error methods to find the best
optimization setting.
The standard libraries have been completely re-designed allowing non-standard and built-up
sections to be saved. A new shape builder, moving loads generator with animated moving
loads, and area loads generator have also been added.
14
Introduction
Other major new features include on-screen notes, job attachments, dimensions, load
combinations grid, load case titles viewer, measure tool, textures, gridlines, view selector,
customizable toolbars and multiple undo/redo steps.
The major new features of SPACE GASS 11 are listed in more detail below:
A new shape builder with shape dragging, snapping, stacking, alignment and
copy/paste. Shapes can now be specified as voids to easily model holes in your
sections. New standard shapes have also been added for polygons, polytubes,
triangles, Cees, Zeds, tophats and schifflerized angles. Line shapes that allow you to
specify a line thickness and a series of points have also been added. You can even
show the dimensions of your sections graphically in the new shape builder.
On-screen notes that can be positioned anywhere on or near your model or attached to
nodes, members or plates.
A measure tool that lets you determine the actual length, component lengths and
angles between any two points.
An attachment tool that you can use to attach external documents, spreadsheets,
drawings or any other files to your SPACE GASS job and embed them into the job
file.
Important new drawing aids now let you align with other existing points or objects,
snap to key intermediate positions along members, attach to existing objects, or align
with existing members or global axes. You can even lock onto a node or member by
briefly hovering over it and then begin drawing at some offset away from it. When
aligned with an axis, member or point, you can also just type in the desired distance
away your point should be.
A new combination load cases grid showing primary and combination load cases
across the top and combination load cases down the side. You simply type
multiplying factors into any cells to quickly build up your combination load cases in a
very visual way. Rows for new combination load cases can be added as desired.
Customizable toolbars.
A view selector showing the current viewpoint. It can also be dragged around or
clicked to change the orientation of the model.
New libraries in XML format that now hold non-standard and built-up sections,
directly editable via the shape builder and/or library editor. Categories have also been
added for Common, Special, Legacy and Obsolete classifications.
15
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
vehicles. Travel paths can now be drawn graphically, as can a loading area outside of
which wheels are treated as inactive even if they are still within the ends of their
travel path. A new vehicle editor has also been added, and vehicles are now
incorporated into the standard libraries.
A load case manager now lets you copy, renumber or delete multiple load cases rather
than one at a time.
buttons throughout SPACE GASS that allow to select from load cases, sections
or materials that already exist in the job, plus a load case titles viewer that can be left
open all the time if you need to see which load cases are which.
A new area loads generator with options for two-way and one-way loads. Load
directions include X, Y, Z, "Normal to area" and "Vector". Loading areas can be
actual or projected, and more than four members per polygon can now be handled.
A new find tool with additional modes for finding duplicated nodes, invalid plates,
members duplicated in steel member groups, members with free ends and plates with
free vertices.
New move, rotate, copy, mirror, stretch and scale tools that allow you to select nodes,
members or plates. They also provide a graphical preview of the final result before
the changes are made.
Textures such as "brickwork", "steel" and "concrete" that can be added to members or
plates and shown graphically.
Gridlines that can be defined and shown graphically in two directions at any spacings
and then used as snap and reference points when drawing objects or locating points.
A tool for converting static loads such as dead loads and live loads into masses for
use in a dynamic analysis.
A new curve editor for spectral curves that has extra capabilities for importing,
exporting, labelling and an equation data generation tool.
A view manager that lets you save the current view into a list of saved views and then
recall them as desired.
Moveable property panels that list all of the sections and materials used in your
model. You can even click on a section or material in the panel to select all the
members or plates in your model that use that item.
A member alignment tool that lets you align or stack members via their center, top,
bottom, left or right sides.
An option for showing member origins graphically. This quickly lets you see which
way each member is running.
16
Introduction
Generation of bends of any radius at member intersections. A very useful tool for
pipework analysis.
A tool for reversing the direction of members. Options for adjusting member fixities,
offsets and loads are included.
Various tools for extending members along their length, moving intermediate nodes,
removing intermediate nodes and removing crossed member nodes.
A new steel member design module for the Hong Kong code HK CP2011 has been
released.
Version 10.8
Steel member design modules for the AISC 360-10 LRFD and ASD standards have
been released.
SPACE GASS now uses the Titan license manager softlock system instead of
hardware locks, although hardware locks can still be supplied if requested. TitanLM
suppports stand-alone or network installations, and lets users borrow licenses from
the network for use off-site.
A new plate element has been added in v10.7. Plate elements can be quadrilateral or
triangular with bending, shear and membrane stiffness.
SPACE GASS can now import and export data in CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) and IFC Step
file formats. This allows it to communicate directly with many other programs such
as Tekla Structures/XSteel, ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus, AutoCAD,
Revit Structure, StruCAD, etc.
A new built-in graphics rendering module has been added in v10.7 that allows you to
generate realistic rendered models of your job that show the complete geometry of all
members and plates. This replaces the old internal 3D viewer and the external VRML
viewer. It is expected that this module will gradually be given full input, editing and
viewing functionality until it completely replaces the existing graphics system in
SPACE GASS.
Rotated and/or flipped members can now be located using the find command or
filtered in v10.7.
In v10.7 graphical envelopes can now be limited to minimums and maximums, just
minimums, just maximums or just absolute maximums.
The minimum and maximum intermediate values are now shown on displacement,
bending moment, shear force, axial force, torsion and stress diagrams in v10.6.
A new connectivity tool has been added that allows you to check what is connected to
any given node, member or plate.
17
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Dynamic zoom, pan, viewpoint and diagram scale changing have been added in
v10.50. Your current operation stays active and none of your node, member or plate
selections are lost while you are using these tools. Refer to shortcuts for more
information.
SPACE GASS can be run minimized, normal or maximized (the default mode)
depending on the -min, -nml or -max command line options. It can also be controlled
by the SHOW line in a script file. These changes were made in v10.50a.
The concrete material properties in the standard metric library have been updated in
v10.50a. The new values are based on AS3600-2001 clauses 6.1.5, 6.1.6 and
Commentary Table C6.1.2.
"D" restraints are no longer supported in v10.50. Restraints are now just "F", "R" or
"S".
The structure wizard no longer generates general restraints and is less restraining in
general in v10.50.
A new steel member design module for the Hong Kong code HK CP2005 has been
added in v10.41.
A new steel member design module for the British code BS5950:2000 has been added
in v10.41.
When exporting to DXF, the frame data can now be put into section-specific layers
rather than having the entire frame in one layer.
A new steel member design module for the LiteSteel beam range of sections from
Smorgon Steel has been added in v10.40. These are designed to AS4600.
The tool that updates analysis section property data based on the results of a steel
member design has been enhanced considerably so that it allows the update-analysis-
design procedure to be iterated automatically.
A new dynamic frequency analysis solver has been added in v10.30. It allows you to
create combinations of mass load cases and to combine lumped mass load cases with
self weight load cases. The new solver uses the wavefront optimizer and, as a result,
the computer’s memory requirement is vastly reduced.
An option for SPACE GASS to check for program updates via the SPACE GASS
website has been added.
18
Introduction
The moving load generator is now able to generate combination load cases that
combine the moving loads with other static loads.
Moving load travel path coordinates, when used in conjunction with travel path node
numbers, are now treated as offsets from the path defined by the node numbers.
The number of moving load wheels per vehicle has been increased to 200.
Custom libraries are now stored in a separate file to the standard libraries. They can
also be stored in a different folder to the standard libraries.
Your company logo can now be scaled to an exact height that you specify and can
optionally be included on every page or just the first page. JPG images formats are
also now supported.
Saving of loads after graphical editing, importing of text files and report generation
have all been sped up dramatically.
Selection of the local XY and/or XZ planes for the display of moments, shears and
stresses can now be made direct from the side toolbar rather than via a filter.
New members being drawn graphically can now be optionally given the default
attributes or those of the previously accessed member.
An option for allowing duplicate members to be drawn has been added. Finding and
filtering duplicate members has also been added to the cleanup, find and filter
functions.
Deleting members with zero length has been added to the cleanup function.
Filters defined in terms of analysis members now also affect steel design reports.
Options for suppressing automatic re-scaling of load and analysis results diagrams
have been added.
An option for selecting steel members and connections graphically and then viewing
or editing them in a datasheet has been added.
The default bolt, plate, weld, rebar, spectral and vehicle library names can now be
specified in the configuration.
The lowest buckling load factor is now displayed at the end of a buckling analysis.
The end offset distance for members exported to a DXF drawing file can now be
specified.
The data generated by the structure wizard is now adjusted according to the vertical
axis setting.
The default gravity direction in the self-weight datasheet is now adjusted according to
the vertical axis setting.
19
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Version 10.00
Other jobs can be opened and merged with the current job.
Steel member design input data can now be generated automatically for the entire
model.
A facility for connecting members that cross over each other has been added.
The analysis and design output has been combined into a single report.
A new page setup form gives you full control over the output device, margins, page
layout and formatting.
You can specify and configure separate graphics and text printers.
If the program is terminated abnormally, any network licences that were active are
recovered immediately and automatically.
Temporary job files are now stored on the local workstation for extra speed and much
reduced network traffic.
Filters, views, etc. in the current job can be retained when data is imported from a text
file.
In order to detect the cause of frame buckling, the nodes at which the maximum
translations and rotations occur are listed in buckling reports.
Unrestrained degrees of freedom are now automatically stabilised during the analysis.
This prevents many instabilities due to incorrect modelling.
20
Introduction
Export files include all input data and are no longer affected by filters or report
selections.
You can print or obtain print previews direct from the datasheets.
SPACE GASS can now import and export data directly with MS-Excel, MS-Access
and MS-Word.
Options for springs and compression-only members have been added to the structure
wizard beam and grillage structures.
Compression effective lengths in the steel member design input data can be fully
controlled separately for each axis.
The automatic reduction of the minor axis compression effective length due to flange
restraints is now optional.
Steel members can be nominated as "braced " for either or both axes in order to limit
the compression effective lengths to their actual lengths.
Double angles are shown as such in the graphical section property legend.
Everything attached to and associated with a member is deleted when the member is
deleted. This includes attributes, offsets, loads and design input data.
The steel design input data member lists are automatically adjusted when members
are deleted, subdivided or otherwise edited graphically.
Steel members and connections are now sorted numerically if input or edited
graphically.
21
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The design input data for a steel member can be copied to a graphical selection of
other steel members.
You can press the space bar to repeat the last graphics command.
SPACE GASS can be controlled externally from another program or batch file using
a script file.
Full 3D geometry displays can be saved in VRML files for later viewing.
Buttons have been added to the library editor for adding, deleting and editing.
A large number of minor improvements, bug fixes and adjustments have been
incorporated.
22
Installation and Configuration
Installation and configuration
Installation and configuration of SPACE GASS is a simple two-stage process that is
explained in the following sections.
23
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
24
Installation and Configuration
When you first start SPACE GASS, or if you make any changes to your system, you will be
prompted for some configuration information.
After the initial configuration, you can change any of the configuration settings by selecting
them from the Config menu. The eight configuration forms are detailed in this chapter.
All configurable data is stored in a number of files called SG.INI, SGSettings.GS and various
XML files. They are all stored in the LocalAppData folder (eg.
c:\Users\Fred\AppData\Local\SPACE GASS\12).
Note that you can quickly reset SPACE GASS back to its
default configuration settings by running the SPACE GASS Utility Tool (via the Start button
=> All Programs => SPACE GASS 12 => Tools => SPACE GASS Utility) and clicking the
"Reset Client Configuration" button or the "Reset All" button. For more information, refer to
The SPACE GASS utility tool.
25
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
This form allows you to set the folder locations for the SPACE GASS program itself and for
the various types of data files.
26
Installation and Configuration
Documents folder
Contains MS-Access, MS-Excel and MS-Word document files.
Calculator program
The name of the SPACE GASS calculator. This can be the standard Windows calculator or
any other calculator that runs in Windows.
Note that any folders that do not exist are automatically created as you go.
27
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Text formatting
This form allows you to set the report and graphics text formats and fonts.
Report font
The font for text reports. This must not be a proportional font otherwise the columns of
numbers in reports will not line up properly. The two-column output toggle switches between
one-column and two-column output in the report.
After setting the screen graphics font size, if the text on the
SPACE GASS graphics screen looks too big or too small, it may be because the screen
graphics correction factors have not been set correctly. Refer to "Graphics scale calibration"
in "Graphics scale calibration" later in this chapter.
28
Installation and Configuration
General configuration
This form allows you to set the general purpose configuration items in SPACE GASS.
Sound on alert
This allows you to suppress or enable the sound that the program makes when it wants to alert
you to something.
Sound on error
This allows you to suppress or enable the sound that the program makes when an error occurs.
Diagram shading
Loading, bending moment, shear force, stress and axial force diagrams are shaded if this item
is ticked.
29
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Shading is normally turned off as it makes multiple superimposed diagrams hard to read.
Vertical axis
The graphics vertical axis which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note that this
setting does not change the current job. The graphics vertical axis for the current job can only
be changed from the Viewpoint form (selected from the View menu).
Changing this setting only affects the graphics display. It doesn’t affect the local axis
definitions, the steel design top flange definitions, or the analysis and design modules in any
way.
Aperture size
The size of the aperture circle which appears when nodes and/or members can be selected
graphically.
Crosshair size
The size of the crosshair which appears when snap or ortho modes are on.
Curve resolution
All curved lines drawn with SPACE GASS are actually a series of short straight lines. In most
cases it is very difficult to differentiate between a true curve and a series of ten straight line
segments placed around the curve. SPACE GASS allows you to specify how many straight
line segments per member are used to approximate curved lines in displacement, bending
moment, shear force or axial force diagrams.
If you have drawn duplicate members and wish to locate them, you can do so by using the
Find tool and selecting "Duplicated" in the member type field. You can also use a similar
procedure to create a filter that isolates any duplicated members.
30
Installation and Configuration
Dashed lines
Dashed (broken) lines are used to differentiate between load cases and between diagram
types. All lines are drawn continuous if dashed lines are not allowed.
It is recommended that you make each layer name different so that it is easy to distinguish
between centrelines, text, members, hidden lines, attributes, bolts, plates and cut-off lines. It is
also recommended that you set the hidden line layer in your CAD software to dashed or
dotted lines.
31
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
This form allows you to calibrate your monitor so that graphics is properly sized and
proportioned.
Some monitors exaggerate the horizontal and/or vertical scales so that the SPACE GASS
graphical output appears stretched or compressed in either or both directions. SPACE GASS
allows you to apply correction factors which allow for these exaggerations and adjust the
graphical output so that it is correctly sized and proportioned.
You should simply measure the width and height of the two lines on the screen with a ruler,
and SPACE GASS calculates the correction factors for you.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Ensure that you measure between the arrow heads rather than measuring the overall form
or screen size, otherwise items on the SPACE GASS graphics screen will appear too small
or too large.
32
Installation and Configuration
Graphics colors
This form allows you to select colors for screen, printer and plotter graphics output.
Colors are selected by first clicking the item to be changed and then selecting a color from the
palette at the bottom of the form.
The list of color indexes next to "Section properties" represents section properties 1-25. If you
have more than 25 section properties, the pattern is repeated for properties 26-50, 51-75, etc.
The list of color indexes next to "Load cases" represents the first 25 load cases. If you have
more than 25 load cases, the pattern is repeated for each additional group of 25 load cases.
33
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
General colors
This form allows you to set the Windows color scheme. It controls items such as form colors,
button colors, scroll bar colors, etc.
When you select this option SPACE GASS loads the standard Windows color selection form
which can also be selected from the Windows Control Panel. The appearance of this screen is
dependant upon the version of Windows you are running.
34
Installation and Configuration
SPACE GASS has been dimensioned dynamically. This allows it to expand into the available
memory of your computer giving you virtually unlimited problem size capacity dependant
only on the memory capacity of your computer.
The size limits you set allow you to reserve space for a job, with space being allocated
according to the size of each component of a job. You should set the limits high enough so
that there is enough capacity for the largest of jobs that you are likely to encounter but small
enough that you don't exceed the memory capacity of your computer.
Keep in mind that the limits can be changed at any time, even when you are halfway through
inputting a job and find that you have run out of capacity. Just select "Problem size limits"
from the Config menu and change the limits to suit your job size. After changing the limits
you can simply return to where you left off, with all previously entered data retained.
35
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Renderer configuration
Various renderer settings and preferences are available from the Settings menu in the renderer
as shown below.
36
Installation and Configuration
The "Allow duplicates..." option lets you draw members or plates on top of existing members
or plates (ie. so that they share the same nodes).
The "Allow hidden nodes to be selectable" option allows you to select nodes that you can't see
due to being behind other objects.
The "Automatically prompt for new load case titles" option enables load case titles to be
prompted for automatically each time a new load case is created.
The "Anti-aliasing" option gives graphical text a smooth appearance by changing the color of
pixels around the edges of the text.
The "Order independent transparency (OIT)" option enables true (fully accurate)
transparency for the display of transparent objects. If unticked (required by some older
graphics cards) then the transparency is unsorted, resulting in some transparent objects
appearing to be in front of objects that they should be behind.
The "Support multiprocessor for RC beam design" option allows multiple zones to be
designed/checked simultaneously during a reinforced concrete beam design.
The "Use OpenGL for graphical forms" option controls the system used to display graphical
objects in forms such as the shape builder, moving loads generator, steel connection design
module, reinforced concrete design modules, portal frame builder, etc. If unticked then
DirectX is used. Note that this setting doesn't affect the graphical system used in the main
renderer window.
The "Disable OpenGL shaders" option should be unticked for maximum graphical speed in
the renderer. If ticked (required for some older graphics cards) then the renderer uses a slow
software emulation mode to display graphical objects rather than utilizing the parallel
processing power of the graphics card. This option should only be ticked when the renderer
becomes unstable due to an old or incompatible graphics card being used.
The "Default deflection color" option, if ticked, means that when only one load case is
displayed, deflections are shown by member color rather than load case color. If unticked or if
multiple load cases are displayed then deflections are colored by load case.
The "Curve quality" controls how many segments are used to display curved objects such as
cylinders and the like.
The "Result quality" controls how many short straight lines are used to approximate a curve
when drawing deflected shapes, bending moment diagrams, etc.
The "Structure line width" is the thickness of lines used to draw the structure when in
wireframe or outline modes.
The "Diagram line width" is the thickness of lines used to draw diagrams such as bending
moment diagrams, etc.
The "Maximum undo/redo steps" is the number of undo/redo steps that are remembered in the
renderer. More memory is consumed if this setting is increased.
The "Highlight delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node, member or
plate before it becomes highlighted. Note that this setting has no effect over whether the node,
member or plate is attached to when drawing new objects.
The "Infotip delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node, member or plate
before its infotip appears.
The "Maximum load case components" is used to prevent memory overflow problems with
large models that contain many load cases by limiting how many load cases can be displayed
simultaneously. A "component" is considered to be a single diagram (eg. a load, a bending
moment diagram, a shear force diagram, etc) on a single node, member or plate. If you
experience memory problems when you try to display loads or analysis results graphically for
many load cases simultaneously then you may need to lower this limit. Conversely, if your
system has substantial memory and you are being restricted to an insufficient number of load
cases when displaying loads or analysis results graphically then you could experiment with
raising this limit.
The "Rotation drag distance" is the number of pixels that you can move the mouse while the
left button is held down before it will start to rotate the model. It is used to avoid the problem
of the model rotating unintentionally when you are trying to select items or start a selection
window. If this problem occurs then try increasing the rotation drag distance slightly.
37
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The "Rotation mode" controls how the model behaves when you rotate it with the mouse.
Trackball mode lets the model rotate about all three axes, whereas Turntable mode prevents
rotation about an axis normal to your computer screen. Trackball mode is a bit harder to
control than Turntable.
The "Rotate at" setting controls the centre of rotation when you rotate the model by dragging
with the left mouse button held down.
The following form lets you can change the theme of the renderer via the "Skin" setting. This
affects the colors and styles of all the forms, buttons and input fields. You can also separately
change the colors of most the items in your model to suit your requirements.
38
Installation and Configuration
In the following form you can control the color and threshold of each pass or fail level when
displaying steel member design results.
39
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The size of the text displayed on the screen and in graphical prints can be controlled in the
following form.
The "Other" menu option gives you access to some of the configuration settings normally
found only in the traditional SPACE GASS window as follows:
40
Installation and Configuration
For further information on each of these options, refer to "Folders and files", "Text
formatting", "General configuration" and "Problem size limits".
In particular, if you wish to change the vertical axis you should choose "Settings => Other =>
General Configuration".
41
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Customizing toolbars
All of the toolbars in the renderer can be hidden/shown, moved or undocked. Buttons can also
be added or deleted.
In order to move or undock a toolbar, simply drag its handle on the left hand end of the
toolbar to the desired location.
Undocked toolbars such as the one shown below can be placed anywhere in the renderer
window or docked to the top, bottom, left or right sides of the renderer.
To hide a toolbar, simply right-click anywhere on it and then untick it from the list of toolbars
that appears. To restore a toolbar, select Toolbars from the Window menu, click the Toolbars
tab and then tick the desired toolbar.
42
Installation and Configuration
You can then select a toolbar from the list and add or delete buttons as required.
43
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The Options tab also has additional settings that you might find useful as shown below.
For information on how to customize the renderer's property panels, refer to Customizing
property panels.
44
Installation and Configuration
You can undock a panel and place it anywhere on the screen or dock it to the left or right side
of the renderer by first pinning it using and then dragging the title bar of the panel to the
desired location. Note that when undocked, it will stay open when not being used.
45
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For information on how to customize the renderer's toolbars, refer to Customizing toolbars.
46
Installation and Configuration
Reset Registration
If you have a Titan softlock, this option resets SPACE GASS back to its freshly installed
state. It is used primarily to start afresh in cases where SPACE GASS is having difficulty
obtaining a Titan license. Note that this option resets the connection from SPACE GASS to
the Titan server but does not affect the Titan server itself or its registration.
If you have a hardware lock, this option de-registers SPACE GASS. The next time you run
SPACE GASS it will initiate the re-registration process. It is used primarily to re-register
SPACE GASS in cases such as when new modules have been purchased or when the
hardware lock has been changed.
47
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Reset All
Choose this option to reset both the registration and client configuration.
After creating your JPG image file, click the "Set Report Logo" button to display the
following form.
You should then click the "Set Logo" button, browse to your image file and select it.
Note that even after completing the above procedure, you must ensure that SPACE GASS is
configured to use the logo. You can do this by choosing "Page Setup" from the SPACE GASS
File menu, setting the logo height and specifying whether it is to be on the first page only or
on all pages.
48
Getting Started
Getting started
This chapter explains how to start SPACE GASS and takes you on a guided tour of the main
SPACE GASS window and all of its menus. It also explains how you should interact with
SPACE GASS and respond to its requests for data.
49
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If you are running SPACE GASS for the first time, you will be taken through part of the
SPACE GASS configuration program (see also Configuring SPACE GASS).
You can control how SPACE GASS starts by the use of command line options. For example,
you can bypass the splash screen, you can prevent the previous job from loading
automatically, you can control the location of the SPACE GASS configuration file, etc. They
are fully explained in Command line options.
50
Getting Started
To add a command line option, select "Properties" of your SPACE GASS shortcut and append
the contents of the "Target" field with one or more of the following options.
-c [bbggrr] Allows you to set the datasheet alternate line color, where
[bbggrr] is the 6 character hexadecimal representation of the
desired color with bb=blue component, gg=green component
and rr=red component. For example, 50% blue, 50% green and
20% red could be specified with a command line option of -
c7f7f33.
-s [file] Allows you to specify a script file that contains a list of menu
commands and other items that SPACE GASS will
automatically execute one-by-one rather than you operating it
in the normal way. For example, a command line option of -s
"c:\scripts\myscript.txt" would load the myscript.txt script file
from the c:\scripts folder. Note that the ""s can be omitted if
this option is at the end of the target field. See "Running a
script" for more information and full details of the script file
format.
-max Runs SPACE GASS maximized so that it fills the entire screen
area. This is the default setting and is the same as if none of the
-min, -nml or -max command line options are specified.
Note that the -min, -nml and -max command line options can be overridden by the SHOW
line in a script file. See "Running a script" for more information and full details of the script
file format.
51
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For example, to bypass the splash screen and the automatic loading of the previously used
job, you could have a shortcut target field of:
If you start SPACE GASS by double-clicking on a job, then the shortcut is bypassed and any
command line options in it are not used. You can, however, apply the command line options
when a job is double-clicked by starting Windows Explorer, selecting Tools –> Folder
Options from the menu, clicking the File Types tab, scrolling down to and clicking the SG file
extension, clicking the Advanced button, clicking the Edit button and then adding the
command line option to the end of the "Application used to perform action" field.
Note that you can use the -i command line option to set up
multiple shortcuts, each with its own SG.INI file for cases where you want to be able to run
SPACE GASS with different configurations. For example, you may have a laptop that is
normally connected to the office network during which SPACE GASS needs to access jobs
and libraries that are stored on the network. However, there may also be times when the
laptop is being used away from the network on-site or at home. It would be convenient if these
two scenarios could each have its own folder settings and other configuration items.
You can set this up by simply making a copy of your SPACE GASS shortcut so that you have a
shortcut for when you are connected to the office network and another for when you are
running SPACE GASS away from the office, each with its own SG.INI file and configuration
settings. Edit the properties of each shortcut and add -i "path" to the end of the target field,
where "path" is the folder containing the SG.INI file. For example, -i "c:\SG\Config\Office"
would store the SG.INI file for that shortcut in the "c:\SG\Config\Office" folder, and -i
"c:\SG\Config\Home" would store the SG.INI file for that shortcut in the
"c:\SG\Config\Home" folder. The next time you run SPACE GASS from either shortcut, it
would run through the configuration process and let you set them up with their own unique
configuration settings.
52
Getting Started
for the current job displayed in it. You can also click the button to open the renderer
window.
The toolbars
The buttons across the top and to the left of the display area form the toolbars. The toolbar
buttons replicate the most commonly used menu items and give you instant access to them
(see also The toolbars). The graphics settings buttons across the bottom of the screen display
the current settings for the drawing tool and allow the settings to be toggled.
53
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
54
Getting Started
The status line appears in the second line of the text display area of the main SPACE GASS
window. It is also displayed at the bottom of the renderer. The status line indicates which data
is present for the various parts of the current job.
The presence (or absence) of data is indicated by sequences of characters shown as follows. In
all cases, unless otherwise indicated, "Y" represents "data exists", while "N" represents "no
data exists".
If, for example, you have performed a static analysis, a dynamic frequency analysis and an
elastic buckling analysis (but no dynamic spectral response analysis), the "Analysis" part of
the status line would appear as "Analysis:YYNY".
You can use the status line as a check to ensure you have entered sufficient data before
performing another operation. For instance, you cannot perform a static analysis until you
have applied some type of load to the structure (in addition to which, sufficient data must be
present on the structure itself). Check for the appropriate code in the status line window
before proceeding with the operation.
Headings
1. Project name, Job name, Designer’s initials and Notes
(Y/N)
Structure
1. Nodes
2. Members
3. Plates
4. Restraints
5. Sections
6. Materials
7. Master-slave constraints
8. Member offsets
(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Loads
1. Node loads
2. Prescribed node displacements
3. Member concentrated loads
4. Member distributed forces
5. Member distributed torsions
6. Thermal loads
7. Member prestress loads
8. Plate pressure loads
9. Self weight
10. Combination load cases
11. Load case titles
12. Lumped masses
13. Spectral load data
55
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Analysis
1. Static analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed,
"U"=desired convergence not obtained,
"I"=ill-conditioned
2. Dynamic frequency analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
3. Dynamic response spectrum analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
4. Buckling analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
(Y/N/U/I)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Steel
1. Steel member design data
2. Steel Member design/check results, where
"N"=not designed or checked,
"D"=designed,
"C"=checked
3. Connection design data
4. Connection design results, where
"N"=not designed,
"D"=designed
(Y/N)(D/C/N)(Y/N)(D/N)
Concrete
1. Concrete column design data
2. Concrete beam design data
(Y/N)(Y/N)
56
Getting Started
The right mouse button is generally used by SPACE GASS to replicate the keyboard ESC
key. The ESC key generally enables you to abort from the current operation or form. Note,
however that the right mouse button is not always active, such as when a form is open.
The following definitions explain the basic terms that are associated with using the mouse.
Pointer
The descriptive cursor that appears on the screen and tracks the mouse movement.
Point
Position the pointer on an item.
Right Click
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the right mouse button.
Double-click
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the left mouse button twice.
Drag
Point to an item, press and hold the left mouse button as you move the mouse to a new
location, then release it.
Mousewheel
Rotate the mousewheel to dynamically zoom, pan or change the viewpoint. For more
information, refer to Shortcuts.
57
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Dialogue boxes
When you choose a command, a form often appears so that you can select options or type in
data. If an option is dimmed, it is not currently available.
Moving a form
You can move a form dragging its title bar to the new location. The title bar is the colored
band along the top of the form.
Closing a form
You can close a form by pressing the Ok or Cancel buttons. Alternatively, if the form has a
control-menu box at the left side of the title bar, you can double-click on it to replicate the
58
Getting Started
cancel button. If you single click the control-menu box, a control menu appears which also
allows you to close or move the form.
59
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Data entry
Forms can contain a wide variety of data entry fields, boxes, options and buttons. Some of the
commonly used ones in SPACE GASS are:
Command buttons
You choose a command button to initiate an action, such as carrying out or cancelling a
command. The Ok, Cancel and Help buttons are common command buttons. In SPACE
GASS, they are usually located in the top-right corner of the form. To choose a command
button, you can either click on it or press TAB until the button you want is selected, and then
press ENTER.
Scroll bars
Some windows and forms have scroll bars which you can use to view information that does
not fit inside the window. If you can view all of the contents of a window or form without
having to scroll, the scroll bars may be absent or dimmed to indicate that they cannot be used.
Scroll bars have a scroll arrow at each end with a moveable scroll box in between. To scroll
through information displayed in a window or form, drag the scroll box to the desired
position. To scroll one line at a time, click the scroll arrows, or to scroll continuously, hold a
scroll arrow down. To scroll one page at a time, click the scroll bar on either side of the scroll
box.
Text boxes
You can type appropriate information directly into text boxes. Text boxes are generally
sideways scrollable so that they can hold more data than can be displayed in the box.
Sometimes numeric text boxes have arrow buttons attached to them. These are called "spin
buttons" and you can change the number in the text box, without actually having to type
anything, by clicking the arrows or holding them down.
When entering data into a text box, you will find that quite often a default value is already
displayed there. If a default value is highlighted then as soon as you start typing it will be
erased. To edit a default value without causing it to be erased, you can simply click
somewhere in the text box or press one of the keyboard ARROW keys before you begin
typing. The point where you clicked becomes the insertion point for the new text.
If you want to highlight text in a text box, you can simply drag the pointer across the text, or
double-click on a word to select one word at a time. Any text that you type will then replace
the highlighted text. You can also delete highlighted text by pressing "DEL" or
"BACKSPACE".
Generally, when you select a text box by clicking on it, its default value does not become
highlighted, however if you use the TAB key to get to the text box, its default value does
become highlighted.
60
Getting Started
List boxes
Display a list of items in a scrollable window from which you can make a selection. In special
circumstances, you can sometimes select more than one item from a list box.
Combo boxes
Appear initially as a rectangular box containing the current selection. When you select the
down arrow in the square box at the right of the selection, a list of available choices appears.
If there are more items than can fit in the box, scroll bars are provided.
Radio buttons
Represent a group of mutually exclusive options. You can select only one option at a time. If
you already have one option selected, your current selection replaces it. The selected radio
button contains a black dot.
Check boxes
Represent non-exclusive options. You can select as many check box options as needed. When
a check box is selected, it contains an X.
Lists
Sometimes SPACE GASS will ask you to provide a list of items such as nodes, members or
load cases. Lists can be typed in as integers separated by commas or dashes. If, for example,
your list was to contain the items 1,2,6,7,8,9,13,14,15 and 20, you could type it in as
1,2,6,7,8,9,13,14,15,20 or as 1,2,6-9,13-15,20. Dashes simply allow you to list a range of
numbers.
A special type of list is used to input flange restraint positions in the steel member design
modules. This list accepts @’s (AT symbol) instead of dashes and can be used to quickly
input a number of equally spaced flange restraints. For example, a list containing the
following numbers 1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 could be replaced with 5@1.2,4@0.6.
61
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
SPACE GASS jobs are actually ZIP files renamed from {Job}.ZIP to {Job}.SG. You
can manually open and view their contents with WinZip, however be careful not to make any
changes or SPACE GASS may no longer be able to open them.
62
Getting Started
You can start a new job by clicking the toolbar button or selecting "New" from the File
menu.
If you have unsaved changes to the current job file then SPACE GASS will ask you if you
wish to save these changes.
63
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Opening a job
You can open a previously saved job by clicking the toolbar button or selecting "Open"
from the File menu.
You will be prompted for the name of the file you wish to open. SPACE GASS, by default,
looks in the most recently accessed folder when opening a job.
64
Getting Started
Merging jobs
You can open another previously saved job and merge it with the current job by selecting
"Merge" from the File menu. It is a good idea to save the current job first so that you can
recover it if required.
For the job being merged with the current job, you can specify whether you want to include
its structural data (required), load data and/or design data.
The insertion point is the location at which the (0,0,0) origin of the merged job will be
located. The default insertion point will guarantee that no overlapping with the current job
occurs.
In order to prevent clashing of numbered items, the merged job will be adjusted so that its
numbering starts after the highest numbers in the current job. This might prevent some jobs
from being merged if there is not enough room between the highest numbers in the current job
and the maximum numbers specified in the problem size limits. If this occurs, you could
renumber the current job and/or the merged job before attempting the merge, or you could
increase the problem size limits if they are not already at their maximum settings.
65
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Saving a job
You can save the current job by clicking the toolbar button or selecting "Save" from the
File menu.
Saves all changes made to the job. If you have not already created a name for the job (ie. if it
is previously unsaved) then you will be prompted for a file name and a location (performs the
same function as selecting "save as" from the file menu).
"Save As" is similar to "Save", except that the job is saved under a new name that you
specify. For example, if you open Job1, make changes to it and then use Save As to save it as
Job2, Job1 will be left unchanged while Job2 will be the changed version of Job1.
66
Getting Started
Deleting a job
You can delete a previously saved job by selecting "Delete Job" from the File menu.
Deletes the entire job. Use it with care because the job cannot be recovered after it has been
deleted.
67
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Cleaning up a job
You can clean up the current job by clicking the toolbar button or selecting "Clean-up
Job" from the File menu or the floating menu.
Cleans up your model by deleting obsolete items or items that are no longer connected to
anything. For example, it will remove loads that are applied to non-existent nodes, members
or plates, or section properties that are not being used by any members. It is very useful for
quickly removing the causes of many analysis errors.
The clean-up tool can also merge nodes that are within a specified distance of one another,
transferring members, plates, restraints, loads, etc. from the deleted nodes to the retained
nodes. If this action results in a change to the way the structure responds to the applied loads
then an error message will be displayed and the clean-up will not proceed. Any pairs of nodes
close together that are linked with master-slave constraints will not be merged.
Dummy nodes can be removed provided they are not used as direction nodes for members or
plates.
68
Getting Started
Running a macro
Macros are simply programs external to SPACE GASS that you can run from within SPACE
GASS using this tool. They can be MS-Excel or MS-Access programs, DLLs, ActiveX
programs, EXE programs or batch files.
Macros are not for running and controlling SPACE GASS from another external program.
For that you should refer to Running a Script.
You can open the macro management form by clicking the toolbar button or selecting
"Run a Macro" from the File menu or the floating menu.
To run a macro, simply double-click the macro name in the form shown below.
To add a new macro or edit an existing macro, just click the "Add" or "Edit" buttons in the
above form and then fill in the details in the following form.
Macro Title is the name of the macro that will appear in the "Run a Macro" form.
Macro Type specifies the type of macro that is involved.
Macro File gives the location of the external program that will be executed when you run the
macro. This is not required for ActiveX macros.
Class Name is the name of the class in an ActiveX macro.
Macro Name is the name of the macro in an MS-Excel or MS-Access macro.
Parameter is a list of extra parameters that are passed to the macro.
Examples of each type of macro are supplied with SPACE GASS and are located in the main
program folder.
69
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Running a script
Scripts allow you to run and control SPACE GASS from another program external to SPACE
GASS.
Scripts are not for running an external program from within SPACE GASS. For that you
should refer to Running a Macro.
A script is simply a text file that contains a list of commands that SPACE GASS will
automatically execute one-by-one. The script file can be located anywhere, and its name and
location must be specified in the command line when SPACE GASS is started.
For example, a command line option of -s "c:\scripts\myscript.txt" would load the myscript.txt
script file from the c:\scripts folder. Note that the double quotes (" ") can be omitted if this
option is at the end of the target field. If you don’t want SPACE GASS to be visible when
running in script mode then you can use a "SHOW MIN" line in the script file as described
below.
You can create a script file manually using a text editor or you can write a program that will
create the script file and hence be able to control SPACE GASS automatically.
The commands in the script file allow you to select any of the SPACE GASS menu items,
however currently only the import, export, analysis and exit functions will bypass their input
dialogs when in script mode. All of the other functions will display their normal dialogs and
messages and then continue with the script when you have responded to them.
Any error messages will be displayed and cause the script mode to be terminated. Any
informative messages or warnings will be added to the log file and will not cause the script to
pause.
If you want to run SPACE GASS normally, ensure that the -s script file option does not exist
in the target field of the SPACE GASS shortcut that you use to start SPACE GASS, otherwise
SPACE GASS will go into script mode and will execute all the script commands rather than
allowing you to control it normally.
1. A header line containing "SPACE GASS Script File" must appear before any other command
lines.
2. An optional LOGFILE line can be included between the header line and the first command
line. It lets you generate a log file that contains a list of all the menu commands executed from
the script file, plus any messages, warnings or errors that might occur while SPACE GASS is
running in script mode. It’s format is "LOGFILE Filespec", where Filespec is the path and
name of the log file you want to create.
3. An optional SHOW line can be included between the header line and the first command line.
You can use it to specify whether SPACE GASS runs in a minimized, normal or maximized
window when in script mode. It’s format is "SHOW MIN", "SHOW NML" or "SHOW
MAX". "SHOW MIN" runs SPACE GASS minimized so that it is not visible except for an
icon on the taskbar. This is probably the most useful setting for running SPACE GASS in
script mode. "SHOW NML" runs SPACE GASS in a window that is usually smaller than the
overall screen size. "SHOW MAX" runs SPACE GASS maximized so that it fills the entire
screen area. This is the default setting and is the same as having no SHOW line in the script
file.
70
Getting Started
Note that the SHOW line overrides any -min, -nml or -max command line options that might
have been specified. See "Command line options" for more information.
4. An optional PAUSE line can be included that allows you to pause the script. It can be useful if
your script is not working properly and you want to see what stage it is up to at certain points
in the script file.
(b) the merge option when importing, where M signifies to merge rather than overwrite (eg.
M c:\Data\MyData.XLS to merge file MyData.XLS with the current job). If the "M" is
omitted when importing then the current job gets overwritten.
(c) the type of static analysis, where LIN=Linear, SSF=Small displacement theory/Secant
matrix/Full loading, SSR=Small displacement theory/Secant matrix/Residual loading,
FSF=Finite displacement theory/Secant matrix/Full loading, FSR=Finite displacement
theory/Secant matrix/Residual loading, FTR=Finite displacement theory/Tangent
matrix/Residual loading, LSF=Large displacement theory/Secant matrix/Full loading,
LSR=Large displacement theory/Secant matrix/Residual loading, LTR=Large displacement
theory/Tangent matrix/Residual loading.
Note that SSF, SSR, FSF, FSR, FTR, LSF, LSR and LTR are all non-linear analyses and are
only applicable if MENU 04 02 is used.
The above parameters can also be used to set the type of axial force distribution calculation in
a buckling analysis when MENU 04 05 is used.
(d) the list of load cases to be analysed, where CASES<list> specifies the list (eg.
CASES4,6,12-17,23,24 to analyse load cases 4, 6, 12-17, 23 and 24). Note that CASES0
signifies that all load cases should be analysed.
(h) the number of load steps in a non-linear static analysis, where STEPS<n> specifies the
number of steps (eg. STEPS1 for one load step).
(i) the maximum number of iterations per load step in a non-linear static analysis, where
ITNS<n> specifies the maximum iterations (eg. ITNS10 for a maximum of 10 iterations per
load step).
(j) the convergence accuracy in a non-linear static analysis, where CNVG<n> specifies the
convergence (eg. CNVG99.99 for 99.99% convergence).
(k) the lists of steel design groups, section properties and/or load cases when performing a
steel member design or check. The lists can be specified as GROUPS<list>, SECTIONS<list>
71
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
and/or CASES<list> (eg. GROUPS1-5,12,13,15-20 to export groups 1-5, 12, 13 and 15-20).
Note that GROUPS0, SECTIONS0 and/or CASES0 signifies that all items should be included.
Note that any analysis or design options not set by you via the Extra parameter are taken to be
whatever was used in the previous analysis or design. For example, if you run an analysis of
load cases 1,2,3 and 4, and then run another analysis in script mode with the CASES
parameter omitted, it will also use just load cases 1,2,3 and 4.
6. Comment lines are permitted anywhere in the file provided that they have a "#" before the first
non-blank character.
Note that when you exit SPACE GASS via a script file, any changes to the current job will be
abandoned. If you wish to save the changes then you should include a Save or Save-As
command before the Exit command.
72
Getting Started
Job status
You can display the current status of the job as shown below by selecting "Job Status" from
the File menu.
73
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Shortcuts
Many of the menu items can also be accessed using a keyboard or mouse shortcut.
Renderer shortcuts
While using any of the renderer tools, various keyboard shortcuts are available that can speed
things up. They are listed below.
Shortcut Action
Tab key Toggles all of the property panels on or off
F11 key Toggles full screen mode on or off
G key Toggles the grid on or off
S key Toggles the snap on or off
X, Y or Z keys Allows you to set the working plane
A key (hold down) Temporarily disables aligning with a "locked on" node or
member
C key (hold down) Temporarily disables attaching to a node or member
Up/Down arrow keys Zooms in/out
Rotate mousewheel Zooms in/out
Drag with left mouse button Rotates
Drag with right mouse Pans
button
Many of the other shortcuts listed below are also available in the renderer
Other shortcuts
The following list shows a number of special mouse and keyboard shortcuts that operate some
of the most useful and commonly used tools.
74
Getting Started
75
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
76
Input Methods
Input methods
There are four main ways in which data can be input into SPACE GASS.
Structure Wizard
If your model resembles one of the standard structures available in the Structure Wizard then
it is the easiest way to quickly generate your model in SPACE GASS. Even if it isn’t exactly
what you want, you can then use the other graphical or datasheet tools to modify the
generated model to your exact requirements.
Datasheet Input
Each component of the SPACE GASS model can be input, edited or viewed in a Datasheet.
For example, there are datasheets for nodes, members, plates, section properties, member
loads, masses, etc. Datasheets are an invaluable tool for viewing data or making changes,
particularly using the multi-row editing tool.
Graphical Input
You can use Graphical Input to input or edit any parts of the structural data or load data in
your model. This is a very powerful tool that has the advantages of allowing you to make
large changes quickly and see your changes visually as you make them.
Some of the commonly used CAD and BIM (building information management) programs
that can be linked to SPACE GASS include Tekla Structures (XSteel), ProSteel, Microstation,
Frameworks Plus, StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural and AutoCAD.
You can also import from SPACE GASS text files, CSV (comma separated value) files, DXF
files, SDNF files, Microstran ARC files and MS-Excel files.
If you have your own program that generates the SPACE GASS data, if it can write the
data into a SPACE GASS text file, CSV file or MS-Excel file in the correct format then it can
be imported into SPACE GASS.
If you wish to know the format of a CSV or MS-Excel file that is suitable for importing into
SPACE GASS, the best way is to generate a small model in SPACE GASS using the structure
wizard or some other method and then export it into a CSV or MS-Excel file and use resulting
file as a pattern. The SPACE GASS text file format is fully explained in Text file format, but
you can also generate a text file from SPACE GASS and use it as a pattern.
The other formats are quite complex and are simply generated by the programs that you are
importing your SPACE GASS model from.
Common Database
Each of the above data input methods operates on the same common database, therefore you
can use any combination of methods to input your data. For example, you can use the
77
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
structure wizard to generate the basic frame geometry, then graphically edit the geometry and
apply some loads, followed by opening up some datasheets to view the data and make further
modifications to the structure or loads.
When some data has been input, regardless of the amount or type, you can produce an output
report on the screen or printer. In addition, regardless of which input method you use, the
graphics display area displays the current state of the structural model graphically. A graphics
hardcopy can also be produced at any time.
78
Linking to Other Programs
Linking to other programs
SPACE GASS can link to many other engineering, CAD and BIM (building information
management) programs using a wide variety of links and file formats.
Some of the commonly used CAD and BIM programs that can be linked to SPACE GASS
include Tekla Structures (XSteel), ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus, StruCAD, Revit
Structure, Bentley Structural and AutoCAD.
Other programs that can import and/or export CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) or IFC Step files can also
be linked to SPACE GASS. These include STAAD, Risa-3D, SAP2000 ETABS, ROBOT,
SmartPlant4D Structural and others
Programs that can import and/or export DXF or SDNF files can also be linked to SPACE
GASS, however only the basic geometry can be included in these formats.
Details of the files that SPACE GASS can import/export are as follows.
SPACE GASS Text File This format is ideal for people who wish to
write their own programs to generate the
SPACE GASS data and then import it into
SPACE GASS. The format of SPACE GASS
text files is fully explained in "Text file input
".
ZIP File This format is still available but is essentially
obsolete because the native SPACE GASS job
files are actually ZIP files renamed from .ZIP
to .SG.
CSV File This format is also ideal for people who wish
to write their own programs to generate the
SPACE GASS data and then import it into
SPACE GASS. It is a text file with the values
separated by commas that can be written by
many programs including MS-Excel.
CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step File Useful for transferring models with many
other CAD and building management
programs such as Tekla Structures (XSteel),
ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus,
StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural,
AutoCAD, etc. This is a very comprehensive
format that includes the structural and load
data.
IFC Step File Useful for transferring models with many
other CAD and building management
programs such as Tekla Structures (XSteel),
ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus,
StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural,
AutoCAD, etc. This is a very comprehensive
format that includes the structural and load
data.
79
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
In order to import from or export to a SPACE GASS text file, CSV file, SDNF file,
Microstran ARC file, MS-Excel file or MS-Word file, the procedure simply involves selecting
the desired format from the Import or Export options in the File menu and then choosing a file
name.
Linking to other programs using the very comprehensive CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step, IFC Step
or Revit Structure transfer options are fully explained in the following sections.
80
Linking to Other Programs
They can be used to link SPACE GASS with programs such as Tekla Structures (XSteel),
ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus, StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural,
AutoCAD and many others that use the CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step or IFC Step formats.
The "analytical" model includes the "visible" information too, but it also contains "hidden"
information such as support conditions, member end releases, offset data, section and material
properties, loads, load combinations, design data and analysis results.
The other main difference with the analytical model is that, depending on the program you are
importing from, the geometry may be somewhat idealised so that the centroids of members
line up with the members they are connected to. For example, bracing members that connect
to a beam-column connection do not often line up with the centroid of the beam-column
connection in the real structure and in the "physical" model, however they may be adjusted to
line up in the "analytical" model.
A conversion file is simply a text file that contains a list of the SPACE GASS section names
together with the library each section comes from and the name of the section that is used by
the program SPACE GASS is communicating with. An extract from a typical conversion file
is as follows:
You can see from the above example that the SPACE GASS name and the "Other name" are
often very similar and sometimes only involve adding or removing spaces or changing from
"x" to "*" or vice versa.
81
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Standard section name conversion files are supplied with SPACE GASS for each of the
SPACE GASS section libraries and each of the well-known programs that you may want
SPACE GASS to communicate with. For example, Tekla Structures conversion files are
supplied for each of the SPACE GASS section libraries. Similar sets of conversion files are
also supplied for Revit Structure, Prosteel, etc.
Custom section name conversion files can then be created in either of two ways.
1. You can create a custom conversion file that is a combination of some of the standard
conversion files supplied with SPACE GASS.
To do this you must first select a program name in the "Convert section names for" list box
and then click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left and ensure that the SPACE
GASS libraries from which the sections will be taken are listed in the "Library search order"
box.
You can then create the custom conversion file by clicking the "Create a custom section name
conversion file" button.
2. You can create a template for a custom conversion file that contains just the SPACE GASS
section names and the libraries they come from, but not the "other program" names.
To do this you must click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left and then ensure
that the SPACE GASS libraries from which the sections will be taken are listed in the "Library
search order" box.
You can then create the template conversion file by clicking the "Create a template section
name conversion file" button.
To convert the template conversion file into a complete custom conversion file, you should
edit the template file with a text editor such as Notepad and manually enter the "other
program" names at the end of each line. You could also use MS-Excel, however when opening
the file, you must specify that the file is comma delimited, otherwise each line will appear in
82
Linking to Other Programs
Section name conversion files are stored in the SPACE GASS program folder (usually
"c:\Program files\SPACE GASS\Exe").
Details of how to import and export using these links are explained in the following sections.
83
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Import links
You can import a CIS/2 or IFC Step file by selecting "Import - from CIMSteel/2 Step" or
"Import - from IFC Step" from the File menu.
When importing from Revit Structure, you can import a CIS/2 or IFC Step file created by it or
you can select the "Send Model to SPACE GASS" item from the Revit Structure "Tools >
External Tools" menu as explained in "Special Revit Structure Links".
Even though the internal structure of CIS/2 step files and IFC step files are quite different, the
importing procedure is the same and hence the following instructions apply to both.
The name of the file being imported is displayed in the "Data Filename" field and you can
select another file by clicking on the button to the right of the input field.
When importing, to ensure that the section names used by the source program are converted
properly to SPACE GASS names, you should do the following:
1. If you are linking with a standard program for which a section name conversion file exists,
select it in the "Convert section names for" list box.
If the name of the program you are linking with does not appear in the list, it simply means
that there is currently no standard conversion file for that program. If so, you should select
"Other". You can then create and use a custom conversion file or use one that you previously
created as explained in "Creating custom section name conversion files" in the previous
section. Alternatively, you can just skip the custom conversion file option and the section
names will be imported or exported with no conversion.
2. Click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left to display the section libraries form as
shown below.
84
Linking to Other Programs
If you selected a program name in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above,
ensure that the "Use a standard section name conversion file" option is ticked. This will
activate the section name conversion using the standard conversion files supplied with SPACE
GASS.
If you selected "Other" in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above, and you
have a custom conversion file that you want to use, ensure that the "Use a custom section
name conversion file" option is ticked and that the name of the custom conversion file is in the
"Conversion filename" field. If you wish to create a custom conversion file, follow the
procedure in "Creating custom section name conversion files" in the previous section.
If you wish to use a mixture of custom and standard conversion files, you can tick both the
"Use a custom section name conversion file" and "Use a standard section name conversion
file" options. In this case, SPACE GASS will try to convert the section name using the custom
conversion file first and, if the name can’t be found there, the standard conversion files will be
used.
3. You also need to check that the appropriate SPACE GASS libraries are listed in the "Library
search order" box.
The "Library search order" box controls which SPACE GASS libraries will be used when the
section names being imported are converted. If the name of a section being imported does not
appear in one of the libraries listed in this box then it will not be converted. It is therefore
important that you include enough libraries in the "Library search order" box to ensure that all
the sections being imported have their names converted.
You can include all libraries in the box, however this may slow down the import process
slightly due to the increased number of libraries that have to be scanned.
If a section name appears in more than one SPACE GASS library then the libraries higher up
in the list will have priority.
You can choose which components of the model to import by expanding the "Import" branch
of the menu tree on the left and then clicking "Nodes" or "Members" as shown below.
85
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can specify the starting node number or, if you leave it at zero, the imported nodes will
be automatically numbered starting from the first available number.
Nodes that are very close together can be merged into one, and the connecting members and
plates adjusted to suit.
If you select the "Adjust lower limits of node coordinates by" checkbox, SPACE GASS will
find the node with the lowest coordinates and move it to the coordinates that you specify. The
rest of the model will also be moved by the same amount.
You can specify the starting member and plate numbers or, if you leave them at zero, the
imported members and plates will be automatically numbered starting from the first available
number.
Members that have an end very close to another member can be connected together.
Similarly, members that cross each other within a specified distance can be subdivided and
connected at the intersection point.
86
Linking to Other Programs
A number of programs that generate CIS/2 and IFC Step files incorrectly mix radians and
degrees when specifying member direction angles. If you are importing one of these non-
standard files and find that some members are rotated incorrectly, you can select the "Assume
radians for all angular measurements" checkbox to correct the problem.
For more information about the "Physical" and "Analytical" models, refer to "The physical
and analytical models" in the previous section.
87
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Export links
You can export a CIS/2 or IFC Step file by selecting "Export - to CIMSteel/2 Step" or
"Export - to IFC Step" from the File menu.
When exporting to Revit Structure, you can export a CIS/2 or IFC Step file or you can select
the "Update Model from SPACE GASS" item from the Revit Structure "Tools > External
Tools" menu as explained in "Special Revit Structure Links".
Even though the internal structure of CIS/2 step files and IFC step files are quite different, the
exporting procedure is the same and hence the following instructions apply to both.
The name of the file being exported to is displayed in the "Data Filename" field and you can
select another file by clicking on the button to the right of the input field.
When exporting, to ensure that the section names used by SPACE GASS are converted
properly to the names used by the destination program, you should do the following:
1. If you are linking with a standard program for which a section name conversion file exists,
select it in the "Convert section names for" list box.
If the name of the program you are linking with does not appear in the list, it simply means
that there is currently no standard conversion file for that program. If so, you should select
"Other". You can then create and use a custom conversion file or use one that you previously
created as explained in "Creating custom section name conversion files" in the previous
section. Alternatively, you can just skip the custom conversion file option and the section
names will be imported or exported with no conversion.
2. Click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left to display the section libraries form as
shown below.
88
Linking to Other Programs
If you selected a program name in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above,
ensure that the "Use a standard section name conversion file" option is ticked. This will
activate the section name conversion using the standard conversion files supplied with SPACE
GASS.
If you selected "Other" in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above, and you
have a custom conversion file that you want to use, ensure that the "Use a custom section
name conversion file" option is ticked and that the name of the custom conversion file is in the
"Conversion filename" field. If you wish to create a custom conversion file, follow the
procedure in "Creating custom section name conversion files" in the previous section.
If you wish to use a mixture of custom and standard conversion files, you can tick both the
"Use a custom section name conversion file" and "Use a standard section name conversion
file" options. In this case, SPACE GASS will try to convert the section name using the custom
conversion file first and, if the name can’t be found there, the standard conversion files will be
used.
You can choose which components of the model to export by clicking the "Export" branch of
the menu tree on the left.
89
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The normal procedure is to export the analytical model because, as well as the geometric
information, it contains "hidden" information such as support conditions, member end
releases, offset data, section and material properties, loads, load combinations, design data
and analysis results. However, if you are exporting to a program that requires the physical
model then you should select it. Note that when exporting from SPACE GASS, the geometric
information in the physical and analytical models is the same.
For more information about the "Physical" and "Analytical" models, refer to "The physical
and analytical models" in the previous section.
90
Linking to Other Programs
Revit Structure is slightly different to the other programs because there are two ways to link it
to SPACE GASS. In addition to being able to communicate with SPACE GASS via the
CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file links, Revit Structure can be configured to create SPACE
GASS jobs directly and also update the Revit model from them.
The advantage of using the direct Revit Structure link over the CIMSteel/2 and IFC links is
that after you have transferred the model to SPACE GASS, you can import the section
property and steel design changes back into Revit Structure without completely replacing the
Revit Structure model.
The advantage of the CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file links is that you can start with a SPACE
GASS model and transfer it into Revit Structure to create a Revit model from scratch. You
can’t do this with the direct Revit Structure link.
Of course, you can use a combination of methods. You could start with a SPACE GASS
model, export it using CIMSteel/2 or IFC to create a new Revit Structure model, add to the
model in Revit Structure and then export it back to SPACE GASS using the direct Revit
Structure link.
Setting up the direct link between SPACE GASS and Revit Structure
You can add the special SPACE GASS items to the Revit Structure "Tools" menu by running
the RevitSpaceGassLink.exe file in the SPACE GASS program folder (usually "c:\Program
files\SPACE GASS\Exe").
The program will attempt to find the SPACE GASS and Revit Structure program folders and
then display them in the following form.
If either field doesn’t display a folder name with "(file found)" at the end, you will have to
click the appropriate browse button at the right of the field to select the program folder
manually. Once both folders have been identified correctly you can click the Ok button and
the SPACE GASS items will be automatically added to the Revit Structure "Tools" menu.
91
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
When exporting to SPACE GASS, you have full control over units, connections between
beams and columns, loads, member offsets, specification of tension-only members, section
names, etc.
If the names of sections in your Revit Structure model are different to the names used in the
SPACE GASS section libraries, you can use (or set up your own) section name conversion
file that converts the Revit Structure names to the SPACE GASS names. For more
information, refer to "Creating custom section name conversion files" in "CIMSteel/2 Step,
IFC Step and Revit links".
92
Linking to Other Programs
When importing from SPACE GASS you can elect to incorporate steel design data into the
Revit Structure model. This is then retained in Revit Structure and returned to SPACE GASS
the next time you export a model to SPACE GASS from Revit Structure.
93
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
DXF links
The DXF file format is a text format invented for AutoCAD that many programs can import
and export. Because DXF is essentially a drawing format rather than for engineering models,
it is limited to the basic structural geometry when used to transfer a structural model. For this
reason, transferring a structural model is best done using the CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step or IFC
Step file formats or the Revit links which are very comprehensive and can include loads.
The DXF format is, however, a very good means of creating drawings in the form of plans,
elevations, cross sections and connection drawings for transferring into a CAD program.
Details of how to import and export DXF files are explained in the following sections.
94
Linking to Other Programs
You can import a DXF file by selecting "Import - from DXF" from the File menu.
When importing, SPACE GASS interprets each discrete line in a CAD drawing as a member.
This has two ramifications that you will need to consider.
1. CAD programs do not know that intersecting lines need to be segmented into sub-
members with nodes at the intersection points. For example, if you drew the top and
bottom chords of a truss with just two lines adding the struts and braces as separate
lines, SPACE GASS would consider that the chords are not connected to the web
members except at the chord ends.
You must ensure every member that you want in the SPACE GASS model is drawn as
a separate line in the CAD program. If you draw a line in the CAD program which
continues past a node then the member will not be connected to that node in the
SPACE GASS model.
2. You shouldn’t read a DXF file, created with full member geometry, back into SPACE
GASS (it interprets each member flange and web line as an individual member).
Note that SPACE GASS only interprets LINE, 3DLINE and POLYLINE entities as
geometry when importing a DXF file. All other entity types are ignored.
95
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
There are two types of DXF files that can be exported from SPACE GASS.
Full geometry
You can elect to simply export a wireframe drawing that consists of lines along the
centrelines of each member, or you can also include the full member geometry which shows
the actual member shapes including flanges and webs, etc.
Drawings that include the full member geometry can have the geometry lines shortened by a
distance factor that you specify in the General Configuration form at each end of the member
so that intersecting members do not run into one another.
Member schedule
Selecting this check box causes a member schedule to be included in the drawing.
Z axis vertical
AutoCAD and some other 3D CAD programs assume that the Y-axis is vertical for 2D
drawings, while the Z-axis is vertical for 3D drawings.
96
Linking to Other Programs
If this check box is selected then the global Z-axis is made vertical in the drawing, otherwise
the Y-axis is vertical.
Label members
Members can be unlabelled, or labelled with the member names, member marks or both.
Draw with
By choosing 3DLINEs or FACES you can generate a full 3D drawing, or by choosing
2DLINEs you can limit the drawing to just 2D views, elevations, plans or cross sections of the
structure. Note that FACEs support hidden line removal and shading while 3DLINEs do not.
A 3D drawing complete with full member geometry is very useful for visualizing how the
structure fits together and for checking whether members clash with each other or not.
Similar 3D drawings with hidden line removal can also be viewed directly in SPACE GASS
without having to go to a CAD program (see also View rendered model).
These 2D drawings can contain the full member geometry complete with dashed and dotted
hidden lines. It is then a simple matter for a draftsperson to use a CAD package, such as
AutoCAD, to add connections, notation, etc. and complete the structural drawing.
2D drawing plane
If you have specified a 2D drawing by choosing 2DLINEs in the "Draw with" combo box,
you must choose a 2D drawing plane here.
2D drawing limits
If you have specified a 2D drawing, then you must nominate upper and lower drawing plane
limits. The limits will be along the global axis at right angles to the 2D drawing plane. Any
members that lie between the two limits will be included in the drawing.
Scale
You can scale the drawing up or down with this field. For example, a scale of 10 causes the
drawing dimensions to be reduced by a factor of 10. Units for the DXF drawing file are the
same as those used in SPACE GASS.
Title
Typing a title into this field causes it to appear at the bottom of the drawing.
You can specify that the layers should be section-specific for centerlines, full geometry and/or
text. This means that each member type will have its own layer rather than the entire frame
97
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
just going into a single layer. You can then set your CAD software so that each layer has a
different color, making identification of the various section types very easy.
1. Enable the "Generate drawings for a CAD system" option at the beginning of the connection
design phase (see also Running a steel connection design). This causes a DXF drawing file to
be created for every connection designed.
2. Click the toolbar button after the connection design phase to view the connection
drawings graphically and then selectively produce DXF files from there (see also View steel
connection drawings).
Using either method, the final result is the same. You can control the drawing layer names by
setting them in the SPACE GASS configuration data. An example of a steel connection
drawing produced automatically by SPACE GASS is shown as follows.
98
Linking to Other Programs
99
Modelling the Structure
Modelling the structure
Before a frame can be modelled and analysed with a program such as SPACE GASS, it must
first be idealised and modelled mathematically. The most popular mathematical model uses
the concept of nodes connected by elements of a finite size (finite elements).
SPACE GASS requires that frames are represented by nodes connected by members, cables
or plates. Such nodes are generally free to move and rotate in space. Practical structures,
however, are connected to a footing in some way, and so node restraints must be applied
which limit the movement of selected nodes.
The relative movement between nodes connected by a member, cable or plate is a function of
the section and material properties of that element. Loads can be mathematically represented
in the model and can be applied elements. Such loads include all of the normal force and
moment type loads, in addition to load inducers such as prescribed displacements and
temperature differentials. A single analysis can consider numerous load cases, each of which
may contain many different load types.
During the analysis phase, all unrestrained node displacements (degrees of freedom) are
calculated for each load case. Element forces and moments are then determined from the
relative movement of the nodes they are connected to and, finally, reactions are calculated by
equating element reactions at each restrained node.
If the analysis selected is non-linear, SPACE GASS does an initial linear analysis and then
modifies the stiffness matrix for each member based on the previous analysis node
displacements and member axial forces. It then re-analyses the structure for the modified
member stiffness and continues iterating the analysis phase in this way until convergence is
achieved. Note that because the plate elements are linear elements at this stage, their stiffness
is not modified during the non-linear analysis iterations.
101
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Coordinate systems
The geometry of a structural model is referenced by a set of global XYZ axes. Each member
and plate element also has its own set of local xyz axes so that items such as section
properties and local loads can be more easily referenced.
All axes are right hand orthogonal. This means that if you are looking at the XY plane with
the Y-axis pointing upwards and the X-axis pointing to the right, the Z-axis points towards
you as shown below.
Global Axes
The shape and position of a structure in space is defined by a set of global axes (X,Y,Z). All
node coordinates, for example, are input relative to the global axes system. The global XZ
plane is assumed to be horizontal, while the global Y-axis points vertically upwards.
Note that although SPACE GASS assumes that the Y-axis is vertical by default, it can be
configured to set the Z-axis to vertical. This is done via the Viewpoint tool.
Global Axes
Member Axes
The local axes for a member have their origin at node A and are defined as follows:
1. The x-axis lies along the axis of the member and points from node A to node B.
2. The local y-axis is normal to the local x-axis and points in the same general direction
as the global Y-axis. It is orientated such that the local xy-plane is parallel to the
global Y-axis.
3. The local z-axis is orthogonal with x and y.
For members that have their longitudinal axis parallel to the global Y-axis, rule 2 is
undefined and hence, for these members, the local z-axis points in the same direction
as the global Z-axis.
4. If a direction angle, node or axis is defined then the member is rolled about it’s
longitudinal x-axis by the direction angle or, if a direction node or axis is defined, by
an amount such that the local y-axis is aligned with the direction node or axis as
shown below.
102
Modelling the Structure
103
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular member, you can display
them graphically (see also View local axes).
Plate Axes
The local axes for a plate have their origin at the centre of the plate and are defined as
follows:
1. The x-axis is in the plane of the plate and is parallel to the line joining node A and
node B.
2. The local y-axis is also in the plane of the plate and is normal to the local x-axis.
3. The local z-axis is normal to the plane of the plate and is orthogonal with x and y.
4. If a direction angle, node or axis is defined then the local axes are rotated about the
plate’s normal z-axis by the direction angle or, if a direction node or axis is defined,
by an amount such that the local y-axis is aligned with the direction node or axis as
shown below.
Note that defining a direction angle, node or axis affects the orientation of the plate’s
axes but not the orientation of the plate itself.
104
Modelling the Structure
105
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular plate, you can display
them graphically (see also View local axes).
106
Modelling the Structure
Sign conventions
Items which act along or about an axis are considered to be positive when they act along or
about the positive axis direction. Positive rotations conform to the right hand screw rule
shown as follows.
Applied loads have their sign determined by the axes system in which they are referred. Most
types of member and plate loads can be specified in either the global or local system, however
node loads and self weight are always referenced by the global system.
Node displacements are positive if they displace along or around the positive global axis
directions. External reactions are positive if they act along or around the positive global axis
directions.
Member Actions
Member actions follow the sign conventions as follows.
Positive moments cause compression on the positive axis side of the member.
107
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Channel and angle sections have their flange toes pointing in the direction of the local
z-axis. Positive y-axis moments therefore cause the flange toes to go into compression.
Positive shears cause the node A end of the member to translate in the direction of the
positive axis with respect to the node B end.
Positive torsions cause the node A end of the member to rotate anti-clockwise with respect to
the node B end when observed from the node B end.
Plate Actions
Plate actions follow the sign conventions as follows.
Plate Forces
108
Modelling the Structure
Plate Moments
When calculating the design moments for reinforced concrete slabs, the twisting
moment Mxy must be combined with the normal bending moments Mx and My. The Wood-
Armer method is commonly used for this and is explained in "Bending Moments in Reinforced
Concrete Slabs" below.
Plate Stresses
Note that plate elements have no rotational stiffness about their local z-axis. This
means that there is effectively a rotational pin connection between the plate and its corner
nodes about the axis normal to the plate.
Positive moments cause compression in the top (positive z-axis) face of the plate.
Plane Stress
Three dimensional objects subjected to loads generally have three principal stresses, however
in structural elements where one dimension is very small compared to the other two (ie. plate
elements), one of the three principal stresses is zero and a state of "plane stress" is said to
exist. In this case, the stresses are negligible with respect to the smaller dimension as they are
not able to develop within the material and are small compared to the in-plane stresses.
Principal Stress
For plates subjected to plane stress, there are two principal stresses acting in the principal axis
directions. The angle between the principal axes and the local x and y axes is called the
principal angle. The principal stresses can be calculated from x, y and xy using Mohr circle
theory as follows.
109
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
= Tan-1(2xy/(x - y))/2
where x, y and xy are the membrane and shear stresses in the local axis directions (as per
the above diagrams), 1 and 2 are the principal stresses, xymax is the maximum shear stress
and is the principal angle.
The equivalent stress is often called the "von Mises Stress" as a shorthand description. It is
not really a stress, but a number that is used as an index. If the von Mises stress exceeds the
yield stress, then the material is considered to be at the failure condition.
The von Mises stress can be calculated from the principal stresses according to:
where 1 and 2 are the principal stresses and vm is the equivalent or "von Mises" stress.
Using the Wood-Armer method, the design moments Mx* and My* can be determined as
follows:
To design bottom reinforcement (ie. calculate moments that cause tension in the bottom face):
Mx* = Mx + | Mxy |
My* = My + | Mxy |
If either of Mx* or My* from the above calculations are < 0 then
If Mx* < 0 then Mx* = 0 and My* = My + | Mxy2/Mx |
If My* < 0 then My* = 0 and Mx* = Mx + | Mxy2/My |
To design top reinforcement (ie. calculate moments that cause tension in the top face):
Mx* = Mx - | Mxy |
My* = My - | Mxy |
If either of Mx* or My* from the above calculations are > 0 then
If Mx* > 0 then Mx* = 0 and My* = My - | Mxy2/Mx |
If My* > 0 then My* = 0 and Mx* = Mx - | Mxy2/My |
Further information can be found by searching for "Wood-Armer" on the Internet or at web
sites such as http://www.scribd.com/doc/76706580/Slab-Design-by-Wood-Armer-Method or
http://www.scribd.com/doc/51463621/Wood-Armer
110
Modelling the Structure
SPACE GASS contains an algorithm which checks for possible ill-conditioning and displays
warning messages if appropriate. Generally, these messages appear well before ill-
conditioning actually occurs. They do, however serve to highlight structures which are close
to being ill-conditioned. If after the analysis, the sum of the reactions equals the sum of the
applied loads then it can be assumed that the frame is well conditioned.
Instabilities occur when one or more nodes are free to translate or rotate without resistance
from the frame. Sometimes unstable structures are very easy to detect, such as when restraints
have not been applied or when an obvious collapse mechanism is possible.
Instabilities are often very subtle and difficult to isolate. For example, if an unrestrained node
has a pinned connection to each of its connecting members then it would be free to rotate and
an instability would result. This type of instability can be hard to detect because it only affects
one node in the structure. True trusses must therefore have every rotational degree of freedom
restrained.
Another common type of instability occurs when a group of members connected end-to-end
in a straight line are free to rotate about their longitudinal axis. The instability occurs because
during the analysis the program is unable to determine the amount of rotation of the
intermediate nodes.
Some instabilities cannot be detected by a static analysis, and you should therefore be wary
of results that contain very large deflections or deflections that occur in the wrong
direction. However most instabilities can be detected by a buckling analysis and are
identified by very low buckling load factors. If you get buckling load factors that are below
the minimum allowable value (eg. shown as "<0.001" when the minimum allowable value
is 0.001), this could indicate an instability problem rather than a buckling problem. It is
even more likely to be an instability problem if the low buckling load factors occur in every
load case.
If the model contains instabilities, the buckling analysis may, in some cases, give invalid
results. In the absence of instability or buckling messages from the static analysis, you
should always check the deflections to see if they are excessive or not. Excessive deflections
are sometimes the only indicator of instabilities.
There are no hard and fast rules to follow in the detection of conditioning and stability
problems, however if the structure is clearly drawn and examined, the problem usually
becomes evident to any moderately experienced user.
111
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
SPACE GASS is now able to automatically rectify some instabilities caused by nodes that are
free to rotate or translate in one or more directions without resistance from interconnecting
members, restraints or constraints. For more information, refer to "Stabilize unrestrained
nodes" in Running a static analysis.
112
Project Data
Project data
This chapter describes in detail each type of data that can be included in the analysis model.
This chapter does not include design data (see also "Steel member design", "Steel
connection design" and "Concrete column design").
113
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Units
SPACE GASS can handle a variety of different unit sets. The units do not need to be
consistent or even belong to the same system (ie. you can mix units from Metric and
Imperial). You can quickly select standard Imperial or Metric by clicking the "Imperial" or
"Metric" buttons and then make further individual changes as required.
If the "Convert the current job for any unit changes" box is checked then all of the data in the
current job will be converted in accordance with the units changes you made. If the box is not
checked then the units will change but none of the job data will be converted.
If the "Save the above units as the default for new jobs" box is checked then SPACE GASS
will use the selected units as the default every time you start a new job in the future.
If you are entering data and are not sure what the correct units are for that particular
type of data, you should either (a) select the datasheet (from the datasheets button on the top
toolbar) for the particular type of data you are entering and observe the units displayed at the
bottom-right of the datasheet or, (b) produce an output report and observe the units displayed
next to each section heading.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Before accepting any output from SPACE GASS, please check that all of the input and
output data conforms to the units you have selected. You can do this most conveniently by
producing a full output report and observing the units that are shown next to the heading
in each section of the report.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If you change units for any or all data types after having input some data and you want the
data to be converted, then you must ensure that the option to "Convert the current job for
any unit changes" is checked. Otherwise the data will not be converted automatically.
114
Project Data
115
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Headings
Project heading
Allows you to describe the project.
Job heading
Allows you to describe the job.
Designer
Identifies you as the designer.
Notes
Allows you to describe the job in more detail.
Attachments
You can attach external documents, drawings, spreadsheets and other files to your job that are
then saved and embedded into the main <job>.SG job file. They can be added, opened or
extracted using the form shown below.
116
Project Data
117
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Node data
Nodes are used to define the geometry of the structure in 3D space, and to mark the start and
end points of members in the model.
There are six possible displacements (degrees of freedom) per node in a 3D frame. They are
translation along, and rotation about, X,Y, Z.
Node
The node numbering order is of no consequence and successive node numbers do not have to
be sequential. For example, a straight beam with five nodes could just as easily be numbered
24,8,2,13,99 as 1,2,3,4,5. It is possible to leave gaps in the numbering sequence to allow for
nodes which might be inserted later.
While the node numbering sequence doesn’t effect the results it is easier to interpret
the results of an analysis if a logical numbering sequence has been used.
You can renumber nodes at any stage by using the graphics renumbering facility (see
also Renumber).
X, Y and Z coordinates
Global coordinates of the node that may be positive or negative.
Dummy nodes
These are nodes that are not connected to any members. They are useful as direction nodes or
reference points.
118
Project Data
Member data
Members represent the actual beams, columns, ties, struts, cables, braces, etc. in the real
structure. They must be prismatic and must be connected to a node at each end.
Member
The member numbering order affects the analysis frontwidth, however this is of no
consequence if the wavefront optimiser is used. The graphical renumbering tool also means
that the initial member numbering order is unimportant because it can be easily changed at
any time. Successive member numbers do not have to be sequential.
Type
Choices are: Normal,
Tension-only,
Compression-only,
Cable.
While in tension, tension-only members act identically to normal members with axial,
flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into compression then they are
automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed from the model. Members such
as tension bracing and slender ties fall into this category.
Slender members that rely on axial tension to resist lateral loads applied to them
should be modelled as cables rather than as tension-only members!
In both tension-only and compression-only cases, the program does an initial analysis and
then scans for tension-only members that have gone into compression, and compression-only
members that have gone into tension. If any of these are found they are disabled and the
structure is re-analysed. This process continues until all tension-only members are in tension
and all compression-only members are in compression. Note that disabled members are
sometimes re-enabled if their axial force reverses sign during the iteration process.
119
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Cable members use axial tension only to resist lateral loads. They have no flexural, torsional
or shear capacity, and so to avoid instabilities you must restrain all rotational degrees of
freedom for nodes connected to cable members which are not rotationally fixed to other
members. Cable end fixities of FFFFFF, FFFFFR, FFFFRR, FFFRRR all give the same
results.
Cables that aren’t laterally loaded are treated as tension-only members which become
disabled if they go into compression. Laterally loaded cables sag instead of taking
compression.
Cable length
If the member type is "Cable" then an unstrained cable length can be specified to allow for
cable sag when the cable length is different to the chord length (as follows). A zero cable
length indicates that the unstrained cable length is equal to the chord length.
Chord length
The chord length is the straight line distance between the member ends Note that a member’s
chord length may not be equal to the distance between it’s end nodes if offsets exist for that
member.
Note that the three member orientation members are mutually exclusive. Hence, setting one of
them to a desired value causes the other two to be disabled.
120
Project Data
Direction angle
The direction angle (degrees), also called the skew angle, allows you to roll the member (with
its local axes) about it’s longitudinal axis. It is normally set to zero so that the member local
y-axis lies in a vertical plane.
Direction node
Selecting a direction node aligns the local xy-plane with the nominated node.
A direction node can be a normal node or a dummy node (one which is not connected to any
members).
Direction Node
Direction axis
Choices are: X axis,
Y axis,
Z axis,
-X axis,
-Y axis,
121
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
-Z axis,
N/A.
Selecting a direction axis aligns the local xy-plane with the nominated axis (eg. -Z axis
selected in the diagram as follows).
Direction Axis
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular plate, you can display
them graphically (see also View local axes).
Node A and B
The two end nodes connected to each member are referred to as node A and node B. Node A
is considered to be at the start of the member and any external loads applied to the member
are located by their distance from node A.
Node A cannot be equal to node B, however there are no restrictions relating to node A being
numerically bigger than node B or vice-versa.
End fixity
A member may be released or fixed to its end nodes with varying degrees of fixity. Member
end fixity is referenced by the local axes system and there are six possible components at each
end which may be fixed or released. These components are specified by a six character code
corresponding to translational fixity along x, y and z and rotational fixity about x, y and z
respectively.
The letter "F" represents fixed and "R" represents released. Thus, as an example, a pin ended
truss member with no rotational end fixity in a 3D frame could be modelled using a fixity of
"FFFFRR" at each end (or FFFRRR if the torsions are also released), while a pin ended truss
member in a 2D frame could have fixities of "FFFFFR". Members with fully fixed ends
would have fixities of "FFFFFF".
You can also specify a spring stiffness, allowing you to model a semi-rigid joint. The letter
"S" represents a spring stiffness, applicable to rotation about the local y or z axes of the
member. If you specify a spring stiffness in the fixity code you will also need to enter a
corresponding stiffness in the y/z stiffness fields.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Member end fixities should not be confused with node restraints. Member end fixities
specify how members are connected to their end nodes, while node restraints specify how
nodes are connected to the footings or other supports. Note that completely rigid frame
members should have member end fixities of "FFFFFF" regardless of whether the frame
has pin based supports or not.
122
Project Data
Section
The section property number references a particular member cross section from the section
property data. Thus, members with identical section properties would have the same section
property numbers.
The current section property for the members selected is displayed in this field. If no section
property has been chosen, or if more than one section property applies to the selection, this
field will be blank. The source is displayed along with an indication of whether the section
has been flipped and what type of angle section was chosen (if appropriate).
You can change the section property by entering another section property number. If this
number corresponds with a section which has already been defined, the corresponding
properties will be displayed. All of the members selected will have this property applied to
them.
Material
The material property number references a particular material from the material property data.
Thus, members with identical materials would have the same material property numbers.
For full details of the forces and moments in members, refer to "Sign conventions".
123
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Plate data
A mesh of plate elements can be used to represent walls, slabs, plates, etc. in the real
structure. Plate elements can be triangular or quadrilateral with a node at each vertex. They
can be connected at their nodes to other non-plate elements such as beams, columns, cables,
etc.
Plate
The plate numbering order affects the analysis frontwidth, however this is of no consequence
if the wavefront optimiser is used. The graphical renumbering tool also means that the initial
plate numbering order is unimportant because it can be easily changed at any time. Successive
plate numbers do not have to be sequential.
Type
Each plate can be specified as thick (using Mindlin plate theory – Ref. 19,20,21) or thin
(using Kirchoff plate theory – Ref. 22,23). Transverse shear is not considered for Kirchoff
plate theory and for the vast majority of applications in structural engineering we would
recommend that Mindlin plate theory be used.
Plate Axes
It is recommended that for the plate elements in a surface, you align all their in-plane axes in
the same direction rather than having them orientated randomly. For circular plates, you may
elect to have all of the axes aligned in the same direction or, alternatively, you could align
them radially or tangentially depending on which type of output you require.
124
Project Data
If the plate axes are orientated randomly then the results will be for different axis directions
and they will be difficult to compare. It will also be difficult to produce meaningful contour
diagrams if the plate axes are not aligned.
The Align plate axes tool can be used to quickly align the axes for a selection of plate
elements. It will also optionally reverse the normal z-axis of some plate elements if they are
not all pointing in the same direction. You can also use the Reverse plate direction tool as an
alternative way of reversing the normal z-axis.
Direction Angle
Direction Node
125
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Direction Axis
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular plate, you can display
them graphically (see also View local axes).
Actual thickness
This is the actual thickness of the plate and is used to calculate it’s self weight and self-mass
if they have been specified.
The thickness should be limited to around 15% of the in-plane plate dimensions for Mindlin
plates and around 5% for Kirchoff plates. The plate dimensions relate to the overall plate size
and not the element size.
Membrane thickness
This is used to calculate the membrane stiffness of the plate and is usually the same as the
actual thickness. The membrane stiffness terms are the ones that affect Fx, Fy and Fxy as
shown below.
126
Project Data
Bending thickness
This is used to calculate the bending stiffness of the plate and is usually the same as the actual
thickness. The moment of inertia per unit length of the plate is taken as Tb3/12, where Tb is
the bending thickness. The bending stiffness terms are the ones that affect Mx, My and Mxy
as shown below.
When calculating the design moments for reinforced concrete slabs, the twisting
moment Mxy must be combined with the normal bending moments Mx and My. The Wood-
Armer method is commonly used for this and is explained in "Sign conventions".
Shear thickness
This is used to calculate the transverse shear stiffness of the plate and is only used for Mindlin
(thick) plate theory. For a uniform plate the shear thickness should be approximately Ta*(5/6)
to be consistent with Mindlin thick plate theory, where Ta is the actual plate thickness. The
transverse shear stiffness terms are the ones that affect Vxz and Vyz as shown below.
127
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Offset
Plates can be offset along their normal z-axis. This may be required to line them up with other
interconnecting elements such as other plates or members.
Material
Material property number references a particular material from the material property data.
Thus, plates with identical materials would have the same material property numbers.
For an accurate analysis, plates must be properly meshed into elements that are a
suitable size, shape and pattern. For more information, refer to the Mesh tool.
For full details of the forces, moments and stresses in plates, refer to "Sign
conventions".
128
Project Data
Node restraints are used to model the structure’s supports. They are sometimes referred to as
boundary conditions.
Unrestrained nodes are generally free to move along or about any axis direction, however
practical structures must be restrained to a footing in some way, otherwise instabilities would
occur.
Nodes can be restrained about one or all of their six degrees of freedom and such a restraint
may take the form of a fixed restraint or a flexible restraint. If a degree of freedom is given a
flexible restraint then a spring stiffness must also be input. Fixing a degree of freedom has the
effect of immobilizing that node movement, while specifying a flexible restraint causes the
node movement to be a function of the spring stiffness.
Node restraints are specified by a six character code corresponding to restraints along X, Y
and Z and about X, Y and Z respectively. "F" represents fixed, "R" represents released and
"S" represents spring (or flexible). "D" restraints are no longer supported and "F" should be
used instead.
For example, a pin-based support that prevents all translations but allows the node to rotate
about X, Y or Z would have a restraint code of FFFRRR. Alternatively, a roller support that
allows the node to move in the X direction only and rotate about X, Y or Z would have a
restraint code of RFFRRR. A fully built-in (encastre) support would have a restraint code of
FFFFFF. A restraint that prevents movement in the Z direction while allowing all other
movements and rotations would have a restraint code of RRFRRR.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Member end fixities should not be confused with node restraints. Member end fixities
specify how members are connected to their end nodes, while node restraints specify how
nodes are connected to the footings or other supports. Note that completely rigid frame
members should have member end fixities of "FFFFFF" regardless of whether the frame
has pin based supports or not.
General restraint
The general restraint facility allows you to apply a restraint to all otherwise unrestrained
nodes.
For example, if you have a frame with two pin based supports and you want to prevent all
translations in the Z direction for all of its other nodes, you could apply restraints of FFFRRR
to the two support nodes and specify a general restraint of RRFRRR.
129
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
In order to input a general restraint, you simply apply the desired restraint to any unrestrained
node and then tick the "General" box (or select "Yes" in the General Restraint column if you
are using a datasheet).
Using a general restraint saves data entry time and reduces the quantity of printed output.
Note that output reports only show the general restraint code on one node, even though the
analysis has assumed that it applies to all unrestrained nodes.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The general restraint facility should be used with great care and only if you are absolutely
sure of the effect it has on your model! If you apply a general restraint early in the
development of your model and then forget that it exists at some later stage when it is no
longer appropriate, you could be over-restraining your model. This could happen if nodes
are added that shouldn’t get the general restraint. It could also happen if you initially use a
general restraint to prevent all out-of-plane movements in a 2D frame for example and then
extend the frame to 3D and forget to remove the general restraint.
When modelling the elastic properties of soil as a spring support, the spring stiffness is based
on the modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil. This is a notoriously difficult parameter to get
an accurate figure for. The following typical values of the modulus of subgrade reaction (to be
used as a guide) are extracted from J. E. Bowles, "Foundation analysis and design", McGraw
Hill 4th Edition, 1988.
The spring stiffness to be input into SPACE GASS is simply equal to the modulus of
subgrade reaction multiplied by the area of the footing that the spring is modelling. For
example, if you have a 600mm wide strip footing supported on soil with a modulus of
subgrade reaction of 80000 kN/m3 and the soil is modelled as springs spaced 500mm apart,
the axial stiffness of each spring would be 80000 x 0.600 x 0.500 = 24000 kN/m. Units for the
spring stiffness are shown in the headings of the node restraints datasheet.
130
Project Data
loads in that direction. Of course, nodes that are braced in the out-of-plane direction should be
restrained in that direction, however nodes that can move out-of-plane in the real structure
should not be restrained in that direction in the model. Failure to do this could affect the
buckling load factors, effective lengths and dynamic natural frequencies and mode shapes,
and could result in unsafe designs.
For example, if a 2D frame rafter is sub-divided, the intermediate nodes should not be
restrained in the out-of-plane direction unless they are braced in that direction in the real
structure. Restraining them would prevent any out-of-plane buckling or vibration modes that
could occur if the rafter member hadn’t been sub-divided.
Another example is a pin support for a 2D XY-plane frame column base which could be
modelled with the standard 2D pin base restraint code of FFFFFR, however this would
prevent rotations about the global X-axis. In reality, a column pin support would probably
allow rotations about both horizontal axes and hence a restraint code of FFFRFR would be
more appropriate. Restraining the rotation about the X-axis would affect the out-of-plane
buckling and vibration modes of the column and could result in incorrect results.
The general rule to follow is that if a node is free to move or rotate in the real structure then it
should not be restrained in that direction in the model. Be careful with the general restraint, as
it is applied to all nodes that don’t have their own restraint, and for some nodes this may not
be appropriate.
If you have applied a general restraint and require some nodes to not have a restraint
at all, you can prevent them from getting the general restraint by restraining them with a code
of RRRRRR.
131
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can display the section property data for a member by clicking the button in the
Member Properties form.
Section properties must be input for each type of member cross section in the model. Each
section property describes the geometric properties of a single cross section relative to the
local member axes.
Section
There are two fields, one for the section property number and the other for the section name.
Section property numbers do not have to be sequential or in any particular order. The section
property name is used as a description for the section, and as a reference for sections which
have been read from a library.
Source
This indicates the source of the section. There are four different sources:
If you create a section in the shape builder by importing it from the library, and you
don’t make any changes to it, the source will be the name of the library the section was taken
from. However, you can still edit the shape via the shape builder. You can also edit other
library sections in the shape builder, even if the section wasn’t input via the shape builder.
Flipped
"YES" if the section has been flipped (see also Flipping a section).
Angle Type
Indicates the angle configuration.
132
Project Data
Short-Short,
Long-Long,
Starred.
Area of section
Cross sectional area of the section.
Torsion constant
Torsional stiffness of the cross section. Calculating the torsion constant for arbitrary cross
sections can be quite complex, particularly if the cross section changes shape (warps) under
torsion. For example, a circular tube has a relatively high torsion constant because it doesn’t
warp under torsion. However, if a saw cut is made through the tube wall the torsion constant
is drastically reduced because the cross section can change shape under very small torsion
loads. Thus two shapes with very similar geometric properties can have substantially different
torsion constants.
The torsion constant for shapes which cannot warp is equal to the polar moment of
inertia.
The torsion constants for various common shapes can be calculated using the following
formulae.
Solid circle:
Circular tube:
Solid square:
Solid rectangle:
where A & B are length and breadth (or vice-versa)
and A>B
I, H, T, L and angle J is equal to the sum of the torsion constants of the
sections: composite sections which constitute the total
cross-section.
The shear area is the effective cross sectional area which is used in the calculation of shear
deformations. In general, the shear area depends upon the shearing stress distribution, which
in turn depends upon the shape of the cross section.
133
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For rolled steel sections, the major axis shear area is approximately equal to the area of the
web(s). For rectangular cross sections, the shear area is equal to A/1.2, where A is the gross
area. Values for other shapes are given in standard textbooks on strength of materials.
For most cross sections and materials, the shear deformations are negligible
compared to the flexural deformations. Therefore, the shear area can often be specified as
infinite.
Principal angle
Angle (degrees) from principal axes to geometric axes in anti-clockwise direction. For
example, the principal angle is positive for single angle sections that have their horizontal leg
pointing to the left.
Section mark
Member mark used in connection detail drawings, marking plans, etc.
Member cross sections are always shown as if you are looking along the member from
the node B end to the node A end.
134
Project Data
Standard sections libraries are available for most countries and they include all I sections, H
sections, T sections, channels, angles, square tubes, rectangular tubes and circular tubes.
135
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Shape builder
You can open the shape builder by clicking the button in the Member Properties form of
either the renderer or the traditional graphics window.
The shape builder allows you to modify library shapes, combine library, standard and custom
shapes into built-up sections, and create standard and custom shapes. Standard shapes are
easily created by clicking on one of the standard shapes buttons and entering the desired
dimensions. For a custom shape, you are required to enter three or more coordinates and the
shape builder will display the shape and calculate the section properties.
Inputting shapes
To input a shape, you can:
Import it from a sections library by clicking the library button .
Click the custom shape button and then enter a set of coordinates to define the
perimeter of a shape.
Click the line shape button and then enter a set of coordinates to define a shape
formed by a line of a user defined thickness.
136
Project Data
Each shape can be translated, mirrored, rotated or transposed using the shape editing buttons
shown below.
Shapes can also be dragged and snapped together via their edge and corner reference points as
shown below.
137
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
When dragging shapes, the behaviour can be controlled using the grid and snap settings along
the bottom of the shape builder as shown below.
Shapes can be copied by dragging while holding down the Ctrl key.
138
Project Data
Multiple shapes can be selected by clicking them while holding down the Shift key. You can
you can stack shapes vertically or horizontally using the stack alignment buttons .
139
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Dimensions
140
Project Data
Design properties
SPACE GASS can now do a steel member design or check using sections that haven't been
imported from a library, however you must specify their steel design properties. You can do
this via the shape builder "Design Properties" button. Generally speaking, you would only use
the "Design Properties" button when are you don't want to save the section to a library
because the saving to library process also includes inputting the steel design properties.
Saving sections
You can save your section to a custom library for later recall into any other jobs by clicking
the "Save to Library" button and then filling out the form that appears below.
141
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If a custom section library doesn’t yet exist or if you wish to create a new custom library,
click the button at the right of the "Library" field and then fill out the custom library’s
details. Similarly, if the library doesn’t yet contain any groups or if you wish to create a new
group within a custom library, click the button at the right of the "Group" field and
then fill out the group’s details.
The SPACE GASS section libraries can now contain built-up sections made from
whatever shapes you can build in the shape builder, including voids. Built-up or non-standard
sections cannot be used in the design/check modules, however they can be recalled into any
other jobs and used in a static, dynamic or buckling analysis.
The shape builder always shows the cross section as if you are looking along the
member from node A towards node B. This is the reverse of how it was in SPACE GASS 10
and earlier versions.
The section properties displayed in the panel on the right side of the shape builder
apply to the whole cross section (ie. the sum of the composite shapes in the display window).
142
Project Data
Flipping a section
If the properties of a section have been read from a library, SPACE GASS then asks if the
section has been flipped. This simply causes the section to have its major and minor section
properties transposed and allows the section to be used in the frame with its major axis
parallel to the local y-axis instead of the z-axis. In most cases, the major axis of a member is
parallel to its local z-axis (see also Coordinate systems).
When a section is flipped, the orientation of the local y and z axes are not affected. This
information is not required for sections with equal major and minor axis section properties.
You can see from the diagram above that when the section is flipped, the y and z axes remain
unchanged. This method of flipping a section is different to applying a 90 direction angle to
a member. A direction angle rotates the local axes together with the section, while the above
method simply transposes the section properties. Note that the transposed properties apply to
every member which references the flipped section property number, while a direction angle
rotation affects only the member(s) to which it is applied.
143
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are therefore assumed to be lying on
their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping). They are
orientated at right angles to normal beam Tees which have the major axis parallel to the
flange.
144
Project Data
Angle sections
For angle sections, you can specify single or double angle sections.
The diagrams above show the orientation of a single angle section and the available double
angle sections. Note that the z-axis is the major axis in all cases.
For double equal angles, the long leg is assumed to be the vertical leg in the
diagrams above. Note that in SPACE GASS 10 and earlier, double equal angle
sections with long legs connected were adjusted internally and treated as though
their short legs were connected. This adjustment was removed in SPACE GASS 11
and later versions.
145
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can display the material property data for a member by clicking the button in the
Member Properties form. The material property data for a plate is always shown in the Plate
Properties form.
Material properties must be input for each type of member or plate material in the model.
Each material property describes the properties of a single isotropic material.
Material
There are two fields, one for the material property number and the other for the material
name. Material property numbers do not have to be sequential or in any particular order. The
material name is used as a description for the material, and as a reference for materials which
have been read from a library.
E
Value of Young’s Modulus for the material.
Poisson’s
Value of Poisson’s Ratio for the material.
Mass Dens
Mass density, required only for self weight calculations.
Temp Coeff
The coefficient of thermal expansion, required only for thermal loads. You must ensure that
this is appropriate for the temperature units you have selected (see also Units).
146
Project Data
F’c
Characteristic concrete strength, required only for concrete materials. Is used only in the
SPACE GASS concrete design modules.
147
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can display the master-slave constraints data for a node by clicking the button in the
Node Properties form.
Master-slave constraints allow you to connect nodes together with imaginary links so that
they translate and/or rotate together. The degree of constraint can be varied so that any or all
of the six degrees of freedom of a node can be linked to another node. For example, it is
possible to connect two nodes together with a 3D rigid link, a 2D rigid link, a 2D translational
link, a 2D rotational link, a 1D translational link, a 1D rotational link or any other
combination of the six degrees of freedom.
A node which is linked to another node is termed a "slave node" and the node to which
it is linked is termed its "master node". A master node can have many slave nodes, however a
slave node can have only one master node. A typical frame can have many slave nodes and
many master nodes. A master node cannot be the slave of another master node. A slave node
constrained DOF cannot be a support (restraint).
A constraint link between a slave node and its master node not only affects the movements of
the slave but also the master.
Node
Slave node to be constrained.
Master node
The node to which the slave node is to be constrained. You can select a master node by
clicking the "Select" button and then choosing a node.
Constraint code
Master-slave constraints are controlled by a six character constraint code which specifies the
exact constraint relationship between a slave node and its master. The six characters of the
constraint code correspond to translational constraint along X, Y and Z and rotational
constraint about X, Y and Z respectively. "F" represents fixed (constrained) and "R"
represents released (unconstrained).
In order to illustrate how the constraint code works, we will consider some typical examples
of constraints in the global XY plane. Please note that the following examples apply equally
to the XZ and YZ planes also.
148
Project Data
When considering the XY plane, the only significant characters in the constraint code are the
first, second and sixth. These correspond to translation along X and Y, and rotation about Z.
When considering the XZ plane, only the first, third and fifth characters apply, and when
considering the YZ plane, only the second, third and fourth characters apply.
If a slave node has a constraint code of "RFxxxR" (where xxx could be any combination of
F’s and R’s) then its Y-axis translation will be the same as its master node. Note that the X-
axis translation and the Z-axis rotation of the slave node will be completely independent and
in no way affected by its master node. This can be represented by the simple constraint
equation Dys = Dym, where Dys is the slave Y-axis translation and Dym is the master Y-axis
translation.
Similarly, if a slave node has a constraint code of "RRxxxF" then its Z-axis rotation will be
the same as its master node and the X-axis and Y-axis translations will be independent. The
constraint equation in this case is Rzs = Rzm, where Rzs is the slave Z-axis rotation and Rzm
is the master Z-axis rotation.
A slightly different situation occurs if both a translational degree of freedom and a rotational
degree of freedom are constrained. An example of this is a constraint code of "FFxxxF". In
this case, the constraint code effectively places a 2D imaginary rigid member between the
slave node and its master so that the translations of the slave node are a function of both the
translations and the rotation of the master node. The constraint equations in this case are
Dxs = Dxm-Ly*Rzm
Dys = Dym+Lx*Rzm
Rzs = Rzm
where Lx and Ly are the horizontal and vertical components of the distance between the slave
and master nodes.
Constraint movements
149
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
X translation (Dxs=Dxm)
FRRRRR constrained
RFRRRR Y translation (Dys=Dym)
constrained
RRFRRR Z translation (Dzs=Dzm)
constrained
RRRFRR X rotation constrained (Rxs=Rxm)
RRRRFR Y rotation constrained (Rys=Rym)
RRRRRF Z rotation constrained (Rzs=Rzm)
FFFRRR X, Y and Z (Dxs=Dxm)
translations
constrained
(Dys=Dym)
(Dzs=Dzm)
RRRFFF X, Y and Z rotations (Rxs=Rxm)
constrained
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
FFRRRF Rigid link in XY (Dxs=Dxm-Ly*Rzm)
plane
(Dys=Dym+Lx*Rzm)
(Rzs=Rzm)
FRFRFR Rigid link in XZ plane (Dzs=Dzm-Lx*Rym)
(Dxs=Dxm+Lz*Rym)
(Rys=Rym)
RFFFRR Rigid link in YZ plane (Dys=Dym-Lz*Rxm)
(Dzs=Dzm+Ly*Rxm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
FFFFFF Rigid link in all (Dxs=Dxm-Ly*Rzm+Lz*Rym)
planes
(Dys=Dym+Lx*Rzm-Lz*Rxm)
(Dzs=Dzm-Lx*Rym+Ly*Rxm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
Any further combinations of the six character constraint code can also be specified.
The following diagrams show the effect that each of the XY plane constraints have. The
effects shown apply equally to the XZ and YZ planes also. Note that constraint codes for any
of the three planes can be combined together as can be seen in the examples above.
150
Project Data
Master-slave constraints can be used to great advantage in many structures. They are
particularly useful for modelling floor slabs in three dimensional frames. A typical floor slab
may displace and rotate in plan as a unit but its plan dimensions do not change due to its large
in-plane rigidity. This could be modelled in SPACE GASS by using one of the perimeter
nodes in a typical floor slab as the master node for that floor and specifying all of the other
perimeter nodes in that floor to be slaves of the master node in the in-plane (XZ plane)
directions using a constraint code of "FRFRFR". Thus all nodes in the floor would move as a
unit in the in-plane (horizontal plane in this case) directions. They would still, however be
free to move independently in the out-of-plane (vertical) direction.
151
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Another example is the case of wind bracing or a scissor lift where two continuous members
cross each other and are connected to each other with a bolt or pin. The pin transfers shear
from one member to the other but not moment so that the members are free to rotate about the
pin independently.
This situation is very difficult to model in a frame analysis program unless a constraint
facility is available. Using a master-slave constraint, it is a simple matter to locate two nodes
on the same point where the two members cross. One of the members would be connected to
152
Project Data
the first node and the other member would be connected to the second node. Assuming that
the frame was in the XY plane, a constraint code of "FFRRRR" could then be used to force
the two nodes to translate together but rotate independently.
Another situation which is difficult to model without using a master-slave constraint occurs
when two members of different depths are connected together end-to-end such that their
centrelines do not line up. In such cases a node could be placed at the end of each member
and then a master-slave constraint could be used to join the two nodes together with a rigid
link.
In some situations, short stiff members could be used as an alternative to constraint links,
however they would be susceptible to ill-conditioning problems, particularly if they were very
stiff in comparison to other members in the structure.
153
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can display the offsets data for a member by clicking the button in the Member
Properties form.
It is possible to specify a rigid member segment that doesn’t deform under bending at each
end of a member. These rigid segments have infinite stiffness for bending, shear and axial
deformations. Member offsets are very useful for modelling the very stiff area at the
interconnection of members (especially stiff members such as large steel members or concrete
members).
Member offsets
For example, the rectangular reinforced concrete frame shown above on the left could be
modelled quite accurately with SPACE GASS using a model similar to the one shown on the
right. Each member in the model has short member offsets at each end where intersecting
members overlap.
Member offsets are also very useful in situations where the centrelines of connected members
do not intersect at a node. For example, the diagonal brace members of a plane truss may
intersect below the top chord centreline. Member offsets could be used to allow for this.
Member offsets could also be used to model the centreline mismatch when members of
different depths are connected end-to-end with "top-of-steel" alignment.
154
Project Data
The ends of a member with "local" offsets are offset relative to an axis connecting the
end nodes of the member rather than being relative to the axis of the member in its final
position.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Be careful when sub-dividing members that have local offsets because the direction of the
axis that the offsets are relative to will change when any intermediate nodes are added.
155
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Concentrated forces and moments may be applied to any node along or about the global X, Y
and Z axis directions. If a load is applied to a restrained degree of freedom then that load is
simply added to the final reaction.
Node loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be combined with other load
types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain node loads.
Node
Node to be loaded.
X, Y and Z forces
Node forces (global axes).
X, Y and Z moments
Node moments (global axes).
156
Project Data
Prescribed node displacements allow you to specify known displacements and/or rotations to
nodes. They can be very useful for situations where a frame deflects by a fixed and known
amount such as settlement of a support for example.
Prescribed node displacements may be applied in any number of load cases and may be
combined with other load types within the same load case. It is important to note that like all
other load types, prescribed node displacements do not have any effect on load cases other
than the ones in which they are input.
Case
Load case to contain prescribed displacements.
Node
Node to be displaced.
X, Y and Z translations
Node translations (global axes).
X, Y and Z rotations
Node rotations (global axes).
157
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Concentrated forces and moments may be applied to members in either the global or the local
axes systems. Such loads can act along or about any of the three axis directions and can be
located at any point along the member.
Member concentrated loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be
combined with other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain concentrated member loads.
Member
Member to be loaded.
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple concentrated loads on a member in the same load case.
Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example five
concentrated loads applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load
numbers of 1,2,3,4 and 5 respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single
member within the same load case, the sub load number should be 1.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced.
Units
Units system in which load positions are referenced.
Position
The load position is defined as the distance from node A to the load. Depending on the "Units
system" selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or as a percentage of
the member length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load at midspan could have the load
position specified as 300mm or as 50%.
X, Y and Z forces
Member concentrated forces.
158
Project Data
X, Y and Z moments
Member concentrated moments.
159
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Member distributed forces can be input in the local or global axes systems and can act along
any of the three axis directions.
Distributed forces may start and finish at any point along the member length and may vary in
intensity from start to finish. Thus, it is possible to apply uniform, trapezoidal, or triangular
distributed loads.
Member distributed forces may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other
load types within the same load case.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
For "Local" or "Global Inclined" loads, the total load is equal to the load per unit length
multiplied by the actual distance between the load start and finish positions. For "Global
Projected" loads, the total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the
projected distance between the load start and finish positions.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
For cable members, distributed forces must be uniform and extend over the entire length of
the cable. For "Global Inclined" UDLs applied to cable members, the total load is equal to
the load per unit length multiplied by the unstrained cable length (which may not be equal
to the distance between the cable’s end nodes). For "Global Projected" UDLs applied to
cable members, the total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the projected
distance between the cable’s end nodes.
Case
Load case to contain distributed member forces.
Member
Member to be loaded.
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple distributed loads on a member in the same load case.
Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example two
distributed loads applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load
numbers of 1 and 2 respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single member
within the same load case, the sub load number should be 1.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced. There are two global axes systems which may be
used. When the axes are designated as "Global projected" the load acts over the projected
160
Project Data
length of the member, while a "Global inclined" load acts over the actual length of the
member.
Units
Units system in which load positions are referenced.
161
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Member distributed torsion loads are similar to member distributed forces except they may
only be applied about the local x-axis. The load intensity may be varied between the start and
finish positions. Member distributed torsions may be applied in any load case and may be
combined with other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain distributed member torsions.
Member
Member to be loaded.
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple distributed torsions on a member in the same load case.
Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number). For example two
distributed torsions applied to a member within the same load case would have sub load
numbers of 1 and 2 respectively. Unless there are multiple loads applied to a single member
within the same load case, the sub load number should be 1.
Units
Units system in which load positions are referenced.
162
Project Data
163
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Thermal loads may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load types
within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain thermal loads.
Element
Member or plate to be loaded.
Thermal load
Uniform temperature change.
Unlike other load types, you can apply thermal loads to non-
existent members or plates without causing an analysis error. Such loads are simply ignored
during the analysis phase. For example, in order to apply a uniform 10 temperature change
to an entire structure with a highest member number of less than 100, you could simply
generate 10 thermal loads on members 1-100 without concerning yourself about possible
gaps in the member numbering sequence.
164
Project Data
It is possible to model prestress loads with equivalent thermal loads and vice-versa, however
this is generally unnecessary because they can both be applied directly in SPACE GASS.
Prestress loads may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load types
within the same load case.
Note that the prestress load you apply to a member is not likely to be the final axial
force in the member at the end of the analysis (unless its ends are fixed in position or don't
move). This is because the axial force changes as the member stretches or compresses as its
end nodes move. If you wish to achieve a particular axial force at the end of the analysis then
a trial and error process is required. This involves setting an initial prestress force,
performing the analysis, checking the final axial force, adjusting the prestress and repeating
the process until the desired axial force is achieved. This is a common requirement in post-
tensioned concrete applications where the tendons are jacked to a known tension.
Case
Load case to contain prestress loads.
Member
Member to be loaded.
Prestress force
The prestress force is positive for compression or negative for tension.
165
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
166
Project Data
Pressure loads may be applied to plates in either the global or the local axes systems. Such
loads can act along or about any of the three axis directions and always extend over the entire
plate surface.
Plate pressure loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be combined with
other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain plate pressure loads.
Plate
Plate to be loaded.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced.
X, Y and Z pressure
Plate pressure loads.
Plate pressure loads can be input graphically as explained in Plate pressure loads or, for
variable pressure loads such as hydrostatic or wind loads, the Varying plate pressure loads
tool can be used.
167
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Self weight loads are considered as forces and moments in a static analysis and as masses in a
dynamic analysis.
Self weight can be automatically generated by the program if an acceleration (such as gravity)
is specified. Acceleration may be specified along any of the three global axis directions. Note
that self weight will only be considered if non-zero mass densities are specified in the
material property data.
When self weight loads are used as masses in a dynamic analysis, the direction and magnitude
of the X, Y and Z accelerations are ignored. The process simply involves calculating the mass
of each member and then applying half of it as translational lumped masses to each of the
member end nodes in each of the unrestrained X, Y and Z global axis directions.
Self weight may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load types
within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain self weight.
X, Y and Z acceleration
Acceleration applied to the entire structure. See Units for the appropriate acceleration units
that apply.
168
Project Data
All loads applied to a structure are always input via primary load cases. Further load cases can
be created by combining the various primary load cases into combination load cases.
Combination load cases can be combined into further combination load cases.
Combination case
Load case to be formed. Cannot be equal to a primary load case.
Case
Load case to be factored and combined into the combination. This can be a primary load case
or a combination load case.
Multiplying factor
The multiplying factor applied to the primary load case when it is combined.
Consider for example a structure that is to be analysed for the following combination load
cases 10, 11 and 12.
169
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Note that for a linear analysis, it is not necessary to analyse the combination load cases. They
can be calculated by simple linear superposition of the primary load case results during the
output phase. For a non-linear (2nd order) analysis however, the simple linear superposition
rules don’t apply and combination load cases have to be fully analysed and treated in the same
way as primary load cases.
For this reason, SPACE GASS allows you to decide whether or not to analyse the
combination load cases and treat them the same as primary load cases or to not analyse them
and have them calculated by simple linear superposition during the output phase. You can
specify the load cases that you want analysed by listing them at the start of the analysis phase.
For example, if you have primary load cases 1,2,3 and 4, and combination load cases 10,11
and 12, you could analyse just the primaries by entering 1-4 for the load cases list.
If you are doing a dynamic spectral response analysis, you should create a reverse
combination load case for each spectral load case. You may also have to create further
combinations to combine the spectral load cases with different direction vectors. For more
information refer to Spectral load data.
SPACE GASS will not allow a combination load case to be a simple linear
combination of analysed primary load cases if any of the primaries have been analysed non-
linearly or if the frame contains tension-only or compression-only members. In this case the
combination load case must be analysed.
You can modify the combination load case data and obtain
new results without re-analysing the structure, however this only applies to linear
superposition combinations. Results for analysed combinations are deleted if the combination
load case data is changed.
170
Project Data
Load case titles serve the purpose of creating clearer, more understandable output. Primary or
combination load cases may be given titles.
Case
Load case to have title defined.
Title
A description of the load case.
Notes
Notes that allow you to describe the load case in more detail.
171
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Lumped masses are considered in a dynamic analysis and are ignored in a static analysis.
Translational or rotational masses can be applied to any node along or about the global X, Y
and Z axis directions. If a mass is applied to a restrained degree of freedom then that mass is
simply ignored during the dynamic frequency analysis.
Masses may be applied in any load cases and may be combined with static loads within the
same load case, although it is often a good idea to put masses in load cases of their own (ie.
not in with static loads) so that they can be isolated in graphics displays or output reports.
Self mass can be added to the lumped masses by either by adding self-weight to a load case
that contains lumped masses or by combining lumped mass and self-weight load cases into a
combination load case.
Case
Load case to contain lumped masses.
Node
Node to have masses applied.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Lumped masses are not the same as loads and therefore cannot be calculated by simply
converting loads to mass units. Masses represent the structure and/or attachments to the
structure which move and rotate with it and which effect its natural frequencies. Some
types of loads would have to be input as lumped masses while others would not. For
172
Project Data
example, dead loads and 30-100% of live loads would normally affect the natural
frequencies of a structure, however wind loads would not.
The inertia of the structure could be modelled in one of the following two ways:
Translational masses
Consider a rigid floor slab. You could model the distribution of mass by placing a small
translational mass at each node in the slab (the sum of all node masses equalling the total
mass of the slab).
In the first approach, the rotational inertia would be provided by the action of each of the
small translational masses being a distance away from the centroid of the slab. In the second
approach, the rotational inertia would be provided directly by the rotational mass at the
centroid of the slab. It is usually more convenient and just as accurate to use the second
approach.
where m is the mass of the rectangle, and a and b are the dimensions of the rectangle.
The concept of rotational mass, together with formulae for calculating rotational masses at
various locations on rectangles and other shapes, is given in Clough and Penzien (10).
Self mass
It is not necessary to manually input lumped masses for the self mass of the structure because
self mass can automatically be considered by simply adding self-weight to one or more load
cases. However, automatic self mass generation does not calculate rotational masses because
of the large number of extra masses that would be generated for a fairly insignificant
improvement in results accuracy. If required, rotational self mass must be manually applied as
rotational lumped masses.
In order to adequately define the distribution of mass along members for which local
vibrations are important, it is sometimes necessary to add intermediate nodes (with masses
applied) to such members.
173
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
In order to perform a response spectrum analysis, you must first create one or more spectral
load cases. A spectral load case contains the number of a mass load case, a direction vector
and a list of mode shapes, each with its associated spectral curve and damping factor. Spectral
load cases can be combined and multiple spectral load cases can be analysed simultaneously.
The mode shapes must have been calculated from a dynamic frequency analysis before
the response spectrum analysis can proceed.
Case
The spectral load case being created (see also "load cases" below).
Mode
A mode shape being included in the spectral load case. Multiple mode shapes can be included
in a single spectral load case by simply inputting multiple entries (lines) with the same
spectral load case number. A particular mode shape can appear only once in each spectral
load case.
It is important that you include the fundamental mode (ie. the mode with the longest period in
the direction of the earthquake), together with all other modes that have significant mass
participation. If you're not sure which modes to include then you should list them all. It will
improve the accuracy of the analysis and won't significantly affect the analysis time.
Spectral curve
The name of the spectral curve to be used with the specified mode shape. Normally all mode
shapes in a spectral load case use the same spectral curve, however you can nominate
different spectral curves for each mode if desired.
174
Project Data
Damping
The damping factor associated with the nominated spectral curve. This value is built into each
spectral curve when it was derived and cannot be changed. It is included in the datasheet for
display purposes only.
Mass case
The mass load case for which the specified mode shapes have been (or will be) calculated
from a dynamic frequency analysis.
Direction vector
Defines the direction of the ground vibration. For example, an earthquake acting in the X
direction would have a direction vector of Dx=1.0, Dy=0.0 and Dz=0.0.
Note that for the NZS and IS codes, if auto-scaling of the base shear is activated, the direction
vector should be parallel to one of the horizontal global axes. For these codes, to model a
direction vector that is at an angle to the horizontal global axes, you should create a separate
spectral load case for each of the horizontal global axis directions and then combine them into
a combination load case using multiplying factors that are proportional to the projected
lengths of the desired direction vector.
Load cases
For building structures, it is common to input two spectral load cases per mass load case, one
for each of the orthogonal horizontal directions. Furthermore, if the loading code requires you
to consider a combination of the two orthogonal directions (ie. AS1170.4-2007 5.4.2.1,
NZS1170.5-2004 5.3.1 or IS1893.1 6.3.2.2) then further load cases may also be required.
Finally, because the dynamic vibrations oscillate from one side to the other, it is also
necessary to consider the reverse of all of the above load cases.
For example, consider two basic spectral load cases defined for a particular mass load case as
follows:
If the loading code requires further combinations of the above load cases in the form of 100%
of the actions in one direction plus 30% of the actions in the perpendicular direction then
further load cases are required. These are most conveniently input as combination load cases
as follows:
Finally, the reverse of the all the above load cases must be defined as further combination
load cases as follows:
175
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Thus, each pair of basic spectral load cases can spawn up to a further ten combination load
cases.
The structure should be designed to resist the envelope of all load cases.
176
Project Data
You can open the spectral curve editor by opening the "Spectral Load Data" datasheet from
the Loads menu and then clicking the button.
You can select the desired spectral curve from the tree in the left-hand window and observe
its data values in the right-hand window. You can also click the spectral curve editor button
(next to the Ok button) to load and display the spectral curve editor as shown below.
The spectral curve editor can be used to input or edit curves in the spectral curve library.
Note, however, that the standard curves supplied with SPACE GASS can’t be changed. The
editor allows you to create a spectral curve that will result in the most accurate analysis
possible.
Operation of the spectral curve editor is self-explanatory and simply involves selecting a
curve name and then inputting or modifying its properties. Each curve contains a set of period
versus acceleration pairs, a description and a damping factor.
You can go to a specific point in a curve by clicking near it in the graphics window or by
scrolling to and selecting it in the list box. The currently selected point in the list box is
highlighted by a small circle in the graphics window. You can add (or delete) points by
clicking the buttons below the list box.
See also Standard Libraries for general information about the operation of the library editor.
177
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can import a spectral curve directly into the spectral curve editor by right-clicking the
spectral library that you want to import the curve into and selecting "From Text File" or
"From Excel". Note that you can't import into a standard library and so you have to create a
custom spectral library first. You can do this by clicking the "Add Library" button near the
bottom of the form.
In order to successfully import a spectral curve into the spectral curve editor you must ensure
that you use the correct format in the text or Excel file.
For example:
AS1170.4 S=1.0:5%
0.00,2.5
0.01,2.5
0.02,2.5
…
…
2.99,0.602276
3.00,0.600937
178
Project Data
179
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The area loads tool generates member distributed forces based on pressure loads applied to
areas defined by members that you have selected. For more information see Area loads and
Member distributed forces.
180
Project Data
This tool lets you generate wave and ocean current loads on submerged structures in marine
and offshore environments where these effects impose significant loading on the affected
structure. For more detailed information refer to "Sea Loads".
181
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Features include:
182
Project Data
183
Text File Input
Text file input
Select "Import from text" or "Export to text" from the File menu
Inputting data into SPACE GASS via a text file is sometimes faster than using datasheet
input, however it is not as user friendly and is not recommended for first time users of SPACE
GASS.
You can use Windows Notepad to edit or create text files. The text editor linked to SPACE
GASS can be started by choosing "Text editor" from the File menu.
SPACE GASS text file names have the form <name>.TXT, where <name> is any name. The
text file should be located in the text data folder as created during the installation procedure.
185
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
It is possible to repeat data throughout the data file. Single items or whole groups can be
repeated. In such cases the last entry overrides any previous entries. For example, if node
coordinates were entered at the top of the file and then updated at the end, the last group
would override the first. This practice, however is not recommended.
Groups of data do not have to be input in any particular order. The program recognises the
data types by their title lines rather than their order of appearance.
Items within a line must be separated by commas.
Lines can be continued on the next line if they end with the "&" character.
The maximum length of a single line is 1024 characters.
The maximum length of a set of continued lines is 2048 characters.
Comment lines must begin with the "#" character.
Blank lines are permitted anywhere in the file.
Non-numeric items that contain commas must be enclosed in "quotes".
Real numbers in SPACE GASS text files no longer need to contain a decimal point.
Furthermore, all numbers in SPACE GASS text files can now be up to 15 digits long (they
were previously limited to 10 digits).
186
Text File Input
Initiator
187
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Headings text
Line 1: HEADINGS
Line 2: Project
Line 3: Job
Line 4: Designer
Line 5: Notes
If any of the heading lines have no data then they should be entered as just a pair of quotes
(eg. "") rather than just being a blank line.
188
Text File Input
Nodes text
Line 1: NODES
Next n Node,X,Y,Z,Gen1,Ndi1,Rot,Ai,Xi1,Yi1,Zi1,
lines: Gen2,Ndi2,Xi2,Yi2,Zi2
For straight line generation, Ai should be zero. For arc or helix generation, Rot is the axis of
rotation, Ai is the angle increment and Xi1, Yi1, Zi1 are the centre of rotation and the helix
length increment. For example, if a helix is generated about the Y-axis, then Yi1 is the helix
length increment. For arc generation the helix length increment is 0.
189
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Members text
Line 1: MEMBERS
Next n Mem,DirAng,DirNode,DirAxis,Type,Na,Nb,Sp,Mp,
lines: Fa,Fb,Ya,SZa,SYb,SZb,Cab,Gen1,Mbi1,Nai1,Nbi1,
Gen2,Mbi2,Nai2,Nbi2
Fa, Fb choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released. "S"=Spring can also be used for the y and z
rotational fixities.
190
Text File Input
Plates text
Line 1: PLATES
Next n Plate,DirAng,DirNode,DirAxis,Type,Na,Nb,Nc,Nd,
lines: TA,TM,TB,TS,Mat,Offset,Gen,PInc,NInc
191
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: RESTRAINTS
Next n Node,Rest,Gr,Gen,NInc,Ax,Ay,Az,Rx,Ry,Rz
lines:
192
Text File Input
Line 1: SECTIONS
Next n sets Sec,Secn,Lib,Mark,Ar,Ix,Iy,Iz,Ay,Az,Pa,Shapes
of lines:
Next set of ShapeType,Points,Dims
3 lines per Void,Parent,Transpose,Mirror,TransX,TransY,Rotate,Fabrication
shape: Strengths
Next set of X,Y,Z
"Points"
lines per
shape:
Sec Section property number (Integer)
Secn Section name (15
Char)
Lib Section library name (8 Char)
Mark Section mark (5 Char)
Ar Area of section (Real)
Ix Torsion constant (Real)
Iy Y principal moment of inertia (Real)
Iz Z principal moment of inertia (Real)
Ay Y shear area (Real)
Az Z shear area (Real)
Pa Principal angle (Real)
Shapes The number of shapes in the section (Integer)
ShapeType Shape type (0=Undefined, 1=Rod, 2=Square, 3=Flat, 4=CHS, (Integer)
5=SHS, 6=RHS, 7=I-shape, 8=PWG, 9=Channel, 10=Beam Tee,
11=Column Tee, 12=Equal Angle, 13=Unequal Angle, 14=Cruciform,
15=Box Girder, 16=Wedge, 17=Slice, 18=Fillet, 19=Points, 20=LSB,
21=LSB/B2B, 22=Lines, 23=Triangle, 24=Cee, 25=Zed, 26=Top Hat,
27=DA/Short, 28=DA/Long, 29=DA/Starred, 30=Polygon,
31=PolyTube, 32=Equilateral Triangle, 33=Schifflerized Angle,
34=Back to Back Cee, 35=Rounded Angle, 36=Rack, 37=L-shape,
38=Trapezoid, 39=Flat Oval)
Points The number of perimeter points in a points shape or line shape (Integer)
Dims The shape dimensions (D,Bt,Bb,Btw,Bbw,Tt,Tb,Tw,Hf,Rr) (Integer)
Void 1=Void shape (hole), otherwise 0 (Integer)
Parent Parent shape if Void=1 (Integer)
Transpose 1=Transposed shape, otherwise 0 (Integer)
Mirror 1=Mirrored about X, 2=Mirrored about Y, 3=Mirrored about both, (Integer)
otherwise 0
TransX Translation distance along X (Integer)
TransY Translation distance along Y (Integer)
Rotate Rotation angle (degrees) (Integer)
Fabrication Fabrication code (0=Hot rolled, 1=Stress relieved, 2=Lightly welded, (Integer)
3=Heavily welded, 4=Cold formed, 5=Cold formed and stress
relieved)
Strengths Material strengths (Fy,Fyw,Fu for up to 6 grades of steel) (Integer)
X,Y,Z Coordinates of perimeter points in a points shape or line shape (Integer)
193
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: MATERIALS
Next n lines: Mat,Matl,E,Pr,D,T,Fc
194
Text File Input
Line 1: CONSTRAINTS
Next n lines: SNode,MNode,Cnst,Gen,SInc,MInc
195
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: OFFSETS
Next n Mem,Ax,Dxa,Dya,Dza,Dxb,Dyb,Dzb
lines:
196
Text File Input
Line 1: NODELOADS
Next n Case,Node,Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz,Gen,NInc
lines:
197
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: NODEDISPS
Next n Case,Node,Tx,Ty,Tz,Rx,Ry,Rz,Gen,NInc
lines:
198
Text File Input
Line 1: MEMBCONC
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Ax,Un,Ps,Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz,
lines: Gen1,MInc,Gen2,SInc,PInc
199
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: MEMBFORCES
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Ax,Un,St,Fi,Xs,Xf,Ys,Yf,Zs,Zf,
lines: Gen,MInc
200
Text File Input
Line 1: MEMBTORSION
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Un,St,Fi,Ts,Tf,Gen,MInc
lines:
201
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: THERMAL
Next n Case,Elem,Type,Temp,GradY,GradZ,Gen,EInc
lines:
202
Text File Input
203
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
204
Text File Input
Line 1: SELFWEIGHT
Next n lines: Case,Ax,Ay,Az
205
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: COMBINATIONS
Next n lines: Comb,Case,Fact
206
Text File Input
Line 1: TITLES
Next n lines: Case,Title,Notes
207
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: LUMPEDMASS
Next n Case,Node,Tx,Ty,Tz,Rx,Ry,Rz,Gen,NInc
lines:
208
Text File Input
Line 1: SPECTRAL
Next n Case,Mode,Curve,MCase,Dx,Dy,Dz
lines:
209
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Line 1: STEELMEMBERS
Next n lines: Group,Title,MList,SGrade,Units,LoadHeight,
ScanCode,CalcLcMjr,LcMjr,BraceMjr,CalcLcMnr,
LcMnr,BraceMnr, CalcLb,Lb+,Lb-,TopPos,
TopRest,BotPos,BotRest, Ast,EndCon,
EccEffect,Criteria,Bolts,Dia,ISSeismicCat,NZSeismicCat,
MemberType,Cantilever,Gen,GInc,MInc
210
Text File Input
CalcLcMjr choices are "Y"=Calculate LcMjr from a buckling analysis, "N"=Use the input
value of LcMjr.
BraceMjr choices are "Y"=Both ends of the design group are braced in position for buckling
about the major axis, "N"=Either or both ends of the design group are not braced in position
for buckling about the major axis.
CalcLcMnr choices are "Y"=Calculate LcMnr from a buckling analysis, "N"=Use the input
value of LcMnr.
BraceMnr choices are "Y"=Both ends of the design group are braced in position for buckling
about the minor axis, "N"=Either or both ends of the design group are not braced in position
for buckling about the minor axis.
CalcLb choices are "Y"=Calculate Lb+ and Lb- from the flange restraints, "N"=Use the input
values of Lb+ and Lb-.
TopPos and BotPos are lists of the intermediate flange restraint positions which can include
@ multipliers but not dashes. For example, restraint positions 1.2,3.0,4.8,6.6,8.4,10.2,11.4
could be listed as 1.2,5@1.8,1@1.2 or 1.2,5@1.8,11.4.
TopRest and BotRest must be a string of characters without commas, dashes or @’s. For
example FLLPLR.
Ast choices are "A"=Single angle, "S"=Double angle with short legs connected, "L"=Double
angle with long legs connected, "X"=Double starred angle. Ast is only considered if the
section is an angle section.
EndCon choices are "C"=Centroid, "F"=Flange, "W"=Web, "S"=Angle short leg, "L"=Angle
long leg.
EccEffect choices are "Y"=Consider end connection eccentric effects, "N"=Ignore eccentric
effects.
Criteria choices are "W"=Use weight design criteria, "D"=Use depth design criteria.
211
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Terminator
Line 1: END
212
Text File Input
L or C restraint is ineffective
A Lateral restraint type must have Full or Partial restraint types between it and the end of the
design group on both sides to be effective. A Continuous restraint type must be between Full,
Partial or Lateral restraint types to be effective.
213
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Comma is missing
A list of numbers is missing a comma.
214
Text File Input
215
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
HEADINGS
"SPACE GASS Worked Example"
"25m Single Span Portal Frame"
"PS"
""
NODES
1,0.000,0.000
2,0.000,3.750
3,0.000,7.500
4,1.630,7.585
5,3.260,7.671
6,6.250,7.828
7,12.500,8.155
8,18.750,7.828
9,21.740,7.671
10,23.370,7.585
11,25.000,7.500
12,25.000,3.750
13,25.000,0.000
MEMBERS
1,0.00,0, ,N,1, 2,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
2,0.00,0, ,N,2, 3,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
3,0.00,0, ,N,3, 4,3,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
4,0.00,0, ,N,4, 5,4,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
5,0.00,0, ,N,5, 6,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
6,0.00,0, ,N,6, 7,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
7,0.00,0, ,N,7, 8,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
8,0.00,0, ,N,8, 9,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
9,0.00,0, ,N,9,10,4,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
10,0.00,0, ,N,10,11,3,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
11,0.00,0, ,N,11,12,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
12,0.00,0, ,N,12,13,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
RESTRAINTS
1,FFFFFR
2,RRFFFR,Y
13,FFFFFR
SECTIONS
1,"530 UB 92","AUST250", ,"C1"
2,"360 UB 51","AUST250", ,"R1"
3,"360 UB 51-A","", ,"HNCH ",N,0.10773E-01,0.472E-06,0.14524E-04,0.63586E-03
4,"360 UB 51-B","", ,"S4 ",N,0.96446E-02,0.472E-06,0.14519E-04,0.36376E-03
MATERIALS
1,"STEEL","METRIC"
NODELOADS
2,7,0.0,-4.5
MEMBFORCES
1,3,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,4,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,5,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,6,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,7,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,8,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,9,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,10,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
2,3,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,4,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,5,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,6,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,7,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,8,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,9,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
216
Text File Input
2,10,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
3,1,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,6.300,6.300,0.0,0.0
3,2,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,6.300,6.300,0.0,0.0
3,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,6,1,L,A,0.0,1.7410,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,6,2,L,A,1.7410,6.2590,0.0,0.0,3.600,3.600
3,7,1,L,A,0.0,3.4820,0.0,0.0,3.600,3.600
3,7,2,L,A,3.4820,6.2590,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,11,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,4.500,4.500,0.0,0.0
3,12,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,4.500,4.500,0.0,0.0
4,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
5,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
6,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
7,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
SELFWEIGHT
1,0.0,-9.807E-03,0.0
COMBINATIONS
10,1,1.25
10,2,1.50
11,1,0.80
11,3,1.00
11,6,1.00
12,1,1.25
12,3,1.00
12,6,-0.96
13,1,0.80
13,4,1.00
13,7,1.00
14,1,1.25
14,5,1.00
14,7,-6.50
217
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
TITLES
1,Dead load (DL)
2,Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
3,Cross wind (CW)
4,Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
5,Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
6,Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
7,Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
10,1.25DL+1.5LL
11,0.8DL+CW+IPCW
12,1.25DL+CW+ISCW
13,0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
14,1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
STEELMEMBERS
1,"","1,2",N,A,C,A ,N,20.0,1.7,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.2,2.4,3.6,5.3,7",RLLLLFIF,"",RF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
2,"","5,6",N,A,C,A ,N,12.517,1.2,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.3,2.5,3.7,4.9,6.1,7.3,8.1",RLLLLLLLF,"4.9",RLF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
3,"","8,7",N,A,C,A ,N,12.517,1.2,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.3,2.5,3.7,4.9,6.1,7.3,8.1",RLLLLLLLF,"4.9",RLF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
4,"","12,11",N,A,C,A ,N,20.0,1.7,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.2,2.4,3.6,5.3,7",RLLLLFIF,"",RF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
STEELCONNECT
1,"Left baseplate",0,1,0,8,0,S,S,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
2,"Left eave",2,0,3,0,1,S,B,0.0,0.0,3.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
6,"Bolted apex",0,6,7,2,2,B,B,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
11,"Right eave",11,10,0,3,0,S,S,3.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
12,"Right baseplate",0,0,12,0,8,S,S,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
END
218
Structure Wizard
Structure wizard
You can open the structure wizard by clicking the toolbar button or selecting "Structure
wizard" from the Structure menu.
Structure wizard input provides a very fast means of inputting data into SPACE GASS for
structures that conform generally to one of the standard structures shown above.
Once a structure has been selected, a structure specific form is opened which allows you to
input basic data relating to the frame geometry, supports, pattern loads, etc. SPACE GASS
will then generate the structure, and apply any pattern loading, automatically.
The input form for a single bay portal frame is shown below.
219
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
2. Even though a frame is 2D, it may often be appropriate to allow some nodes to move
and/or rotate in the out-of-plane direction. This is especially the case if a buckling or
dynamic frequency analysis is to be performed where out-of-plane movements can
occur even when there are no loads in that direction. Because of this, you may have to
modify the restraints generated by the structure wizard to allow these movements.
Conversely, you may have to apply more out-of-plane restraints if those movements
are prevented in your real structure.
For more information, refer to Node restraint data and, in particular, the section
entitled "Important note about restraining 2D frames".
220
Portal Frame Builder
Portal frame builder
This tool lets you generate all of the structural, load and design data for a complete portal
frame building. You can then go ahead and analyse and design it using the normal analysis
and design tools available in SPACE GASS. It supports gable (symmetrical and
asymmetrical) and monoslope roofs, overhangs, knee braces, haunches, fly bracing, uneven
frame spacings, openings, roof/wall bracing and end wall props.
Wind loads are generated in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.2:2011 for all regions in Australia
and New Zealand. They are calculated for each direction based on the region, average
recurrence interval, terrain category (including transition zones), shielding and topography.
Openings can be allowed for by specifying minimum and maximum internal Cp,i pressure
coefficients for each wind direction. Wall loads can be applied to the columns (the normal
situation) or to the eave ties and end frame rafters for buildings that have tilt-up panels.
Load cases are automatically generated for all combinations of the dead, live and wind loads.
You can access the portal frame builder tool from within the renderer by clicking the
button or by selecting "Portal frame builder" from the Structure menu.
Note that if you haven't purchased the portal frame builder tool, you can still run it in a free
trial mode that limits you to a pre-defined building width and height, and prevents you from
exporting or saving the job. All other features are fully activated.
221
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Refer to Geometry, Extra data, Sections and materials, Loads, Load cases or Design for more
details about the input parameters.
222
Portal Frame Builder
Options
The basic options are largely self-explanatory, however some of the less obvious ones are
explained in more detail below.
If "Define eaves height by" is set to "Sheeting intersection" then the height is measured from
the footing to the intersection point of the wall and roof sheeting. Otherwise it is measured to
the "Springing height", which is the underside of the rafter (or haunch if one exists) at the face
of the column.
Eave and ridge ties are extended down the full length of the building, whereas end frame prop
ties are placed just between the end frame and the first internal frame at each end of the
building wherever there is a prop.
223
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Gridlines and dimensions can be generated automatically if ticked. You can also edit them or
add extra dimensions manually using the renderer's normal gridline and dimensioning tools.
If you tick "Align column outside flanges" and the end frame columns are different to the
internal frames then the columns will be adjusted so that their outside flanges line up down
the length of the building. If unticked, the columns will be aligned via their centroids.
The "Connect rafter props to bottom flange" option lets you decide between connecting the
props to the rafter centerline or to the bottom flange. If connected to the centerline the
connection is pin-ended, whereas if connected to the bottom flange the connection is rigid.
The reason for the rigid connection is to prevent shear force in the prop generating torsion in
the rafter and potentially causing it to fail unrealistically.
Geometry
All dimensions in the geometry fields are relative to the sheeting lines.
The purlin and girt depths are required so that the frame positions can be calculated relative to
the sheeting lines. For gable frames, the purlins on each rafter are equally spaced with the first
purlin positioned 200mm from the ridge. For monoslope frames, the purlins equally spaced
and centered between the columns. The girts are equally spaced with the first girt positioned
200mm from the footing.
224
Portal Frame Builder
Fly braces can be positioned at every 2nd, 3rd, etc... purlin or girt as specified by you.
Of course you can manually adjust the purlin, girt and fly brace data to suit your exact
requirements via the steel member design input data once the model has been generated.
225
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Prop positions can be input as actual values or as percentages of the end frame width relative
to the column centroids. Alternatively, you can click the "Generate End Frame Props" button
to quickly generate equally spaced props with or without bracing.
226
Portal Frame Builder
The nodes, members and load cases use the next available numbers unless you specify
starting numbers in the "Start..." fields.
227
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Connections
The portal frame builder can also generate all of the main connections in the building. All you
need to do is specify the type of connection to be used for the knees, ridges and baseplates.
These can then be designed or checked in the steel connection design module.
228
Portal Frame Builder
229
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The dead loads you input are applied to the actual roof area, while the live load is applied to
the plan projection of the roof area. If you tick the "Calculate" live load option then it will be
calculated based on the maximum of 0.25 and 1.8/A + 0.12 kPa as given in AS/NZS 1170.1
table 3.2. Note that the distributed live load is applied to the entire roof area, even if the roof
area is greater than 200m^2. The 1.4kN concentrated live load specified in AS/NZS 1170.1
(but not in conjunction with the distributed live load - see AS/NZS 1170.1 section 3.1) is not
applied.
230
Portal Frame Builder
Wind loads
Wind loads can be calculated for any region in Australia or New Zealand. The average
recurrence intervals (ARIs) for the ultimate and serviceability limit states are used to calculate
the regional wind speeds from AS/NZS 1170.2 table 3.1.
Wind directions
If you tick the "Apply same wind in all directions" option then you are only required to input
one set of wind data for the shielding, topographic, terrain category and internal pressure
parameters. Otherwise, these data must be defined for each of the four orthogonal building
axes.
231
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Terrain category
The terrain category affects the terrain height multiplier Mz,cat (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section
4.2). Mz,cat can be based on a single terrain category or it can be an averaged value if the
terrain category changes on the upwind side of the structure. SPACE GASS allows for
averaging two terrain categories in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.2.3. Note that
the "Approach" TC is closer to the structure than the "Upwind" TC and the "TC transition
distance" is the distance from the structure to the point where the terrain category changes.
232
Portal Frame Builder
Sheeting
In order to calculate friction loads, the portal frame builder needs to know the type of sheeting
and its direction. You can choose between "Smooth" (no friction loads), "Ribbed" or
"Corrugated".
233
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The 4 internal wind pressure primary load cases (cases 4 to 7) are for the ultimate limit state
and apply to a Cp,i pressure coefficient of 1.0. The 8 external wind pressure primary load
cases (cases 8 to 15) are also for the ultimate limit state and are based on the actual Cp,e
pressure coefficients. Along with dead load and live load, they are factored into the various
combination load cases for ultimate and serviceability limit states.
You can add extra combination load cases to this table, however it is sometimes easier to do
this in the main SPACE GASS combination load cases datasheet once the model has been
generated.
234
Portal Frame Builder
The data is the same as in the steel member design input form but with some fields disabled.
For more information, refer to Steel member design data.
Once the model has been generated, please check the steel member design data that was
generated and check that it is what you want. If not, you can edit it using the normal steel
member design data input/editing methods.
235
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
1. Impact loading from wind borne debris (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 2.5.8) is not
taken into account.
2. The wind direction multiplier Md (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 3.3) is assumed to be
0.95 for regions B, C and D, and 1.0 for all other regions and wind directions.
3. The permeable cladding reduction factor Kp (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 5.4.5) is
assumed to be 1.0.
4. Frictional drag forces (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 5.5) are not taken into account.
5. The dynamic response factor Cdyn (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 6) is assumed to be
1.0.
6. The wind load applied to the triangular part just below the roof in the end walls of
gable buildings is not taken into account if there are no end wall rafter props.
7. The distributed live load is applied to the entire roof area, even if the roof area is
greater than 200m^2.
8. The 1.4kN concentrated live load specified in AS/NZS 1170.1 (but not in conjunction
with the distributed live load - see AS/NZS 1170.1 section 3.1) is not applied.
236
Datasheet Input
Datasheet input
You can open a datasheet by clicking the toolbar button and then selecting from the
datasheet menu that appears. Alternatively, you can select one of the datasheet items from the
Structure, Loads or Design menus.
Datasheet input is the one of the most useful methods of entering data into SPACE GASS. All
types of frame and steel design data can be input or edited via a datasheet.
For more information about operating the datasheets, refer to Using datasheets.
237
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Using datasheets
All datasheets have the same format, appearing in a grid format like a spreadsheet. The
members datasheet is shown below.
Sorting the data on any column Click the column heading to sort on. Further clicks cause
the sorting to alternate between ascending and
descending order.
Frozen key columns Allows you to scroll the main data sideways without
scrolling the key columns so that you can always see
which row you are working on. In the members
datasheet, the "Member" column is the key column.
Multi-row editing Possibly one of the most useful datasheet editing tools! It
allows you to edit multiple rows of data simultaneously.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Select the rows to be edited by clicking the
buttons at the left end of the rows, using the
CTRL or SHIFT keys to highlight multiple rows
(see "Selecting rows" below).
2. Move in any highlighted row to the column you
want to edit.
3. Click the right mouse button.
4. Enter your data, select between replacing,
238
Datasheet Input
Split screen Move to the small black bar just to the left of the
horizontal scroll arrow, click and drag it to the right to
introduce and position a vertical split screen division.
Editing existing data Move to the desired cell using the keyboard or mouse
and then type in or select the desired data.
Entering new data Move to the bottom (blank) row and then type in or
select the desired data.
Uniformly distributed loads After entering the start load magnitude for a new load in
a distributed load datasheet, the finish load magnitude is
automatically set to the same as the start load, saving you
having to enter the load magnitude twice for uniformly
239
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Combo boxes To edit combo box cells, either click the arrow and then
make your selection or just use the keyboard arrow keys
to move to the combo box cell and then type the first
character of the desired selection. For example, to change
a Yes/No combo box to Yes, just move to the cell and
then type Y.
Selecting rows Click the button to the left of the row to be selected.
You can select multiple rows by:
1. Dragging up or down the selection buttons.
2. Selecting one row, holding down the CTRL key
and then selecting additional rows.
3. Selecting one row, holding down the SHIFT key
and then clicking on another selection button to
select all the rows in between.
Alternatively, you can click the blank button at the top-
left corner of the datasheet to select all the rows.
Cutting, copying and pasting Cut or copy selected rows from a datasheet to any other
Windows program or paste from another Windows
program into a datasheet.
Duplicating rows Rows of data can be duplicated using the normal copy
and paste methods, however some datasheets such as
section properties contain hidden fields that would not be
duplicated using these methods. For example, all the
geometric data for shape builder sections is stored in
hidden fields. To ensure that the hidden fields are
duplicated the following procedure can be used:
1. Select the rows to be duplicated and then click
the right mouse button on one of the buttons at
the left end of the selected rows.
2. Select "Duplicate Rows" from the menu that
appears.
3. Change the numbers of the duplicates via the
"Paste Overwrite Error" form that appears so that
the duplicates do not simply overwrite the
selected rows.
The duplicate rows will be inserted into the datasheet.
Deleting rows Select the rows to be deleted and then press the Delete
key or click the datasheet’s delete button or click the
right mouse button and select Delete from the menu that
appears.
240
Datasheet Input
Generation
The above node generation form allows you to generate items along two axes at once. It can
also be used to generate extra series at different levels (ie. the 2nd order).
Consider the following 20 node grid in the XY plane. It could have been created by inputting
the coordinates for node 1 then generating four 1st order nodes (5,9,13 & 17) along a line
with a node increment of 4 and X increment of 2.4, followed by three 2nd order rows of nodes
with a node increment of 1 and a Y increment of -1.5.
241
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If only 1st order generation is required, you should specify zero for the number of 2nd order
items to be generated.
The node generation form also has the unique ability to generate nodes along a line, arc or
helix.
The axis of rotation, which only applies to an arc or helix, defines the point about which the
nodes will be generated. The angle increment causes the nodes to be generated at some
regular angle increment.
The helix length increment defines a regular increment along a parametric path at which the
nodes will be generated.
2nd order generation is also employed in the member and member concentrated load
datasheets.
Renumbering data
Any data can be renumbered by simply changing its number in a datasheet. However, be
careful, because related data in other datasheets will not be automatically renumbered to
match. A better way to renumber nodes, members or plates is to use the graphics renumber
tool. It not only lets you renumber large groups of nodes, members and plates effortlessly, it
also adjusts all of the restraints, constraints, loads, and design data automatically to allow for
the new numbering sequence (see also Renumber).
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
When you use a datasheet to renumber items, none of the other data which may reference
the renumbered items is adjusted. You must do this yourself or use the renumber tool
instead (as explained above).
242
Datasheet Input
243
Graphical Input
Graphical overview
Inputting and editing your model using graphical methods is one of the most useful and
intuitive input methods. You can see exactly what is in your model and you can see the
changes as you make them. Nodes, members and plates can simply be drawn on the screen,
and there are numerous tools for copying, renumbering, stretching, moving, generating loads
and otherwise manipulating your model.
The renderer window (shown below) is the default user interface for SPACE GASS, however
the traditional graphics window (for those of you who prefer the older system) is also
available. Because the renderer window has superior graphics and tools compared to the
traditional system there is generally need to use the traditional user interface at all.
245
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The renderer
The SPACE GASS renderer is now the recommended tool for all of your input, analysis,
design and display tools. Of course you can still edit your model in the traditional graphics
window, however the editing tools in the renderer are generally more advanced and offer
additional features over the traditional editing tools.
All of the data is shared between the renderer and the traditional graphics window and so you
can make changes in either one and then see your model updated in the other one as soon as it
gets focus.
The renderer user interface is the one that starts by default, however you can also open it by
Rendering mode
When in the renderer you can switch between wireframe, outline and rendered views of your
model by clicking the render mode selection button.
246
Graphical Input
Zoom by rotating the mousewheel or by holding down the mousewheel while moving the
mouse or by pressing the keyboard Up/Down arrow keys. If you find that zooming doesn’t
work, click on the graphics area before trying again.
Pan by holding down the right mouse button while moving the mouse.
Rotate by holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse. You can also drag the
view selector (shown below) or click on one of its faces, edges or corners.
Note that you can also right-click one of the view selector faces to change the working plane
(or press X, Y or Z while you are working).
Mode 1 - When you double-click on a node, member or plate in the model, the appropriate
property panel opens and you can make changes and then click the Ok button at the bottom of
the panel to confirm the changes. Alternatively, if you make some changes in a property panel
and then simply click on a another node, member or plate in your model, the previous changes
will be confirmed and the newly selected item's data will appear in the property panel.
247
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Mode 2 - If you select one or more nodes, members or plates and then right-click and select
"View/Edit Properties (Form)" from the menu that appears, the appropriate panel will open
with the combined data for all of the selected items. When in this mode, you cannot select
other nodes, members or plates until you have clicked the Ok or Cancel buttons at the bottom
of the panel. Blank fields indicate that the data is different for the selected items. Be careful
with blank fields because if you enter data into one of them then all of the selected items will
get that data.
248
Graphical Input
249
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can open the property panels to view the section and material properties and color match
them to the members in your model, or you can click a particular section or material in the
panel to have all the matching members in your model selected.
You can undock a panel and place it anywhere on the screen or dock it to the left or right side
of the renderer by first pinning it using and then dragging the title bar of the panel to the
desired location. Note that when undocked, it will stay open when not being used.
250
Graphical Input
There are a number of working plane, attachment, alignment and snap tools available to help
you position points exactly where you want them while drawing or selecting points. These are
explained as follows.
251
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Note that whenever you graphically select a point or a node, the working plane moves to the
plane of that point or node. If you have a grid displayed (see below), it is drawn in the current
working plane.
To attach to a node (or the end of a member or the vertex of a plate), just move close to the
node until it changes color. This indicates that you are close enough, and you can then click
the left mouse button to attach to it.
To attach to an intermediate point on a member, just move close to the member until it
changes color. You can then move along the member to find its mid-point, third points,
quarter points or fifth points, each of which will show up as a different colored dot with a
label next to it. You can then click to attach to the desired point.
Note that if you wish to position a point close to a node or member without attaching to it, you
can hold down the C key to temporarily turn off the attachment feature.
252
Graphical Input
If you are drawing the second end of a line then "Perpendicular" and "Orthogonal" attachment
points will also be highlighted on the member if applicable.
You can even align your point with an orthogonal line extending from a node or a member's
midpoint. In order to do this you must first briefly hover over the node or member until you
hear a faint pop sound that indicates that you have "locked on" to it. You can then move away
and a dotted line will extend from the "locked on" node or member to your point, allowing
you to line up with it exactly.
Note that you can temporarily turn off alignment with locked on nodes or members by holding
down the A key while you are working. You can also change the "locked on" delay via the
"Lock delay" setting in the Attachment and alignment methods Preferences form in the
Settings menu (see below).
Similarly, you can align your point with any of the "locked on" member's three local axes as
shown below.
253
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can even use it to draw a new member that is aligned with an existing member by
"locking on" to the existing member and then drawing in line with it.
When aligning with a locked on node or member, you can position your point an exact
distance from the locked on item by simply typing the distance rather than having to click the
point with your mouse.
254
Graphical Input
When drawing a line, if it is close to being aligned with one of the three global axes then it
will snap to that axis. You can then either click the point with your mouse or you can just type
the length of your line.
Snap tool
The renderer also has a snap tool which can be turned on or off via the snap button in the
bottom of the side toolbar or by pressing the S key.
255
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Selection methods
You can select nodes, members or plates directly by clicking them with the left mouse button
or you can use a selection window. If the second corner of the selection is to the right of the
first then it is a "Normal" selection window in which only the nodes, members or plates that
fall completely within the window are selected. Alternatively, if the second corner is to the
left of the first then it is a "Crossing" selection window in which any nodes, members or
plates that are within the window or which cross the boundary of the window are selected. A
normal selection window is drawn as a rectangular box, whereas a crossing window is shown
as a filled rectangle. The two types of selection window are shown below.
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you can simply select them again, either by
clicking directly or by using a selection window.
256
Graphical Input
Selecting a tool
Once you have made your selection, you can get access to the various graphical tools by
right-clicking and then selecting from the menu that appears. A typical member selection
menu is shown below.
257
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
258
Graphical Input
After selecting from the menu, the tool you selected may open a form or it may require you to
pick extra points. For example, if you selected the "Generate Arc" tool from the above menu,
the Arc tool would then require you to pick a point on the concave side of the arc so that it
knows which direction to use when creating the arc. Whenever the graphical editor requires
you to do something, it displays a red prompt at the bottom-left corner of the window as
shown below. It is therefore a good idea to look there if you are not sure what to do next.
Grid tool
A grid can be displayed as a visual aid while you are developing or viewing your model. The
grid also assists in identifying the working plane, as it is always displayed in that plane. The
grid can be turned on or off via the grid button in the bottom of the side toolbar or by
pressing the G key.
Note that if you change your working plane (see above) then the grid automatically moves to
that new plane.
259
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Restraints
Node restraints can be turned on or off in the renderer using the button in the side
toolbar. Restraints are shown using combinations of the following icons.
Shortcuts
While using any of the renderer tools, various keyboard shortcuts are available that can speed
things up. They are listed below.
Shortcut Action
Tab key Toggles all of the property
panels on or off
F11 key Toggles full screen mode on
or off
G key Toggles the grid on or off
S key Toggles the snap on or off
X, Y or Z Allows you to set the
keys working plane
A key (hold Temporarily disables
down) aligning with a "locked on"
node or member
C key (hold Temporarily disables
down) attaching to a node or
member
Up/Down Zooms in/out
arrow keys
Rotate Zooms in/out
mousewheel
Drag with left Rotates
mouse button
Drag with Pans
260
Graphical Input
right mouse
button
Customizing toolbars
All of the toolbars in the renderer can be hidden/shown, moved or undocked, and buttons can
be added or deleted. For more information refer to Customizing Toolbars.
261
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
262
Graphical Input
The "Default deflection color" option, if ticked, means that when only one load case is
displayed, deflections are shown by member color rather than load case color. If unticked or if
multiple load cases are displayed then deflections are colored by load case.
The "Curve quality" controls how many segments are used to display curved objects such as
cylinders and the like.
The "Result quality" controls how many short straight lines are used to approximate a curve
when drawing deflected shapes, bending moment diagrams, etc.
The "Structure line width" is the thickness of lines used to draw the structure when in
wireframe or outline modes.
The "Diagram line width" is the thickness of lines used to draw diagrams such as bending
moment diagrams, etc.
The "Maximum undo/redo steps" is the number of undo/redo steps that are remembered in the
renderer. More memory is consumed if this setting is increased.
The "Highlight delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node, member or
plate before it becomes highlighted. Note that this setting has no effect over whether the node,
member or plate is attached to when drawing new objects.
The "Infotip delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node, member or plate
before its infotip appears.
The "Maximum load case components" is used to prevent memory overflow problems with
large models that contain many load cases by limiting how many load cases can be displayed
simultaneously. A "component" is considered to be a single diagram (eg. a load, a bending
moment diagram, a shear force diagram, etc) on a single node, member or plate. If you
experience memory problems when you try to display loads or analysis results graphically for
many load cases simultaneously then you may need to lower this limit. Conversely, if your
system has substantial memory and you are being restricted to an insufficient number of load
cases when displaying loads or analysis results graphically then you could experiment with
raising this limit.
The "Rotation drag distance" is the number of pixels that you can move the mouse while the
left button is held down before it will start to rotate the model. It is used to avoid the problem
of the model rotating unintentionally when you are trying to select items or start a selection
window. If this problem occurs then try increasing the rotation drag distance slightly.
The "Rotation mode" controls how the model behaves when you rotate it with the mouse.
Trackball mode lets the model rotate about all three axes, whereas Turntable mode prevents
rotation about an axis normal to your computer screen. Trackball mode is a bit harder to
control than Turntable.
The "Rotate at" setting controls the centre of rotation when you rotate the model by dragging
with the left mouse button held down.
263
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The following form lets you can change the theme of the renderer via the "Skin" setting. This
affects the colors and styles of all the forms, buttons and input fields. You can also separately
change the colors of most the items in your model to suit your requirements.
264
Graphical Input
In the following form you can control the color and threshold of each pass or fail level when
displaying steel member design results.
265
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The size of the text displayed on the screen and in graphical prints can be controlled in the
following form.
The "Other" menu option gives you access to some of the configuration settings normally
found only in the traditional SPACE GASS window as follows:
266
Graphical Input
For further information on each of these options, refer to "Folders and files", "Text
formatting", "General configuration" and "Problem size limits".
In particular, if you wish to change the vertical axis you should choose
"Settings => Other => General Configuration".Other renderer tools
Other features and tools currently available in the renderer are as follows:
267
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Notes tool.
Query analysis and steel member design result tools.
If you have a large model with loads displayed and the renderer is operating slowly
when you zoom, pan or rotate, try turning off the loads display or at least select less load
cases to be displayed simultaneously.
268
Graphical Input
The process of inputting a frame graphically into SPACE GASS simply involves drawing
lines on the screen with your mouse. Each line represents a member or the edge of a plate.
Nodes are automatically attached to the ends of each member, at plate vertices and at points
where members intersect. Node, member and plate numbering is performed automatically, or
at your discretion. The graphics renumber facility lets you renumber nodes and/or members,
and automatically adjusts all the other data that references nodes and/or members accordingly.
In order to draw a line, you must position your cursor at the start of the line, click the left
mouse button, move the cursor to the other end of the line and then click the left mouse button
again. The line is dragged around with the cursor as you position the second point. The end of
the first line then becomes the start of the next line and the process continues for subsequent
lines until you press ESC or click the right mouse button (right-click) to end the sequence.
If the end of a member is drawn so that it touches another member, the two members become
connected. If attach is on then you only have to position a member close to another member in
order to connect them. If you connect a member to an intermediate point along an existing
member, the existing member is subdivided into two, and a node is automatically inserted at
the intersection point.
269
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Nodes, members and plates can be deleted, moved, copied, rotated, stretched, mirrored or
subdivided. It is simply a matter of selecting a node, member or plate, or placing a window
around a group of nodes, members and plates, and then performing the desired operation in
accordance with the instructions following in this chapter. If you want to move a single node,
you can just select it with your mouse and then drag it to its new location. You can see the
members connected to the node being stretched as you move the node.
You can select nodes, members or plates directly by clicking them with the left mouse button
or you can use a selection window. If the second corner of the selection is to the right of the
first then it is a "Normal" selection window in which only the nodes, members or plates that
fall completely within the window are selected. Alternatively, if the second corner is to the
left of the first then it is a "Crossing" selection window in which any nodes, members or
plates that are within the window or which cross the boundary of the window are selected. A
normal selection window is drawn with a solid line, whereas a crossing window is drawn with
a dashed line. The two types of selection window are shown below.
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you can simply select them again, either by
clicking directly or by using a selection window.
270
Graphical Input
Once you have made your selection, you can get access to the various graphical tools by
right-clicking and then selecting from the menu that appears. A typical member selection
menu is shown below.
271
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
After selecting from the menu, the tool you selected may open a form or it may require you to
pick extra points. For example, if you selected the "Generate Arc" tool from the above menu,
the Arc tool would then require you to pick a point on the concave side of the arc so that it
knows which direction to use when creating the arc. Whenever the graphical editor requires
you to do something, it displays a red prompt at the bottom-left corner of the window as
shown below. It is therefore a good idea to look there if you are not sure what to do next.
272
Graphical Input
All of these tools can be accessed via the settings menu or activated, deactivated and/or
configured using the graphics settings buttons across the bottom of the screen and/or the
keyboard. All of these settings can be toggled without interrupting the use of most graphics
tools.
[Keyboard "G"] Clicking the Grid button displays a grid of dots on the
screen at any user defined spacing. If the grid has been activated the grid button will appear
depressed and instead of the text "Grid: Off" the button will display a message "Grid: x",
where x is the spacing you defined. The grid can lie in the XY, XZ or YZ planes.
For example, if you set the snap spacing to 100mm the cursor will move in steps of 100mm,
enabling you to draw to an accuracy of exactly 100mm. The button will indicate that snap has
been set to 100mm by displaying the text "Snap: 100" (if units are set as mm). You can
change the snap spacing as you move the cursor. SPACE GASS automatically senses when
SNAP is not required and turns it off temporarily in such cases.
[Keyboard "O"] The Ortho tool forces lines to be drawn either horizontally or
vertically. Since structures are made up predominantly of horizontal beams and vertical
columns, it is a very useful tool indeed.
[Keyboard "A"] The Attach facility displays an aperture circle with the
graphics cursor and allows you to attach to existing members by simply picking points near
them. The aperture circle indicates how close you must get to a member in order to attach to
it. It is very useful for attaching new members to existing members or for locating points
which are at the ends of members.
[Keyboard "X,Y,Z and P"] The Plane facility allows you to change the current
drawing plane. You will be able to select the drawing plane (choice of XY - "Z", YZ - "X"
and XZ - "Y") as well as specifying an offset. An offset is the distance from a virtual plane to
the specified plane, the distance being measured perpendicular to the virtual plane. For
273
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
example, selecting the XY plane with an offset of 5m will result in every node being created
with coordinates of x,y,5.
Cartesian
Cartesian-Relative
Polar
Polar-Relative
The text display at the bottom right corner of the screen will constantly change to reflect the
position of the graphics cursor on the screen. The format of this text is governed by the
coordinates system you have selected. Selecting the "Off" option switches all coordinates
systems off and disables the coordinates display text.
The keyboard can also be used to position points precisely. You simply type in the
coordinates of the point using cartesian or polar coordinates in absolute or relative modes
(depending upon the coordinates system selected). Note that there is no icon or button for this
tool. You just need to type a number and the coordinates input form will appear
automatically.
Other tools
There are also a number of other tools that are of great use when inputting data graphically.
The query frame facility (see also Node properties, Member properties and Plate properties)
allows you to point to a node, member or plate and obtain information about node
coordinates, member end fixities, section properties, material properties, etc. You can also
query analysis results and steel member design results.
You can use the zoom, pan and viewpoint facilities to view the structure in different ways.
Zoom allows you to zoom in on a portion of the structure and have it enlarged for a detailed
inspection. Pan allows you to translate the structure in any direction on the screen. Viewpoint
allows you to rotate your viewpoint to any position around the structure.
There are a host of additional tools which allow you to scale the structure or diagrams to any
desired value, show the rendered model, superimpose loading diagrams, displacement
diagrams, bending moment diagrams, shear force diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion
diagrams, reactions, stress diagrams, envelopes and dynamic mode shapes, display steel
connection drawings, show local axes, restraints, constraints, offsets, top flanges, etc.
You can also set up a number of filters, each of which limits the amount of the model that you
can see and work on. The contents of each filter can be based on a range of axis coordinates,
node properties, member properties, load types and many other selection criteria that you can
control. Filters can also be selected in the output reports so that they can be quickly
customized to include exactly what you want to see.
274
Graphical Input
Searching for specific nodes, members or plates is easy with the find function. You can search
for nodes, members or plates directly, or by reference to their properties.
All aspects of what you see on the graphics screen can be saved as views that can be named
and then recalled at any time. All filters, viewpoint, scales, zoom, pan and other settings
applicable at the time the view is saved are recalled when the saved view is recalled.
Many of the above mentioned procedures are identical in the renderer, however some of them
are not and some renderer tools have more options available. For more information, refer to
The renderer.
275
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Align members
It is easy to align or stack members using the render's "Align Members" tool.
After selecting the members to be adjusted, right-click and select "Align members" from the
menu that appears and then click another member to align them with. In the form that appears
you can then choose to align the members according to their tops, bottoms or sides.
Alternatively, you can stack members side by side or on top of one another using the "Stack"
options.
In the before and after diagrams below, the blue beam has been adjusted to align with the red
beam's top flange.
276
Graphical Input
277
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
After selecting the plates to be aligned, right-click and select "Align Plate Axes" from the
menu that appears. You should then click a plate that the selected plates are to be aligned
with.
Options include allowing plates to be reversed (ie. the direction of their local z-axes are
reversed), letting plates that are currently aligned with a direction node or axis to be re-
aligned, and adjusting pressure or thermal gradient loads for reversed plates.
278
Graphical Input
Arc generation
The Arc generation tool lets you apply an arc to any member by adding intermediate nodes
with any desired radius and arc plane.
After selecting the members to be converted to an arc, right-click and select "Generate Arc"
from the menu that appears. You should then pick any point on the concave side of the
member so that the tool knows which way to bend the arc.
If you have selected multiple members connected end-to-end and the "Generate continuous
arc over multiple connected members" option is ticked then the Arc tool will try to generate a
continuous arc that encompasses all of the connected members. This is particularly handy if
you have already generated an arc and then wish to re-select it and change its radius. With this
option unticked, a separate arc will be generated for each selected member.
279
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Area loads
One-way or two-way area loads can be generated by specifying a pressure that is applied to a
roof or a floor or any other set of members that can form closed or open polygons. The
pressure loads are converted to member distributed forces calculated from the contributing
area of each member. You can select many members that form multiple open or closed areas
and the area loading tool will process them all at once.
Two-way loads require closed areas formed by three or more perimeter members and the
generated member loads are based on the load surface spanning in two directions, generally
resulting in a mixture of uniform, triangular and trapezoidal loads.
One-way loads don't require closed areas and the generated loads are based on the load
surface spanning in just one direction, resulting in uniformly distributed loads if the
supporting members are parallel, or trapezoidal if the supporting members are not parallel.
After selecting the desired members to be loaded, right-click and then select "Generate Area
Loads" from the menu that appears.
280
Graphical Input
281
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For one-way area loads, if you click the "View Dummy Members" button in the one-way area
loading form shown below, you can visually see the dummy members that effectively "close"
the open polygons on which the one-way loads are based. Of course, the "dummy" members
don't exist and don't attract any load.
"Projected" areas results in the loads being based on the projected areas normal to the load
direction, whereas "Actual" areas cause the generated loads to be based on the actual areas
regardless of the load direction.
The load direction can be parallel to one of the global axes or along any vector that you
specify. You can select the load direction vector graphically by clicking the "Select Vector"
button.
If the "Generate loads normal to area in general load direction" option is ticked then the
pressure is applied in the general load direction that you have specified, but normal to each
polygon. This is handy if you have a pitched roof and you want to apply a generally vertical
wind load that is normal to the roof on both sides of the ridge.
The "Generate uniformly distributed forces only" option forces the pressure applied to a
polygon to be applied uniformly to each member rather than as triangular or trapezoidal loads.
The "Check for crossing members" option checks for members that cross over each other
which could result in areas that overlap. This check should normally be left on.
If the area loader generates loads on members that already contain loads in the same load case
or if it generates multiple overlapping loads on the same member then the "Merge loads with
matching start and finish positions" option will try to merge the loads rather than having two
sets of loads with different sub-load numbers. This makes it easier to see the loads when they
are viewed graphically. If this option is turned off then when identical loads are generated on
a single member it might be difficult to differentiate between them when they are viewed
graphically.
The "Ignore member offsets when calculating areas" option treats the members as if they have
no offsets and could result in slightly inaccurate results if the member offsets affect the shape
or size of the area. It should only be ticked if the area loader is unable to find the desired areas
due to member offsets.
282
Graphical Input
Attach
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window. The renderer has other
attachment tools that replicate the function of this Attach tool.
The attach tool lets you attach nodes, members, plates and reference points to existing nodes,
members or plates without having to position the cursor exactly on them.
You can change the attach setting by clicking on the toolbar button or
selecting "Attach Mode" from the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+A" on the
keyboard (or just "A" if a graphics command is active).
If ATTACH is on (as indicated on the toggle button above), the program displays an aperture
circle with the graphics cursor and allows you to attach to existing nodes members when you
pick points near them. The aperture circle indicates how close you must get to a node,
member or plate in order to attach to it. The point of attachment depends on the ATTACH
setting.
283
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For example, if you draw a new member and wish to attach it to the end of an existing
member, you can simply set ATTACH to "MIDDLE/END" and then locate the start of the
new member near the end of the existing member. The two members will be automatically
connected with a common node at the intersection point.
To connect a member to the mid point of another member ensure that ATTACH is set to
"MIDDLE" and then simply position the end of the first member to within the aperture circle
radius of the second member. The second member is automatically broken into two and a
node inserted at the intersection point.
The attach setting is only used if the aperture circle touches a node, member or plate.
284
Graphical Input
To attach to a node (or the end of a member or the vertex of a plate), just move close to the
node until it changes color. This indicates that you are close enough, and you can then click
the left mouse button to attach to it.
To attach to an intermediate point on a member, just move close to the member until it
changes color. You can then move along the member to find its mid-point, third points,
quarter points or fifth points, each of which will show up as a different colored dot with a
label next to it. You can then click to attach to the desired point.
Note that if you wish to position a point close to a node or member without attaching to it, you
can hold down the C key to temporarily turn off the attachment feature.
If you are drawing the second end of a line then "Perpendicular" and "Orthogonal" attachment
points will also be highlighted on the member if applicable.
You can even align your point with an orthogonal line extending from a node or a member's
midpoint. In order to do this you must first briefly hover over the node or member until you
hear a faint pop sound that indicates that you have "locked on" to it. You can then move away
285
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
and a dotted line will extend from the "locked on" node or member to your point, allowing
you to line up with it exactly.
Note that you can temporarily turn off alignment with locked on nodes or members by holding
down the A key while you are working. You can also change the "locked on" delay via the
"Lock delay" setting in the Attachment and alignment methods Preferences form in the
renderer's Settings menu.
Similarly, you can align your point with any of the "locked on" member's three local axes as
shown below.
You can even use it to draw a new member that is aligned with an existing member by
"locking on" to the existing member and then drawing in line with it.
286
Graphical Input
When aligning with a locked on node or member, you can position your point an exact
distance from the locked on item by simply typing the distance rather than having to click the
point with your mouse.
When drawing a line, if it is close to being aligned with one of the three global axes then it
will snap to that axis. You can then either click the point with your mouse or you can just type
the length of your line.
287
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For information about the grid, snap and working plane tools in the renderer, refer to Grid,
Snap and Plane.
For more information about using the keyboard to position points, refer to Using the keyboard
to position points.
For more information about operating the other tools in the renderer, refer to The renderer.
288
Graphical Input
Bends generation
This tool in the renderer allows you to generate bends of any radius between members that are
currently connected to each other.
After selecting the members to be adjusted, right-click and select "Generate Bends" from the
menu that appears. Each bend is approximated by a series of straight line segments and you
can specify the number of segments per 90 degrees in the form shown below. You can also
specify a threshold angle to stop bends being generated between members that are close to
being aligned in a straight line.
Note that a bend will not be generated between connected members if the angle is less than
the threshold angle, if the bend radius is too large or if there are more than two members or a
plate connected to the intersection node.
289
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can open the combination load cases grid by clicking the button in the top toolbar as
shown below.
Existing combination load cases can be edited by typing into any cell. New combination load
cases can be added by typing into the blank line near the top of the grid.
By hovering over a column heading or a cell in any row, information about the load case will
be displayed including its title (if one exists).
The title for any combination load case can be directly input or edited via the "Title" column
in the datasheet, plus if you right-click on a column heading you can input or edit a primary or
combination load case's title or notes.
290
Graphical Input
If you have a large number of columns and you don't want to repeatedly scroll sideways to get
to the cells you need, you can condense the grid for any combination load case by simply
clicking the arrow to the left of the combination load case you are interested in. You can then
condense the grid for any other row or you can revert back to the default sorting by clicking
the * button near the top-left corner of the grid.
When creating combination load cases, if the columns you need are not included in the grid,
you can add them by clicking the "Add Columns" button near the top-right corner of the grid
and then listing the extra load cases required.
291
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
292
Graphical Input
Connect
The Connect tool allows you to connect members that cross each other within a specified
distance but which are not currently connected.
After selecting the members to be connected, right-click and select "Connect" from the menu
that appears. Members that cross each other within the tolerance you specify in the following
form will be connected.
After using the Connect tool, if you want to check that the members are properly
connected, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
293
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Connectivity check
The Connectivity tool lets you see graphically what is connected to a particular node, member
or plate. It is a very handy tool if you are not sure if certain nodes. members or plates are
properly connected. For example, it will quickly tell you if a member simply passes over a
node or if it is properly connected to it.
Right-click on a single node, member or plate and then select "Connectivity Check" from the
menu that appears. The nodes, members and plates that are connected to the selected item are
then highlighted graphically. You can then proceed to click on any other nodes, members or
plates in your model to check their connectivity.
294
Graphical Input
Coordinates
The Coordinates tool shows the position of the mouse cursor while you are drawing lines or
selecting points.
The current COORDINATES setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated
above).
When a graphics operation is active, the actual coordinates of the graphics cursor are
displayed at the bottom-right corner of the screen.
If you select the second corner of a window or line and the COORDINATES setting is in a
relative mode then the coordinates displayed are relative to the first point of the window or
line. Relative coordinates are the same as absolute coordinates when you select a single point
or the start of a line.
The COORDINATES setting does not restrict your choice of Cartesian, polar, absolute
and relative modes when inputting points from the keyboard. For example, you can enter a
point from the keyboard using polar coordinates even if the COORDINATES display is set to
Cartesian coordinates (see also Using the keyboard to position points).
295
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Copy
The Copy tool allows you to copy members or plates in any straight line direction, or around
an arc or helix. This is very useful for structures such as trusses where you can draw just the
first panel and then make copies of it to build up the complete structure.
After selecting the members or plates to be copied, right-click and select "Copy to Locations",
"Copy along Line", "Copy along Arc" or "Copy along Helix" from the menu that appears.
If copying to locations, you should then pick a reference point on the items being copied, fill
out the form that appears below and then simply click wherever you want to the selected
items to be copied to. You can then continue to click additional locations to have the selected
items copied there too.
If copying along a line, you should then pick two points that represent the ends of a vector
through which the items are to be copied.
296
Graphical Input
If copying along an arc, you should then pick the center of the arc and then fill out the form
that appears below.
If copying along a helix, you should then pick the center of the helix arc and then fill out the
form that appears below.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or members, or
you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line or an
extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can also align with one of the three
global axes. For more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember
also that when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of
the desired point(s). For more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
297
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
After copying some members or plates, if you are not sure that they are properly
connected to other nodes, members or plates, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
298
Graphical Input
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination members for the specified load cases"
option then all pre-existing member loads on the selected destination members contained
within the selected load cases will be deleted first. If it is unticked then the loads being copied
will be added to the pre-existing loads.
299
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
300
Graphical Input
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination nodes for the specified load cases"
option then all pre-existing node loads, prescribed displacements and lumped masses on the
selected destination nodes contained within the selected load cases will be deleted first. If it is
unticked then the loads being copied will be added to the pre-existing loads.
301
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
302
Graphical Input
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination plates for the specified load cases"
option then all pre-existing plate loads on the selected destination plates contained within the
selected load cases will be deleted first. If it is unticked then the loads being copied will be
added to the pre-existing loads.
303
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
304
Graphical Input
Delete
The Delete tool allows you to delete any or all of the structure. The items to be deleted are
first highlighted so that you can verify them before they are actually removed. Nodes
connected to deleted members or plates are also deleted unless they are connected to other
members or plates that still exist.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be deleted, press the Delete key or right-click
and select "Delete" from the menu that appears. The selected items are then deleted.
.
305
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Draw
The Draw tool allows you to draw new nodes, members or plates and attach them to existing
nodes, members or plates. Nodes are automatically generated at the ends of each member or
plate vertex. If a member or plate is attached to the intermediate point of an existing member,
the existing member is subdivided into two and a node is automatically inserted at the
intersection point.
Note that you can switch to drawing plates by pressing the T key to switch to drawing
triangular plates or the Q key to switch to drawing quadrilateral plates. You can
switch back to drawing members by pressing the M key.
2. Pick the start of a new member. This can be a new point not connected to existing
members or plates, or it can be an existing member or plate end point or member
intermediate point.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an
orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can
also align with one of the three global axes. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can use
the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
3. Pick the end of the new member. Again, this can be a new point or a point on an
existing member or plate.
4. If you wish to draw another member that extends from the end of the member just
drawn then pick another end point. You can keep picking end points for additional
members.
6. Return to step 1 above to draw another member, or press ESC or the right mouse
button to exit from the tool.
306
Graphical Input
nodes. It is therefore recommended that you should always convert any local Y or Z member
offsets to global before adding intermediate nodes.
If you wish to draw multiple members between the same two nodes, you will need to
first activate the "Allow duplicates when drawing new members" option in the "General
configuration" item of the Config menu.
Note that you can switch between drawing triangular or quadrilateral plates while
drawing by pressing the T key to switch to drawing triangular plates or the Q key to
switch to drawing quadrilateral plates. You can also switch to drawing members by
pressing the M key.
Note also that while in quadrilateral plate drawing mode, you can draw triangular
plates by simply double-clicking the 4th node.
2. Pick the start of a new plate. This can be a new point not connected to existing
members or plates, or it can be an existing member or plate end point or member
intermediate point.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an
orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can
also align with one of the three global axes. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can use
the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
3. Pick the next vertex of the new plate. Again, this can be a new point or a point on an
existing member or plate.
4. Pick the third and fourth (if a quadrilateral plate) vertices of the new plate.
5. If you wish to draw another plate that extends from the end of the plate just drawn
then pick another point. You can keep picking points for additional plates.
7. Return to step 1 above to draw another plate, or press ESC or the right mouse button
to exit from the tool.
You can draw triangular plates while in quadrilateral plate drawing mode by double-
clicking the 4th node of quadrilateral plates.
307
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
While drawing, you can switch between drawing members or plates by pressing the M
key to switch to drawing members, the T key to switch to drawing triangular plates or the Q
key to switch to drawing quadrilateral plates.
After drawing some members or plates, if you are not sure that they are properly
connected to other nodes, members or plates, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
308
Graphical Input
Extend
Members can be extended or shortened using this tool in the renderer.
After selecting the members to be extended or shortened, right-click and select "Extend" from
the menu that appears. You must then select a reference point graphically. This just allows
you to control which ends of the members will move and which ends will stay in place. The
form shown below then appears.
The "Mode" option lets you choose between specifying a new length or specifying an
extension or reduction. The "Move" option lets you control which ends of the members will
be moved. In the "New length" or "Extension" field at the bottom of the form, you can specify
the new length or extension (or shortening) as an absolute value or as a percentage of the
original member length.
309
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Extrude
The extrude tool lets you extrude multiple members in any direction. It is extremely handy for
extruding a set of columns from the ground or from an existing floor of a multi-storey
building.
After selecting some nodes to extrude from, right-click and select "Extrude" from the menu
that appears. The nodes you select do not have to be coplanar. You should then pick two
points that represent the ends of a vector along which the members will be extruded. Note that
the position of the vector is unimportant, as it is just the length and direction of the vector that
matters.
Don't forget that when drawing the vector, you can attach to other nodes or members, or you
can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line or an extension
line from the "locked on" node or member. You can also align with one of the three global
axes. For more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that
when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired
point(s). For more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
The extrude form then appears, allowing you to set the node increment if desired, otherwise
just leave it at 0 to use the next available node numbers. The node increment can be useful if
you have a regular node numbering scheme for each floor of a multi-storey building.
The members are then extruded from the selected nodes in accordance with the length and
direction of the extrude vector.
310
Graphical Input
When extruding members from the ground, it can be useful to set up some Gridlines and then
use the Draw Nodes tool to create nodes at the gridline intersections from which columns are
to be extruded. You can then select all the nodes just created and extrude columns from them.
311
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Filters
The filter tool allows you to restrict the amount of data that is displayed in the graphics
display area or in output reports. You can use it to restrict the display to specific nodes, node
types, members, member types, plates, plate types, section properties, material properties,
load types, buckling modes, steel members, steel connections, axis limits or any combinations
of these.
To save the current selection as a filter, just click the combo box in the above form, select a
filter number and then type in the filter’s name. You can overwrite previously saved filters or
you can select and name an unused filter.
An alternative method of creating a filter from nodes, members or plates selected graphically
is to use the "Select" buttons in the main filters form as explained below.
312
Graphical Input
For each filter you can select one or more check boxes and then specify the corresponding
items to be included in the filter. For example, if you specify a member list of 1,2-6,9,10 and
a section property list of 2,3, the filter will include only those members in the specified list
that use section properties 2 or 3. The more check boxes you enable and corresponding items
you specify, the more you limit the nodes, members or plates that are included in the filter.
You can define up to 200 different filters and scroll between them in the form by changing the
"Filter" numeric field.
The Include/Exclude buttons simply reverse the effect of the items in the filter line. For
example, if you specify a node list of 2-5,9,13 and select "Include" then those nodes will be
included in the filter. However, if you select "Exclude" then all the nodes except 2-5,9 and 13
will be included in the filter.
You can use the "Select" buttons in the "Nodes", "Members" and "Plates" lines to graphically
select or edit node, member and plate lists rather than having to type them in manually. You
can also use the "Select" buttons to graphically add to or modify filters that were previously
defined using other than node, member or plate lists.
Filters can also be based on lists of steel design members or connections, or steel member
design results.
The "X-axis", "Y-axis", and "Z-axis" fields allow you to specify minimum and maximum
limits for one or more axis directions. You can enter ranges into the fields manually or select
them graphically by clicking their "Select" button. Any parts of the frame which fall outside
of these limits are excluded from the filter.
The "Make filtered out members and plates" selection allows you to completely hide any
members or plates that are not included in the active filter or show them transparent. You can
also change the color and transparency of the filtered out objects.
Scrolling through the filters can be most conveniently done using the keyboard Ctrl+Page
keys as described in Shortcuts.
The import/export tools are very handy if you want to transfer the filters from one job to
another, or if you have generated them in a program such as MS-Excel and then want to
bring them into your job.
313
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Find
You can use the Find tool to quickly locate nodes, members or plates in your model by
clicking the button in the top toolbar.
Before clicking Ok, if you want to see which items would be found you can click the
button to have them listed as shown below. You can then click the button if you
want to copy a list of the found items into the clipboard, ready for pasting into another part of
SPACE GASS or another program.
You can also find all the members or plates with a particular section or material by clicking
the desired section or material in its property panel and then having all the matching members
or plates selected.
314
Graphical Input
You can find nodes, members or plates by listing their numbers directly or by specifying their
properties or the nodes/members/plates to which they are connected. Only those nodes,
members or plates that satisfy all of the find criteria in the form are found.
315
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
When a node, member or plate is found, it is highlighted graphically the same as if you had
selected it by picking it with the mouse. You can use the highlighting simply as a visual
reference to see where the found nodes, members or plates are in your structure, or you can
click a toolbar button or click the right mouse button and choose from the floating menu that
appears to perform an operation on the selected nodes, members or plates. You can cancel the
highlighting by pressing the keyboard ESC key or by selecting "Cancel" from the floating
menu.
316
Graphical Input
Grid
A grid can be displayed as a visual aid while you are developing or viewing your model. The
grid also assists in identifying the working plane, as it is always displayed in that plane.
Note that if you change your working plane then the grid automatically moves to that new
plane.
For more information about the attachment, alignment, snap and working plane tools in the
renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Snap and Plane.
317
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
It is a useful visual reference as you move the cursor around the screen. The GRID can be set
to any desired size provided it is not too fine or too coarse to be properly displayed. The
GRID setting uses the same system of units as the structure being displayed.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Grid" toolbar button or re-selecting the
"Grid" menu item.
The current GRID setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
If you change the operating plane while a grid is displayed, the grid will not be updated until
you perform an operation which refreshes the entire screen such as PAN, ZOOM,
VIEWPOINT, SCALE, REDRAW, etc.
In the traditional graphics window, the grid can only be displayed in one of the global
planes. It cannot be offset a distance out along one of the axes. If you are operating in a plane
which is offset from the 0,0,0 global origin and your viewpoint is at an angle to the plane you
are working in, do not try to use the displayed grid as a reference. It is only useful if you are
operating in the same plane as the grid or if your viewpoint is perpendicular to the operating
plane.
318
Graphical Input
Gridlines
Gridlines can be added to your model at any stage of its development. As well as providing a
visual reference, they can also be attached to when you are drawing or editing your model.
Gridlines can be created, edited or turned on or off via the button in the bottom of the
side toolbar. You can simply enter the desired gridline tags, positions and elevations into the
appropriate tables of the form shown below. By entering more than one line of data in the
Elevations table you can have multiple sets of gridlines at different elevations.
319
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Gridlines can also be generated by clicking "Auto Generate Gridlines" buttons via the form
shown below.
320
Graphical Input
Infotips
If you hover the mouse over a node, member or plate in the renderer, an infotip appears that
gives useful information about the object as shown below.
Infotips can be turned on or off by clicking the left hand part of the button at the
bottom of the side toolbar. If the button is on but infotips don't appear when you move the
mouse over the structure, click the arrow part of the button and check that the
"Structure Infotips" option is ticked. Note that you can also temporarily hide infotips while
you're working by holding down the I key.
321
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Intersect
The Intersect tool allows you to join two or more members and automatically insert nodes at
the intersection points. It works with members that are not touching each other, and with
members that cross over each other.
After selecting the members to be intersected, right-click and select "Intersect Move",
"Intersect Extend" or "Intersect Offset" from the menu that appears. You should then click a
member that the selected members are to intersect with.
If you choose "Intersect Move", the ends of the selected members will be moved to the
intersection points.
If you choose "Intersect Extend", new members will be added that extend from the ends of the
selected members to the intersection points.
If you choose "Intersect Offset", member offsets will be added that offset the ends of the
selected members to the intersection points.
Because the "Move ends" or "Extend ends" selection only affects members which don’t
already pass through the intersection point, the selection is irrelevant for members that cross
over each other.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Concentrated loads and distributed forces acting on a member that is subdivided as the
result of an intersect operation are now automatically re-distributed onto the subdivided
members, however in the traditional graphics window distributed torsion, thermal and
prestress loads are not!
Be careful when intersecting with members that have local Y or Z member offsets.
Because local offsets are calculated relative to a straight line joining the member’s end
nodes, they will change direction if you add intermediate nodes. It is therefore recommended
that you should always convert any local Y or Z member offsets to global before intersecting
at an intermediate point.
After using the Intersect tool, if you want to check that the members are properly
connected, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
322
Graphical Input
If you can’t easily position a point using the mouse, you can simply type in the desired
coordinates. You can enter points in cartesian or polar coordinates, using absolute or relative
modes. As soon as you start typing, the following form will appear automatically.
A point can be entered using cartesian coordinates by simply typing the X, Y and Z values
separated by commas. For example, 2.3,1.2,0.5 locates a point at X=2.3, Y=1.2 and Z=0.5.
If you type less than three values for a point, the missing values are assumed to be zero. For
example, 2.3,0,0 could be shortened to just "2.3", or 2.3,1.2,0 could be shortened to "2.3,1.2".
A point can be entered using polar coordinates by typing a distance, followed by a vertical
angle (from the global XZ plane), followed by a horizontal angle (from the global XY plane).
<’s are used to separate the values rather than commas. For example, a point 10 units from the
origin with a vertical angle of 45 and a horizontal angle of 15, could be typed in as
10<45<15.
To enter points in relative mode (ie. relative to the other end of a line) apply an "@" prefix to
the coordinates. For example, a point which is 8 units in the X direction and 6 units in the Y
direction from a previous point, could be typed in as @8,6, or @10<36.9.
If you are using the renderer, you can also type a length if you are drawing a line or vector
that is aligned with a global axis or an alignment vector from a node or member that you are
"locked on" to.
323
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
ATTACH is on, the point will not attach unless you make a direct hit. Any point positioned
with the keyboard is kept at the exact coordinates that you type in.
For information on attachment, alignment, working plane, grid and snap tools that allow you
to position points accurately in the renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment, Plane, Grid,
Snap and The renderer.
For information on snapping and attachment tools available that allow you to position points
accurately in the traditional graphics window, refer to The traditional graphics window.
324
Graphical Input
You can open the load case titles datasheet by selecting "Load Case Titles" from the Loads
menu and then entering data into the datasheet as explained in Load case title data.
Note that you can open a load case titles viewer from within the renderer that can be left open
while you work with other tools. For more information, refer to Load case titles viewer.
325
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Lumped masses
This tool allows you to graphically apply lumped masses to nodes. Masses are always
referenced to the global axes system. You must apply some lumped masses before a dynamic
frequency analysis can be performed.
OR
Click the toolbar button or select "Lumped Masses - Graphical" from the Loads
menu, select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click
Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new masses then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing masses then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the masses applied to each selected node
individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or applied as a group to all the
selected nodes (ie. one line of data for all the nodes). The advantage of the "group"
selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to have it
applied to all the selected nodes. This can be particularly useful if you are applying
the same mass to a number of nodes. If you are inputting a different mass on each
node then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can
also be useful if you are simply trying to see what masses are already applied to the
nodes you have selected.
If you have elected to show the masses applied to each node individually then you
can also choose between showing all the selected nodes or just the ones that are
loaded. If you are inputting new masses then you would probably choose to show all
the selected nodes, whereas if you are editing existing masses or just viewing masses
then showing just the loaded nodes may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing masses shown. You can add, edit or delete
masses and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
326
Graphical Input
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
Note that static loads can be converted to masses using the static load to mass conversion tool
in the renderer. For more information, refer to Static load to mass conversion.
327
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
When specifying the source load case list, you can either list them directly, or you can click
the button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as
shown below.
328
Graphical Input
329
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Master-slave constraints
Master-slave constraints are incorporated into node properties.
330
Graphical Input
Material properties
Material properties are incorporated into the member and plate properties forms.
331
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Measure
Right-click on a member, on a node or on any point away from your model and then select
"Measure/Dimension" in the menu that appears. Alternatively, you can select two nodes or
two other points, right-click and then select "Measure/Dimension" or you can simply click the
button in the toolbar at the bottom of the side toolbar. The form that appears below
shows the actual distance (or member length), the projected distances and the angles between
the nodes, member ends or points selected.
You can then continue to click other nodes, members or points on or around your model and
see the data updated in the form.
Dimension
At any time while using the Measure tool, you can click the "Add Dimension' button in the
form to add a dimension to your model. If the dimension is not exactly how you want it, you
can experiment with the settings in the "Dimension" part of the form to adjust it as required.
Dimensions can be updated or deleted by simply selecting them, right-clicking and then
selecting "Edit Dimension" or "Delete" from the menu that appears.
Dimensions can be turned on or off via the button at the bottom of the side toolbar.
332
Graphical Input
Don't forget that if you want to select a point that is not on a node or a member but is lined up
with one, you can simply hover over the node or member for a second until you hear the "lock
on" pop sound and you can then move away and still stay lined up. This is handy if you want
to add dimension lines some distance away from a point such as with the "12m" dimension in
the model shown above. In this case you could click the node at the bottom of the column,
hover over the apex node until it "locks on" and then move back in line with the column
staying lined up with the apex node before clicking the second dimension point (see below).
For more information, see Attachment and alignment methods.
333
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
OR
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected member
individually (ie. one line of data for each member) or applied as a group to all the
selected members (ie. one line of data for all the members). The advantage of the
"group" selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to
have it applied to all the selected members. This can be particularly useful if you are
applying the same load to a number of members. If you are inputting a different load
on each member then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing
"individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already
applied to the members you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member individually then you
can also choose between showing all the selected members or just the ones that are
loaded. If you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all
the selected members, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads
then showing just the loaded members may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete
loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
334
Graphical Input
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
You can apply more than one concentrated load to the same
member within the same load case by specifying a different sub-load number for each
different member concentrated load.
335
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
OR
Click the toolbar button or select "Member Distributed Forces - Graphical" from
the Loads menu, select the members you wish to load, click the right mouse button
and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected member
individually (ie. one line of data for each member) or applied as a group to all the
selected members (ie. one line of data for all the members). The advantage of the
"group" selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to
have it applied to all the selected members. This can be particularly useful if you are
applying the same load to a number of members. If you are inputting a different load
on each member then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing
"individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already
applied to the members you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member individually then you
can also choose between showing all the selected members or just the ones that are
loaded. If you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all
the selected members, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads
then showing just the loaded members may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete
loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
336
Graphical Input
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
You can apply more than one distributed force to the same
member within the same load case by specifying a different sub-load number for each
different member distributed force. This allows you to apply "stepped" distributed forces
along a member without having to resort to intermediate nodes.
337
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
OR
Select "Member Distributed Torsions - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the
members you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected member
individually (ie. one line of data for each member) or applied as a group to all the
selected members (ie. one line of data for all the members). The advantage of the
"group" selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to
have it applied to all the selected members. This can be particularly useful if you are
applying the same load to a number of members. If you are inputting a different load
on each member then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing
"individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already
applied to the members you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member individually then you
can also choose between showing all the selected members or just the ones that are
loaded. If you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all
the selected members, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads
then showing just the loaded members may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete
loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
338
Graphical Input
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
You can apply more than one distributed torsion to the same
member within the same load case by specifying a different sub-load number for each
different member distributed torsion. This allows you to apply "stepped" distributed torsions
along a member without having to resort to intermediate nodes.
339
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Member offsets
Member offsets are incorporated into member properties.
340
Graphical Input
OR
Select "Member Prestress Loads - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the
members you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected member
individually (ie. one line of data for each member) or applied as a group to all the
selected members (ie. one line of data for all the members). The advantage of the
"group" selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to
have it applied to all the selected members. This can be particularly useful if you are
applying the same load to a number of members. If you are inputting a different load
on each member then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing
"individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already
applied to the members you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member individually then you
can also choose between showing all the selected members or just the ones that are
loaded. If you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all
the selected members, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads
then showing just the loaded members may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete
loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
341
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
342
Graphical Input
Member properties
The member property forms described here are only available in the traditional graphics
window. For information about the renderer's property panels, refer to Property panels or
The renderer.
Member properties include member type, connectivity, orientation, fixity, section properties,
material properties and member offsets. Hence, selecting the graphical option for "Members",
"Section properties", "Material properties" or "Member offsets" will all take you to the same
member properties form.
There are three modes available for editing member properties as follows.
Note "Edit/Query Member" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one member at a time, you can simply
click on any other member to display and edit its properties without exiting the command.
When doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the previously displayed member
are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any members to display their
analysis results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
Note "Edit Member Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
343
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you can’t select other
members while the form is open. You can, however select multiple members initially and
make changes to all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the members selected, more than one value exists. If you leave
such a field blank then the selected members will retain their individual values. However, if
you type into a blank field then all of the selected members will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Shows or hides the section properties part of the member properties form.
Shows or hides the material properties part of the member properties form.
Shows or hides the member offsets part of the member properties form.
Section and material properties are different to the other items in the members form because a
single section or material can be shared amongst many members. All other items of data in
the members form have their own independent values for each member. Hence, as soon as
you change the section or material property number, the rest of the section or material data
changes to match.
344
Graphical Input
Note that the datasheet that appears is different to the normal members datasheet because it
contains extra columns for section properties, material properties and offsets.
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
You can view member hinges, member offsets or section properties graphically by
depressing the "View member hinges", "View member offsets" or "View rendered model"
toggle buttons in the side toolbar.
If you change any member properties that affect the structure’s geometry, you may not
be able to select some nodes or members until after a redraw. This is due to their displayed
position becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you to order an automatic
redraw after you exit the node properties form.
345
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Mesh
The Mesh tool allows you to select one or more plates and then mesh them into smaller
elements. You can also subdivide quadrilateral plates into triangles.
Unlike frame elements, plate elements (like all finite elements) are not exact and hence the
accuracy of the analysis increases as the number of plate elements is increased. It is therefore
important that your model is properly meshed.
The normal procedure for generating a well meshed model is to draw large plates that define
the overall walls, slabs and other components and then use the mesh tool to subdivide the
large plates into smaller elements.
The meshing pattern also affects the analysis results to some extent. For example, because all
of the elements in the following diagram are orientated at the same angle, an effect referred to
as "mesh induced anisotropy" occurs which results in lower computational accuracy.
A meshing pattern that will achieve more accurate results is shown below.
After selecting the plates to be meshed, right-click and select "Mesh Plates" from the menu
that appears.
346
Graphical Input
Note that if members also exist around the perimeter of the plates being meshed then they can
also be subdivided during the meshing operation if the "Split members along plate edges and
connect to newly generated intermediate nodes" option is checked.
After meshing, each plate element must be flat (ie. all vertices in the same plane), have
internal angles less than 135 and an aspect ratio less than 4:1.
347
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Mirror
The Mirror tool allows you to create a mirror image of any user defined nodes, members or
plates about any user defined surface.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be mirrored, right-click and select "Mirror"
from the menu that appears. You should then pick a point that lies anywhere in the mirror
plane followed by filling out the form shown below.
Don't forget that when picking points in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line
or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can use the
mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
348
Graphical Input
Move
The Move tool allows you to select one or more nodes, members or plates and move them in
any direction on the screen.
Alternatively, if you have only selected one node to be moved, you can choose between
"Move Along Vector" or "Move To Location". The "Move to Location" option requires you
to pick a destination point rather than two ends of a vector.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or members, or
you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line or an
extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can also align with one of the three
global axes. For more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember
also that when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of
the desired point(s). For more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
Click the toolbar button or select "Move" from the Structure menu and then
select the node you wish to move. Move the node and pick its destination point. You
can see the members attached to the node being moved and stretched as you move the
node.
OR
Select the nodes you wish to move, click the right mouse button and then select
"Move" from the floating menu that appears. Pick two points that represent the vector
through which the selected nodes are to be moved.
Remember that when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in
the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, see "Using the
keyboard to position points".
3. Select more nodes to move, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the
tool.
349
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Remove intermediate nodes tool in the renderer or use the Move tool to simply move the
intermediate node onto either one of the end nodes.
After moving some nodes, if you are not sure that the members and plates attached to
them are properly connected to other nodes, members or plates, you can use the
"Connectivity" tool.
350
Graphical Input
After selecting the two members on either side of the intermediate node to be moved, right-
click and select "Move Intermediate Nodes" from the menu that appears.
In the form shown below, you can enter the distance to be moved or the new member lengths
as absolute lengths or as percentages.
351
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Moving loads
The moving loads tool generates a series of load cases that represent the effect of loads
moving along a structure. Common applications include moving or stationary vehicles on a
bridge, a crane travelling along a crane rail in a building or material moving along a conveyor.
Each load case represents a point in time, and the loads generated from the moving wheels or
pressure patches for that load case are distributed onto the closest members or plates.
Overview
The moving loads tool lets you define sets (scenarios) of moving loads (vehicles, cranes,
pressure patches, line loads, etc) that move along your model. As the loads move, SPACE
GASS takes a snapshot of their position at a regular time interval and creates a load case for
each point in time. If you view the load cases one after another it gives the appearance of the
loads moving along the model. Once the moving load cases have been generated you can
combine them with other load cases, analyse them or perform design checks on them.
In order to proceed, you must first create a moving load scenario that defines a set of load
cases to be generated. The scenario has a name, a starting load case number and a time
interval that represents the time between load cases. Often only one scenario is required,
however you can create multiple scenarios if you wish to examine different situations such as
various combinations of vehicles moving along a bridge.
You can then add vehicles and/or pressures to the scenario, each of which contains a name,
type, magnitude, travel path, load factors, start position, speed and delay. A vehicle consists
of a set of wheels (with their positions and loads) and can be defined directly or imported
from a standard library. A pressure consists of a width, length, pressure magnitude (in three
directions) and load spacing. Each scenario can contain multiple vehicles and pressures, each
moving at different speeds, with different magnitudes, starting positions, delays and in
different directions if required. The load's speed multiplied by the scenario's time interval
defines the distance travelled by the load from one load case to the next.
352
Graphical Input
Stationary loads can be modelled by just specifying a zero speed. Pressure loads with a zero
length are also treated as stationary and are applied to the entire travel path length. Stationary
loads can be put into just the starting load case or added to each load case that contains
moving loads.
A travel path, which determines where the vehicle or pressure travels, can have multiple
straight or curved segments that can go in any direction or around corners. If multiple loads
use the same travel path then it only needs to be created once and can then be shared between
all the loads that reference it. Travel paths can be defined graphically or via a data table, plus
a travel path generation tool lets you set up your bridge lanes or parallel travel paths quickly
in one operation.
Finally, you must select the members and/or plates that could be directly loaded by the
moving vehicles or pressures. Loads are only applied to the members or plates you have
selected, and so for bridges it is normal to select only the members and/or plates in your
bridge deck, or for cranes it is normal to select only the beams that the crane wheels are in
direct contact with.
When the moving loads tool generates the load cases for a scenario, it calculates the position
of each vehicle or pressure along its travel path at each point in time and then distributes its
loads onto the closest members or plates that support it. Each component of a vehicle or
pressure is active if it is within the ends of the load's travel path and within the loading area
that you can specify. If you have ticked the vertical proximity distance option then only the
members or plates that are within that distance vertically from the vehicle or pressure will be
loaded.
At any time after creating a scenario, you can produce an animated view of the vehicles and
pressures moving along your model. After the loads have been generated, you can use the
keyboard PageUp/Dn keys to scroll through the load cases and effectively see the loads
moving across your model.
Operating procedure
The following steps assume that your job doesn't yet contain any moving load data. If moving
load data already exists then you can simply skip the steps for which data already exists.
The order of the steps given below is a logical sequence that should work well for most jobs,
however other than having to create at least one scenario first, the order is not important and
can be changed to suit your desired workflow.
This is the recommended most method for most applications. You can set up your
travel paths and select the members and plates to be loaded later.
353
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
b. Selecting the members or plates that will be in direct contact with the moving loads,
clicking the right mouse button and then selecting "Generate Moving Loads".
This method is recommended if the loads move along a single line of members such as
along a crane rail in a building. If the members you select form a single line of
members connected end-to-end then the moving loads tool will automatically set up an
initial travel path along this line of members, plus it will treat the members you
selected as the ones to be loaded. Of course you can change the travel path and the
loaded members from inside the moving loads tool at any stage.
Regardless of which of the above methods you use to start the process, the selection of the
members and plates to be loaded will be remembered by the module and so you don't have to
re-select them each time you open the moving loads tool.
Each scenario represents a particular configuration of loads moving along your structure. A
scenario may contain a number of vehicles, pressure patches or line loads, either stationary or
moving at different speeds with different starting positions, delays and in different directions.
In many cases you will only need one scenario, however if you are modelling something like
354
Graphical Input
a multi-lane bridge then you may need a different scenario for each combination of vehicles
in the various lanes.
When creating a scenario you must specify a scenario name, a starting load case and a time
interval. The name is simply used to identify the scenario and can be any descriptive text. The
starting load case is the first in the set of consecutive load cases that will be generated for the
scenario, and the time interval is the interval between load cases for the scenario. The
finishing load case is calculated automatically for each load and depends on a number of
parameters as follows:
where Start is the scenario's starting load case, TPLen is the length of the load's travel path,
LLen is the length of the load (eg. 25m for an Australian M1600-6.25 vehicle), SPos is the
load's start position along the travel path, Speed is the load's speed, Delay is the load's starting
delay and Interval is the scenario's time interval.
The overall finishing load case for the scenario is the maximum of the finishing load cases for
all of the loads in the scenario.
You can also combine the moving load cases with other static load cases by filling out the
table at the bottom of the scenario properties form. For more information refer to "Combining
scenarios with other static load cases" below.
Adding loads is simply a matter of clicking the "Add Load" button and then inputting data
into the following form.
355
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For each load you must specify its type as a vehicle or a pressure, select a travel path, and
then specify a start position, speed, delay and load factors.
Normally the front of a moving load will start at the beginning of the travel path at time zero
and continue until the rear of the vehicle reaches the end of the travel path. Alternatively, you
can start your load part-way along the travel path by specifying a non-zero start position
and/or you can change its start time by giving it a delay. Delays are very useful if you wish to
model vehicles that follow each other on a bridge for example.
The speed setting controls the distance each load travels over the scenario's time interval. This
distance is also the change in position of the load between successive load cases for the
scenario. If you wish to model a reversing vehicle then just specify a negative speed. Note
that a reversing vehicle will still move in the same direction along the travel path as a forward
moving vehicle.
Stationary loads can be modelled by simply giving them a zero speed. Note that the start
position and delay settings are still active for stationary loads.
If you have a stationary pressure or line load that extends along the entire travel path length,
you can model this by specifying a zero pressure length. In this case the speed and start
position settings will be ignored.
The load factor, lane factor and dynamic factor allow you to factor your loads up or down to
satisfy the design code requirements. For example, the lane factor usually depends on how
many lanes are loaded and, for 3 lanes or more loaded, it is typically 1.0 for the first lane, 0.8
for the second lane and 0.4 for the other lanes. The dynamic factor is equal to (1 + ), where
is the dynamic load allowance that depends on the type of vehicle being used. All three
factors are multiplied together to give an overall load factor and so if a particular factor is not
applicable to your situation, such as if you are modelling a crane travelling in a building and
so there is no lane factor, you should just set the irrelevant factor(s) to 1.0.
The "Generate in" field is enabled for stationary loads and controls whether the load is placed
just into the starting load case or into every load case. If you specify "Starting load case only"
then the stationary loads will go into the starting load case and the moving loads will begin in
356
Graphical Input
the next load case. If you specify "All load cases" then the stationary and moving loads will
be combined and will begin in the starting load case.
For a vehicle you can select from a list of vehicles that are already being used in the job,
select a vehicle from a library, create a new one or edit an existing vehicle by clicking the
following buttons in the "Load Properties" form.
Click this button to select from a list of vehicles that are already in use in the job.
Selecting an existing vehicle will allow it to be shared between multiple loads. If there are
currently no vehicles in the job then this button will be disabled.
Click this button to select a vehicle from one of the libraries supplied with SPACE GASS
or from a custom vehicle library you created previously.
357
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
When editing a vehicle or creating a new one, you must specify a name, together with each
wheel's position relative to the front of the vehicle and the forces and moments that the wheel
exerts on the structure.
For a pressure you can select from a list of pressures that are already being used in the job,
create a new one or edit an existing pressure by clicking the following buttons in the "Load
Properties" form.
Click this button to select from a list of pressures that are already in use in the job.
Selecting an existing pressure will allow it to be shared between multiple loads. If there are
currently no pressures in the job then this button will be disabled.
358
Graphical Input
When editing a pressure or creating a new one, you must specify a name, together with the
width, length, load spacing and magnitude of the pressure. When a pressure is distributed onto
the members or plates in your structure it is approximated by a grid of uniformly distributed
point loads spaced at the "Load spacing" setting that you specify. If you use a small load
spacing then you will get a more accurate load distribution than you would with a large load
spacing, however a smaller load spacing will also result in many more loads being generated.
If you wish to generate a line load then you should simply specify a pressure width that is less
than the load spacing. For example, in order to generate a 6kN/m line load with a load spacing
of 0.5m you could specify a width of 0.1m and a pressure of 60kPa. Alternatively, a width of
0.25m with a pressure of 24kPa would give exactly the same result.
If you have a stationary pressure or line load that extends along the entire travel path length,
you can easily model this by specifying a zero pressure length. In this case the speed and start
position settings will be ignored.
359
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If you are modelling a multi-lane bridge then you should think of each lane as a travel path.
Once you have defined the travel path for your first lane you can use the lane generation tool
(explained below) to generate the other lanes simply by specifying the lane width and the
number of lanes required. In fact, it is often a good idea to skip "Step 3 - Adding Loads"
above, set up all your lanes first and then go back to step 3 to add your loads.
You can add a travel path or select an existing one by clicking the following buttons in the
"Load Properties" form.
Click this button to select from a list of travel paths that are already in use in the job.
Selecting an existing travel path will allow it to be shared between multiple loads. If there are
currently no travel paths in the job then this button will be disabled.
When selecting a travel path from the above list, if you are unsure of which travel path is
which, you can click the "View" button to show them all graphically.
360
Graphical Input
Click this button to create a new travel path or edit an existing one.
A travel path consists of a sequence of straight line or curved segments. Each travel path
station is defined by a node number and/or X,Y,Z coordinate. If a station is defined by a node
number and a coordinate then the coordinate is added to the node position. For example, in
the table below, the travel path is parallel to a line joining nodes 1, 43 and 12 and offset 5m in
the global Z direction from that line. If you wish to define a travel path station using just
coordinates then the node number should be zero for that station.
Curved segments can be defined by a non-zero radius at the end of the segment. The travel
path below has two segments, each with a radius of 75m. Any radius specified for the first
station of the travel path (ie. in the first line of the table) is ignored.
If you don't wish to type the travel path stations directly into the table, you can click the
"Select Graphically" button and then select the stations graphically by clicking on nodes,
members or points off the structure.
If you are modelling a multi-lane bridge then once you have defined the travel path for the
first lane, you can use the "Generate Extra Travel Paths" => "Generate Lanes" button in the
main moving loads form to generate the other lanes.
361
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
It is just a matter of selecting the first lane in the "Lane to copy from" field, specifying how
many extra lanes to generate and the lane spacing. The extra lanes can be generated to the left
or right of the first lane. If you're not sure which lane to select in the "Lane to copy from"
field then you can click the "View" button next to it to view the existing travel paths
graphically before proceeding with the generation. Any curved segments will have their
radius increased or decreased in the generated lanes so that the center of curvature of all lanes
is maintained.
Note that bridge lanes are no different to other travel paths. The only reason they have their
own generation form is to make it easier for the user by tailoring the generation input data to
lane specific items.
You can also generate extra travel paths by clicking the "Generate Extra Lanes" => "Generate
Along Vector" button.
It is similar to the lane generation form above except that the lane spacing field is replaced by
a copy vector. Travel paths generated this way will be identical to the original travel path and
spaced apart as defined by the copy vector. The radius in curved segments will not be
adjusted in the generated copies.
362
Graphical Input
After choosing "Members" or "Plates" from the following menu you should select them
graphically either by clicking them directly or via selection windows in the normal way. If
your model contains both members and plates that could be loaded then you should select
both the members and the plates. Note that you can't select members and plates at the same
time and so if you need to select both members and plates then you should select the members
first followed by the plates (or vice-versa).
It is important that you select all the members and plates that could be directly loaded by the
vehicle wheels or pressures because any that are not selected won't be loaded even if a wheel
or pressure passes directly over them. Conversely, if you select members or plates that aren't
directly loaded (such as sub-structure members below a bridge deck) then they may take
loads incorrectly that are supposed to be applied to other members or plates higher up.
Once you have made the member and/or plate selections they will be remembered and saved
with the rest of the moving load data. This means that you don't have to re-select them each
time you open the moving loads tool.
If you selected some members or plates and then opened the moving loads tool via the right-
click menu (ie. using method (b) in "Step 1 - Getting Started" above) then those members or
plates will already be selected and you don't have to re-select them here. You can, however,
use the "Select Elements to Load" button to edit your selection if required.
Better still, you can edit any of your data by just double-clicking the desired item in the tree
on the left.
363
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
In order to visually check the loads and travel paths, you can click the "View" button and then
select between loads and travel paths.
Followed by ticking the scenarios or travel paths you wish to view in the following form.
If you select loads then when you click Ok they are shown moving across your model as
follows:
364
Graphical Input
Or if you select travel paths then when you click Ok they are shown as follows:
Before generating the moving loads, you need to set the following options correctly.
Normally, loads that don't fall directly on a member are distributed to the closest surrounding
members in proportion to their distance from the load, however if the "Apply wheel loads to
closest member only" option is selected then each load will be applied only to the member
that is closest to it. This reduces the number of loads that are generated while still providing
sufficient accuracy in most cases.
Each vehicle or pressure is active while it is between normals that extend from the two ends
of its travel path. It is possible, however, that you may want wheels or parts of a pressure area
365
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
to become inactive at certain times even though they are still within the extents of the travel
path. For example, if a wheel moves off the side of a bridge or moves off the end of a skew
bridge, you may want it to become inactive before it reaches the end of its travel path. You
can achieve this by clicking the "Ignore loads that transfer load to just one member" option.
This has the effect of ignoring wheels or parts of a pressure area that would have their load
distributed to just one member unless the load is directly on that one member. It solves the
problem of deactivating loads that move off the structure in most cases.
For situations in which the above option is not suitable, you can specify a polygon that
defines a loading area. Wheels or parts of a pressure area that fall outside of the loading area
are treated as inactive. You can define the loading area graphically by clicking the "Select
Loading Area" button in the main moving loads form and then selecting points around your
model that represent the limits of the loading area.
When loads are distributed onto the surrounding members or plates, their vertical position is
usually ignored. The problem with this is that if you have a multi-level bridge for example,
any vehicles that are on an upper bridge deck could also have their load incorrectly applied to
a lower deck if it is vertically below the vehicle. The "Check vertical proximity" setting
solves this problem by only distributing load to the members or plates that are positioned
vertically within the "Proximity" distance of the load.
If you don't want to generate data for every scenario then you can disable some of them by
unticking them in the tree on the left. In the following example the "M1600 - Heaviest load in
centre lane" has been unticked and so it is temporarily disabled and no loads will be generated
for it when you click the "Generate" button.
366
Graphical Input
During the generation, each wheel of a vehicle is treated as a load source that has its load
distributed onto the structure. Pressure loads are approximated by a grid of equally spaced
point loads that are also distributed onto the structure. For each wheel load or pressure point
load, if it falls on a plate then it is distributed to the plate's corner nodes in proportion to their
distance from the load. If it doesn't fall on a plate then it is distributed to the surrounding
members in proportion to their distance from the load or onto a single member if it falls
directly on that member or if the "Apply member loads to closest member only" option is
ticked.
Once the load generation has finished, you can use the keyboard PageUp/Dn keys to scroll
through the load cases and see effect of the generated loads moving across your structure.
All primary and combination load cases generated with the moving loads tool are given load
case titles that reflect their properties. Each title includes a heading and a notes field. Please
ensure that you don’t edit or delete the notes field as it is the means by which the program
keeps track of which load cases belong to which scenario.
Envelopes
After the job has been analysed, you can display bending moment or shear force envelopes by
clicking the "Selected Load Cases" item in the load cases combo box in the top toolbar and
then typing in the range of load cases that have just been generated for a scenario. For
example, if load cases 1 to 35 were generated, you should type 1-35 into the load cases field.
Note that this may not always be necessary as the load cases field is automatically set by
SPACE GASS for the first scenario whenever moving loads are generated.
367
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
On the side toolbar, you should then ensure that the envelope button is depressed and the
desired bending moment or shear force diagram button is depressed.
For example, in the above form, the scenario 1 moving loads will be combined with static
load case 9 to form a set of combination load cases starting at load case 500. A further set of
368
Graphical Input
combination load cases starting at 900 will combine the scenario 1 load cases (factored by
0.9) with static load case 6.
You can see this has the potential to generate a huge number of load cases and you may,
therefore, need to increase the "Maximum load cases" value via the "Problem size limits" item
of the Settings menu.
If you need to combine a scenario with more than one static primary or combination load
case, simply create a combination load case that combines the primary and combination
load cases into a new combination load case first and then combine the scenario with that
new combination load case. Remember that combination load cases can be combined into
further combinations up to four levels deep.
Combining scenarios with other load cases increases the risk of overwriting existing load
cases and having load case clashes due to overlapping of load cases between scenarios and
combinations. SPACE GASS checks for these occurrences and prevents the load generation
from proceeding if any problems are detected.
If you don't want to use the "Combining with other Load Cases" table in the scenario
properties form above then you can also combine sets of load cases using the "Generate"
button in the normal combination load cases datasheet. This has the added advantage that you
can change your combinations at any time without having to re-run the moving load
generation. The following example would combine load case 6 factored by 0.9 with load
cases 100-177 factored by 1.0 into combination load cases 900-977. It would achieve exactly
the same thing as the second line in the "Combining with other Load Cases" table above.
369
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Multiple viewports
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window.
SPACE GASS allows you to present more than one view of your structure on the screen at
any one time in the traditional graphics window. Up to four different windows, or
"viewports", can be displayed and individually configured to better display your structure.
The procedure involves clicking the button or selecting "Viewports" from the Window
menu. Once you have opened multiple viewports you can page through the different views
using the and toolbar buttons (the TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys perform the same
functions).
When you click the viewport tool you are presented with a number of different
configurations. Most of these configurations are self explanatory, with the exception of the
bottom four buttons.
These four buttons allow you to select any one of the four viewports, either on their own, or in
combination. Each corner of the screen corresponds with viewports 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
If one of the viewports selected is already displayed it will return to the configuration defined
by the diagram on the button selected.
Each of the viewports which are displayed have their own unique configuration. This applies
to scales, viewpoint, filters, superimposed diagrams, toggle button settings, etc. The
configuration you specify for a viewport will be retained when you close the viewport so that,
when you open that viewport again, the same settings will be active.
You can use the viewports to display a variety of different information including different
views of the structure, graphics settings, bending moment, shear force, axial force, stress and
displacement diagrams, dynamic and buckling mode shapes, filters, load cases, member top
flanges, 3D geometry, local axes, etc. When you select a different viewport (either by clicking
on it with the mouse, selecting it via the "Viewport" toolbar buttons or Window menu, or by
using the TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys) the settings you have selected for that viewport will be
indicated via the toggle buttons.
370
Graphical Input
Graphics commands apply to the active viewport. Some graphics commands allow you to
move between viewports without exiting from the command. For instance, consider a job
where you have 4 viewports displayed with viewport 1 as the active viewport. If you select
the draw facility and start drawing a line in the active viewport, you can then move the cursor
to any other viewport without exiting from the draw command.
You will find that as you move the cursor between the viewports each viewport displays a
drawn line which has the same coordinates as in the viewport where you first started drawing
the line. This is useful in a number of situations, such as when you start drawing a line in one
viewport but cannot locate the end point in that viewport. This feature applies to some
graphics functions and can be switched on and off via the "Viewports" form (ie. by toggling
the "Activate Viewport Under Cursor" check box in the viewports form).
371
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Node loads
This tool allows you to graphically apply force and moment loads to nodes. Node loads are
always referenced to the global axes system. If you wish to apply node loads in local axes you
should use member concentrated loads instead (see also Member concentrated loads).
OR
Click the toolbar button or select "Node Loads - Graphical" from the Loads
menu, select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click
Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected node
individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or applied as a group to all the
selected nodes (ie. one line of data for all the nodes). The advantage of the "group"
selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to have it
applied to all the selected nodes. This can be particularly useful if you are applying
the same load to a number of nodes. If you are inputting a different load on each node
then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can also be
useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already applied to the nodes you
have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each node individually then you can
also choose between showing all the selected nodes or just the ones that are loaded. If
you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all the selected
nodes, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads then showing
just the loaded nodes may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete
loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
372
Graphical Input
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
373
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Node properties
The node property forms described here are only available in the traditional graphics
window. For information about the renderer's property panels, refer to Property panels or
The renderer.
Node properties include node coordinates, node restraints and master-slave constraints.
Hence, selecting the graphical option for "Nodes", "Node restraints" or "Master-slave
constraints" will all take you to the same node properties form.
There are three modes available for editing node properties as follows.
Note "Edit/Query Node" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one node at a time, you can simply
click on any other node to display and edit its properties without exiting the command. When
doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the previously displayed node are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any nodes to display their analysis
results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
Note "Edit Node Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
374
Graphical Input
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you can’t select other nodes
while the form is open. You can, however select multiple nodes initially and make changes to
all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the nodes selected, more than one value exists. If you leave
such a field blank then the selected nodes will retain their individual values. However, if you
type into a blank field then all of the selected nodes will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Shows or hides the master-slave constraints part of the node properties form.
Allows you to graphically select a master node rather than having to type in its node number.
Note that the datasheet that appears is different to the normal nodes datasheet because it
contains extra columns for restraints and master-slave constraints.
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
375
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can view node restraints or master-slave constraints graphically by depressing the
"View node restraints" or "View master-slave constraints" toggle buttons in the side toolbar.
If you change any node properties that affect the structure’s geometry, you may not be
able to select some nodes, members or plates until after a redraw. This is due to their
displayed position becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you to order an
automatic redraw after you exit the node properties form.
376
Graphical Input
Node restraints
Node restraints are incorporated into node properties.
377
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Notes
Notes can be attached to nodes, members or plates, or simply placed anywhere on or near the
model.
To add a note you can right-click anywhere in space or on a node, member or plate and then
select "Add Note" to bring up the following form. The form lets you set the note's colors,
leader length and location. When you click Ok the note appears in the renderer. Notes are
saved with the job and stay with the model unless you delete them.
378
Graphical Input
Notes can be turned on or off using the left side of the button at the bottom of the side
toolbar, or by clicking the small arrow on the right side of the button you can open
the notes editor which lets you move, edit or delete notes.
379
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Ortho
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window. The renderer has other
alignment tools that replicate the function of this Ortho tool.
The ortho tool limits the lines that you draw to only horizontal or vertical.
You can activate ortho mode by clicking the toolbar or selecting "Ortho" from
the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+O" on the keyboard (or just "O" if a graphics
command is active).
If ORTHO is on, it activates a secondary crosshair graphics cursor which indicates the actual
selection point and which moves in such a way that only horizontal or vertical lines (relative
to the frame global axes) can be drawn. It is a very useful aid for drawing and positioning
members, as most structures contain predominantly horizontal and vertical members.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Ortho Mode" toolbar button or re-selecting
the "Ortho Mode" menu item.
The current ORTHO setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
380
Graphical Input
Pan
This tool allows you to move the structure in any direction on the screen. It is useful if you
cannot see the entire structure at once and you don't want to change the scale. You simply
move the structure until you can see the desired portion.
Alternatively, you can pan by clicking the toolbar button or selecting "Pan" from the
View menu or the floating menu.
The PAN operation does not change node coordinates, it simply translates your
viewpoint.
381
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Plane
The plane tool allows you to specify an operating plane in or parallel to the global XY, XZ or
YZ planes in which the graphics cursor will move.
Note that whenever you graphically select a point or a node, the working plane moves to the
plane of that point or node. If you have a grid displayed, it is drawn in the current working
plane.
For more information about the attachment, alignment, grid and snap tools in the renderer,
refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Grid and Snap.
It allows you to accurately move the graphics cursor to any desired position in 3D space.
The current PLANE setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
The "Offset" field is the distance from the operating plane to the structure origin. It can be
seen by observing the coordinates display as you move the graphics cursor.
382
Graphical Input
You can often take advantage of the fact that when picking
points in any graphics operation, the operating plane offset is changed to match the
coordinates of the most recently picked point.
383
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
OR
Click the toolbar button or select "Plate Pressure Loads - Graphical" from the
Loads menu, select the plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected plate
individually (ie. one line of data for each plate) or applied as a group to all the
selected plates (ie. one line of data for all the plates). The advantage of the "group"
selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to have it
applied to all the selected plates. This can be particularly useful if you are applying
the same load to a number of plates. If you are inputting a different load on each plate
then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can also be
useful if you are simply trying to see what loads are already applied to the plates you
have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each plate individually then you can
also choose between showing all the selected plates or just the ones that are loaded. If
you are inputting new loads then you would probably choose to show all the selected
plates, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads then showing
just the loaded plates may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete
loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
384
Graphical Input
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
385
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Plate properties
The plate property forms described here are only available in the traditional graphics
window. For information about the renderer's property panels, refer to Property panels or
The renderer.
Plate properties include plate type, connectivity, orientation of local axes, plate thickness,
plate offset and material properties.
There are three modes available for editing plate properties as follows.
Note "Edit/Query Plate" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one plate at a time, you can simply
click on any other plate to display and edit its properties without exiting the command. When
doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the previously displayed plate are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any plates to display their analysis
results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
Note "Edit Plate Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
386
Graphical Input
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you can’t select other plates
while the form is open. You can, however select multiple plates initially and make changes to
all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the plates selected, more than one value exists. If you leave
such a field blank then the selected plates will retain their individual values. However, if you
type into a blank field then all of the selected plates will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Material properties are different to the other items in the plates form because a single material
can be shared amongst many plates. All other items of data in the plates form have their own
independent values for each plate. Hence, as soon as you change the material property
number, the rest of the material data changes to match.
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
You can view plate offsets graphically by depressing the "View offsets" toggle button in
the side toolbar.
If you change any plate properties that affect the structure’s geometry, you may not be
able to select some nodes or plates until after a redraw. This is due to their displayed position
becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you to order an automatic redraw after
you exit the node properties form.
387
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
388
Graphical Input
OR
Select "Prescribed Node Displacements - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the
nodes you wish to displace, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new displacements then you
would probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing displacements then you may also wish to
leave the load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and
you want to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the displacements applied to each selected
node individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or applied as a group to all the
selected nodes (ie. one line of data for all the nodes). The advantage of the "group"
selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to have it
applied to all the selected nodes. This can be particularly useful if you are applying
the same displacement to a number of nodes. If you are inputting a different
displacement on each node then you should choose the "individual" selection.
Choosing "individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying to see what
displacements are already applied to the nodes you have selected.
If you have elected to show the displacements applied to each node individually then
you can also choose between showing all the selected nodes or just the ones that are
displaced. If you are inputting new displacements then you would probably choose to
show all the selected nodes, whereas if you are editing existing displacements or just
viewing displacements then showing just the displaced nodes may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing displacements shown. You can add, edit
or delete displacements and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The
operation of the datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also
Datasheets).
389
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
390
Graphical Input
Property panels
Node, member and plate property panels
The node, member and plate property panels operate in two slightly different modes as
described below.
Mode 1 - When you double-click on a node, member or plate in the model, the appropriate
property panel opens and you can make changes and then click the Ok button at the bottom of
the panel to confirm the changes. Alternatively, if you make some changes in a property panel
and then simply click on a another node, member or plate in your model, the previous changes
will be confirmed and the newly selected item's data will appear in the property panel.
Mode 2 - If you select one or more nodes, members or plates and then right-click and select
"View/Edit Properties" from the menu that appears, the appropriate panel will open with the
combined data for all of the selected items. When in this mode, you cannot select other nodes,
members or plates until you have clicked the Ok or Cancel buttons at the bottom of the panel.
Blank fields indicate that the data is different for the selected items. Be careful with blank
fields because if you enter data into one of them then all of the selected items will get that
data.
391
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
392
Graphical Input
You can open the property panels to view the section and material properties and color match
them to the members in your model, or you can click a particular section or material in the
panel to have all the matching members in your model selected.
You can undock a panel and place it anywhere on the screen or dock it to the left or right side
of the renderer by first pinning it using and then dragging the title bar of the panel to the
desired location. Note that when undocked, it will stay open when not being used.
393
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
394
Graphical Input
Analysis result querying can be turned on or off by clicking the left hand part of the
button at the bottom of the side toolbar. If the button is on but analysis results don't appear
when you move the mouse over a diagram, click the arrow part of the button and
check that the "Analysis Results Infotips" option is ticked.
The scrollable results form shown below then displays a useful summary of the analysis
results for the node, member or plate you selected.
395
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other nodes, members or plates to have
their results displayed.
396
Graphical Input
Query frame
You can query any node, member or plate in your model by simply double-clicking on it.
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other nodes, members or plates to have
their attributes displayed.
For full details, refer to Node properties, Member properties or Plate properties.
397
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other members to have their design
results displayed.
398
Graphical Input
Redraw
This tool is not applicable to the renderer, as the model is always kept up to date, however
in the traditional graphics window a redraw is sometimes required to "clean-up" the image.
You can redraw the graphics display area with the same scale, viewpoint and contents by
clicking the toolbar button or selecting "Redraw" from the View menu or the floating
menu.
399
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
After selecting the nodes attached to the crossed members, right-click and then select
"Remove Crossed Member Nodes" from the menu that appears.
400
Graphical Input
Note that intermediate nodes can only be removed from members that are straight. For
members that aren't straight you can simply use the Move tool to move an intermediate node
onto its neighbour to remove it.
401
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Renumber
The Renumber tool allows you to renumber nodes, members or plates at any stage of the
program operation. Items that reference nodes, members or plates such as restraints,
constraints, loads and steel design data are automatically adjusted for the new numbering
sequence.
402
Graphical Input
Note that if a node, member or plate is to be renumbered to a node, member or plate that
already exists, SPACE GASS displays an error message and forces you to change the
renumbering data before renumbering can proceed.
403
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
By pressing the keyboard spacebar, you can repeat the last command. This can be useful in
situations where you need to repeat an operation a number of times.
404
Graphical Input
After selecting the members to be reversed, right-click and select "Reverse Member
Direction" from the menu that appears to display the form as shown below.
Any options that you tick in the form below will be adjusted so that they are not affected by
the reversal, otherwise they will be reversed with the member.
Note that you can see the direction of members using the View member origins tool.
405
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Original Plate
Reversed Plate
After selecting the selected plates, right-click and select "Reverse Plate Direction" from the
menu that appears. If you tick the "Adjust the direction of loads so that they are unaffected by
the reversal" option then any plate loads will be adjusted so that they remain in the same
general direction as before the plates were reversed.
Note that the order of the nodes around a plate are changed after the plate has been reversed.
406
Graphical Input
Rotate
The Rotate tool allows you to select one or more nodes, members or plates and rotate them
about any user defined axis.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be rotated, right-click and select "Rotate"
from the menu that appears. You should then pick the centre of rotation and then fill out the
form that appears below. Note that the sign of the angle of rotation follows the "right hand
screw rule".
Don't forget that when picking points in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line
or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can use the
mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
407
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Scale
You can use this tool to apply a scale factor to selected nodes, members or plates. For
example, you could use it to enlarge your model by 20% or, if you had mistakenly input your
node geometry in millimetre units instead of meters, you could scale the model down by
0.001.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be scaled, right-click and select "Scale" from
the menu that appears. You should then pick a base point about which the scaling occurs,
followed by specifying the scale factor in the form shown below.
Don't forget that when picking points in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line
or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can also align with one of the
three global axes. For more information, see "Aligning, snapping and attachment tools" in
The renderer. Remember also that when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can
simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, see "Using the
keyboard to position points".
The Scale tool only affects the node coordinates. It doesn’t adjust offsets, section
properties, loads or any other parts of your model.
408
Graphical Input
Scales
The Scales tool allows you to change the scales of the model or any of the superimposed
diagrams.
Alternatively, you can click the button in the top toolbar to open the following scales
form.
Alternatively, you can change scales by clicking the toolbar button or selecting "Scale"
from the View menu or the floating menu.
All scales initially default to values that allow the diagrams to fit neatly into the available
graphics display area. If you change any of the scales, they are retained with the job.
409
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The "Displacements factor" and "Buckling mode factor" settings are distortion factors
rather than scales. Increasing their values causes the relevant diagrams to increase in size.
Increasing any of the other "Scale" settings causes the relevant diagrams to be reduced in
size.
410
Graphical Input
Sea Loads
This tool lets you generate wave, ocean current, marine growth and buoyancy loads on
submerged structures in marine and offshore environments where these effects impose
significant loading on the affected structure.
The procedure for load calculation starts with the analysis of the wave by an appropriate
theory to determine the water particle velocities and accelerations at various depths in the
water body. The computed velocities and accelerations are combined with any additional
water current velocities (tidal, density current, storm velocity, etc), marine growth loads and
buoyancy loads for determining the effective loading on individual structural elements. When
combining wave and water currents the Doppler effect of the current on the wave is
automatically taken into account.
Presently, Airy's linear wave theory and Stokes' 5th and 2nd order non-linear wave theories
are incorporated into this tool. Sea loads on the structure comprising drag and inertia loading
on individual structural members are computed using Morison's equation. The formulation
applies strictly to skeletal framed structures with slender tubular members, but can also be
applied to framed structures with non-tubular members applying modified coefficients for
drag and inertia. The tool is not suitable for the computation of sea loads on large bodies such
as vessels, ship-shaped or boxed and/or plate structures where the length to effective diameter
ratio of any individual element is small.
The sea load generator uses the concept of "scenarios", each of which represents the motion
of a wave and generates multiple load cases that correspond with the various positions of the
wave. It is normal for a scenario to represent a full wavelength, however you can reduce it to
part of a wavelength by changing the "Phase increment" and "Steps" variables so that their
product is less than 360 degrees if desired.
1. From within the renderer, select the members that are flooded, click the right mouse button
and then select "Generate Sea Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
Note that all of the submerged members in your model will be loaded, regardless of whether
you select them or not. The members you select will indicate which of them are to be regarded
as "flooded". The unselected (non-flooded) members will be subjected to buoyancy loads if
they are tubular, whereas the selected (flooded) members will not.
2. In the sea load form that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your requirements and
then click the Ok button.
411
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
General Parameters:
The following parameters are general in nature and apply to all the sea load cases.
Water depth
This is the depth of water above the mudline (or seabed).
Mudline level
The mudline level is essentially the seabed level. It is the level relative to the global origin of
the SPACE GASS model and is negative if the mudline is below the SPACE GASS origin
(the normal situation).
412
Graphical Input
It may be prudent to set up your model so that its origin is at the waterline and therefore
Mudline level = - (Water depth). This also means that any "Levels" such as the mudline level,
marine growth levels or ocean current levels would always be negative if below the waterline.
Water density
The normal density of water.
Kinematic viscosity
This varies with the water temperature. The default value is based on a water temperature of
15 deg C.
Surface roughness
The surface roughness affects the drag of the water on the structure. The surface roughness
value you specify is only used on surfaces that have no marine growth. For surfaces that have
marine growth the surface roughness is taken as the marine growth thickness up to a
maximum of 50mm.
Member segments
The number of segments that a distributed load is broken into along a member to simulate the
curved profile of the applied load.
CDM parameters
These are the drag (CD), inertia (CM) and lift coefficients that are used in the sea load
calculations on submerged members. Guidance for selection of these parameters is available
in various code standards including API RP 2A. In the absence of any other information you
could consider using CD=0.65 & CM=1.60 for clean tubular members or CD=1.05 &
CM=1.20 for fouled tubular members. Values of CD and CM for other cross section types
may be obtained from international codes and standards including DnV codes.
The "Smooth" coefficients are used if k/D <= 0.0001, the "Rough" coefficients are used if k/D
>= 0.01 and an interpolation between the "Smooth" and "Rough" coefficients are used if
0.0001 < k/D < 0.0, where k is the surface roughness and D is the largest dimension or
diameter of the member.
413
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
At least two lines of marine growth data are required, with the marine growth only occurring
between the levels and not outside them. If the thickness or density is different in adjacent
levels then they are assumed to vary linearly between the levels. Marine growth levels are
relative to the SPACE GASS origin and are negative if the location is below the origin.
Scenarios
Each scenario represents the motion of a wave and normally covers a full wavelength. If the
"Selection Criterion" is set to "None" then multiple load cases representing the various
positions of the wave are generated for each scenario. If the "Selection Criterion" is set to
"Maximum overturning moment" or "Maximum base shear" then only one load case will be
generated for each scenario. You can specify multiple scenarios, each with its own direction
and load case(s).
414
Graphical Input
Wave height
The wave height is the vertical distance between the wave crest and the trough.
Wave period
The wave period is the time it takes for the wave to travel through one wavelength (ie. the
distance between consecutive wave crests) relative to a stationary point. The sea load output
also reports the "Apparent Period", which is the wave period relative to a point travelling with
the current (if a current exists). A current in the wave direction tends to stretch the wavelength
and increases the apparent period, while an opposing current shortens them. This is the
Doppler effect of the current on the wave.
Steps
This is the number of phase increment steps considered during the analysis. End
phase = Start phase + (Steps x Phase increment). If the “Selection Criterion” is set to
“None” then the number of load cases generated for a scenario is equal to the
number of steps, otherwise there is just one load case per scenario.
415
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Wave theory
Selection of the wave theory for analysis of any wave depends on the wave parameters and
the water depth. A general guidance for selection of the wave theory can be obtained from the
American Petroleum Institute's Recommended Practice API RP 2A. In the absence of other
information the following could be considered as a rough guideline:
if 0.000 <= H/(g.T^2) <= 0.001 and 0.01 <= d/(g.T^2) <= 0.2 then select Airy's linear theory
if 0.001 <= H/(g.T^2) <= 0.02 and 0.005 <= d/(g.T^2) <= 0.2 then select Stokes' 5th Order
non-linear theory
where H = wave height, d = still water depth, T = wave period and g = gravitational
acceleration.
Selection criterion
Sea loading on the structure is evaluated at each position of the wave as it passes through the
structure and, depending on the "Selection criterion" specified in the form, the critical position
is selected as the position of the wave that results in the maximum base shear or the maximum
overturning moment at the mudline. If set to "None" then a load case is generated at each
wave position and no attempt is made to determine the critical one.
Note that the base shear and overturning moment calculations are based on the horizontal
wave and current loads only and exclude any vertical loads from buoyancy, self weight,
marine growth or other applied loads.
Ocean currents
Currents occurring simultaneously with waves significantly influence the total sea loading
and need to be considered in the analysis. Current profiles should be input for each scenario.
They are combined with the wave velocities determined by the wave analysis before
Morison's equation is applied.
At least two lines of ocean current data are required, with the currents only occurring between
the levels and not outside them. If the current is different in adjacent levels then it is assumed
to vary linearly between the levels. Ocean current levels are relative to the SPACE GASS
origin and are negative if the location is below the origin.
The "Blockage Factor" controls how much the current stream in the vicinity of the structure is
reduced from the specified "free stream" value by blockage. In other words, the presence of
the structure causes the incident flow to diverge. Some of the incident flow goes around the
structure rather than through it, and the current speed within the structure is reduced.
Blockage factors ranging from 0.7 to 1.0 are typical, with 1.0 representing no blockage.
416
Graphical Input
Doppler effect
When waves and currents occur together, an "Apparent Period" relative to the current is
determined, accounting for the Doppler effect of the current on the wave. A current in the
wave direction tends to stretch the wavelength and increases the apparent period, while an
opposing current shortens them. The apparent wave period is determined from API RP 2A
Figure 2.3.1-2 if -0.015 <= V/gT <= 0.025, where V is the current component in the wave
direction, g is the acceleration due to gravity and T is the actual wave period relative to a
stationary point. If V/gT is outside of the above mentioned limits then a warning is issued and
the results may not be accurate.
417
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Section properties
Section properties are incorporated into member properties.
418
Graphical Input
Select all
The Select All tool lets you quickly select all visible nodes, members or plates and then
perform an operation on them.
The visible nodes, members or plates are highlighted graphically the same as if you
had selected them by picking them with the mouse.
Note that any nodes, members or plates outside the graphics window or those that are
suppressed due to being filtered out are not selected.
2. You can then click on a toolbar button or click the right mouse button and choose
from the floating menu that appears to perform an operation on the selected items.
You can cancel the highlighting by pressing the keyboard ESC key or by selecting
"Cancel" from the floating menu.
419
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Selection methods
You can select nodes, members or plates directly by clicking them with the left mouse button
or you can use a selection window. If the second corner of the selection is to the right of the
first then it is a "Normal" selection window in which only the nodes, members or plates that
fall completely within the window are selected. Alternatively, if the second corner is to the
left of the first then it is a "Crossing" selection window in which any nodes, members or
plates that are within the window or which cross the boundary of the window are selected. A
normal selection window is drawn as a rectangular box, whereas a crossing window is shown
as a filled rectangle. The two types of selection window are shown below.
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you simply select them again, either by
clicking directly or by using a selection window.
420
Graphical Input
Note that you can select all nodes, members or plates by holding down Ctrl and pressing the
A key.
421
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Self weight
Self weight or self mass can be input into any load cases by simply specifying the acceleration
due to gravity in any of the three global axis directions.
You can open the self weight datasheet by clicking the toolbar button or selecting "Self
Weight" from the Loads menu and then entering data into the datasheet as explained in Self
weight data.
422
Graphical Input
Snap
The snap tool causes the cursor to move in discrete steps and allows you to accurately
position points on an imaginary snap grid.
For more information about the attachment, alignment, grid and working plane tools in the
renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Grid and Plane.
It allows you to accurately position the graphics cursor. The SNAP facility can be set to any
desired increment which may or may not match the GRID setting (as desired). The SNAP
increment uses the same system of units as the structure being displayed.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Snap" toolbar button or re-selecting the
"Snap" menu item.
The current SNAP setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated above).
423
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For convenience, SNAP is automatically turned off temporarily during some graphics
operations such as when you are simply picking members. This avoids the problem of not
easily being able to pick objects due to the SNAP stepping effect.
When SNAP is turned off, you may notice that the graphics cursor moves in very small
increments which are not useful fractions of whole numbers. These increments actually
represent the distance between pixels on the screen. When you position the cursor on a known
point, the coordinates display sometimes indicates that the cursor is not exactly on the point.
This is because there is no pixel exactly on the point and the cursor has therefore moved to
the closest pixel. SPACE GASS, however ignores the small movement to the closest pixel and
assumes that the cursor is located exactly on the desired point. When SNAP is turned on this
does not occur.
424
Graphical Input
Spectral loads
Spectral loads must be defined for each load case that you wish to include in a dynamic
spectral response analysis.
You can open the spectral loads datasheet by selecting "Spectral Load Data" from the Loads
menu and then entering data into the datasheet as explained in Spectral load data.
Note that spectral curves can be created, imported or exported via the spectral curve editor.
For more information, refer to Spectral curve editor.
425
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can convert a number of static load cases at once by entering them as a list in the "Static
load case list" field. You must also enter a corresponding list of mass load cases in the "Mass
case list" field. They can have the same load case numbers as the static loads, however for
your own organizational purposes it is usually a good idea to keep them separate.
It is usual to have the "Create mass in all three directions regardless of static load direction"
option ticked, as masses generally have inertia in all three directions. As such, static loads that
have components in more than one direction on a single object are first resolved into the
resultant direction and then converted to a single mass. Alternatively, if the "Create mass in
all three directions..." option is not ticked then the masses will simply be placed in the same
directions as their source static loads.
If the "Delete masses in destination mass cases first" option is ticked then all masses in the
destination mass cases will be deleted first, otherwise they will be added to.
Note that self weight static loads are not converted with this tool because self mass can be
generated automatically in the dynamic analysis. Note also that moments and torsions are not
converted to rotational masses.
426
Graphical Input
Stretch
The Stretch tool lets you stretch all or part of your model.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be stretched, right-click and select "Stretch"
from the menu that appears. You should then pick an anchor point, plus two points that
represent the ends of a vector through which the items are to be stretched.
Each selected item is then moved parallel to the stretch vector by an amount that is
proportional to its distance from the anchor point. The distance by which a point is moved
parallel to the stretch vector is given by:
where D is the distance moved, Lv is the length of the stretch vector, Dn is the distance from
the node to the anchor point in the direction of the stretch vector, and Dv is the distance from
the start of the stretch vector to the anchor point in the direction of the stretch vector.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or members, or
you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an orthogonal line or an
extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can also align with one of the three
global axes. For more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember
also that when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of
the desired point(s). For more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".
427
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Subdivide
The Subdivide tool allows you to select one or more members and subdivide them by
inserting intermediate nodes at regular or irregular positions along them.
After selecting the members to be subdivided, right-click and select "Subdivide" from the
menu that appears. You should then specify the number of subdivisions and their spacing in
the form shown below.
If the node insertion points are irregular, you can nominate "Insertion points" to be expressed
as inclined distances, or as projected distances along one of the global axis directions.
Naturally, you cannot nominate projected distances along a global axis which is at right
angles to the axis of the member being subdivided.
Insertion points are referenced from the node A end or Node B of the members. They can be
expressed as actual distances or as percentages. For example, to subdivide a 10m beam into
2m, 3m, and 5m beams, you could type 2,5, or 2,50%, or 20%,50% into the "Insertion
points" field. In all three cases, the final result is the same.
If you are using percentages for all of the insertion points, then the inclined or projected axis
specification is irrelevant.
428
Graphical Input
Taper plates
For retaining structures such as tanks or retaining walls, a varying wall thickness can be
generated using this tool.
The tool works by you defining the thickness at the start and finish of the taper and a "taper
axis" along which the taper is defined. The taper is then projected normal to the axis onto each
plate that you have selected. The thickness of each plate is then set according to its projected
distance along the taper axis. Note that after applying a taper, each plate still has a uniform
thickness but the thickness varies from one plate to the next.
The lateral position of each plate relative to the taper axis is not important. For example, a
plate a long way from the axis will get the same thickness as a plate close to it. Similarly, a
plate on one side of the axis will get the same thickness as a plate on the other side.
Plates that are beyond the ends of the taper axis are given the thickness at the closest end of
the axis. For example, if you have a tank that is 4m high and the taper axis extends from the
base of the tank (with a starting thickness of 300mm) vertically up to the 3m mark (with a
finishing thickness of 100mm), the plates in the top 1m of the tank walls would be given the
100mm thickness.
OR
Select "Taper Plates" from the Structure menu, select the plates you wish to taper,
click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. Pick two points that represent the axis along which the taper will be defined.
Remember that when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in
the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, see "Using the
keyboard to position points".
3. In the form that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your requirements and
then click the Ok button.
When applying the thickness to each plate, you can specify whether the new thickness
is applied to the front face, back face or both faces. This is achieved by applying an
429
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
offset to each plate so that you can effectively align the adjusted plates by their front
face, back face or centerline.
If you applying a taper to plates that have already been tapered then you should
generally untick the "Keep plate offsets" option so that the offsets are not doubled up.
4. The thicknesses are then calculated and applied to the selected plates.
430
Graphical Input
Taper/haunch generation
The Taper/Haunch generation tool lets you model tapered members with or without haunches.
A member can be tapered by varying its depth, width or both depth and width. If the depth is
varied, the taper can be applied to the top of the member, the bottom of the member, or evenly
to both the top and bottom. If the width is varied, the taper is applied evenly to both sides of
the member. If a haunch is selected, its depth is varied and is applied to the bottom of the
haunch only.
SPACE GASS uses a series of prismatic member segments to approximate the exact taper.
You can use up to 50 segments per taper, however usually 3 segments is enough to get very
close to the exact solution. The cross section dimensions for each prismatic member can be
set equal to the taper’s largest end dimensions, smallest end dimensions or average
dimensions for the segment under consideration.
After selecting the members to be tapered or haunched, right-click and select "Generate
Taper/Haunch" from the menu that appears. If you have selected more than one member then
they must be a continuous run of members with no gaps in-between. Each selected member
will become a segment of the total taper or haunch. Alternatively, if you have selected just
one member then it will be subdivided as part of the taper/haunch process.
The member that you select first determines the start of the taper/haunch. If there was only
one member then the node A end will be the start of the taper/haunch. If you selected the
members using a selection window or if you selected an intermediate member first, the start
of the taper/haunch will be at the end with the lowest numbered member.
431
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Note that whenever a taper or haunch is generated, member offsets are also calculated and
applied to the tapered/haunched members. The offsets take into account the changed centroid
location in the built-up sections and ensure that the tapered/haunched members are correctly
positioned relative to each other.
If you applying a taper or haunch to members that have already been tapered or haunched
then you should generally untick the "Keep member offsets" option so that the offsets are not
doubled up.
432
Graphical Input
Textures
Textures can be applied to members and plates depending on their material. For example, if
the material name starts with "Steel" then the steel texture is used, or if it starts with "Conc"
then the concrete texture is used. Textures are also available for aluminium, timber and
brickwork. They can then be turned on or off via the button in the bottom of the side
toolbar.
Textures off
433
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Textures on
434
Graphical Input
Thermal loads
This tool allows you to graphically apply thermal loads to members or plates.
OR
Select "Thermal Loads - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the members or
plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you would
probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load cases in the
datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may also wish to leave the
load cases list field blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want
to restrict the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each selected member
or plate individually (ie. one line of data for each member or plate) or applied as a
group to all the selected members or plates (ie. one line of data for all the members or
plates). The advantage of the "group" selection is that you only have to input one line
of data in the datasheet to have it applied to all the selected members or plates. This
can be particularly useful if you are applying the same load to a number of members
or plates. If you are inputting a different load on each member or plate then you
should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can also be useful if
you are simply trying to see what loads are already applied to the members or plates
you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member or plate individually
then you can also choose between showing all the selected members or plates, or just
the ones that are loaded. If you are inputting new loads then you would probably
choose to show all the selected members or plates, whereas if you are editing existing
loads or just viewing loads then showing just the loaded members or plates may be
preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit or delete
loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The operation of the
datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see also Datasheets).
435
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
436
Graphical Input
Transparency
When in rendered mode, the appearance of members, plates, diagrams and filtered out items
can be adjusted to be fully or partially transparent by clicking the in the bottom of the
side toolbar.
The transparency can then be adjusted by sliding the transparency controls followed by
clicking anywhere in the graphics area of the renderer.
The following before and after images show how members and plates can be made to look
transparent.
437
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
438
Graphical Input
The tool works by you defining the pressure variation and a "load axis" along which the
pressure distribution is defined. The pressure is then projected normal to the load axis onto
each plate that you have selected.
The lateral position of each plate relative to the load axis is not important. For example, a
plate a long way from the load axis will get the same pressure as a plate close to it. Similarly,
a plate on one side of the load axis will get the same pressure as a plate on the other side.
For calculating the pressure on the walls of tanks or retaining structures, the load axis would
normally be vertical and the pressure on a plate with its centre at height h would be the same
as the pressure on the load axis at height h.
For other structures, such as a distribution of wind loads applied to a roof, it might be more
convenient to have the load axis horizontal or maybe even parallel to the roof slope.
Plates that are beyond the ends of the load axis are not loaded. For example, if you have a
tank that is 4m high and the load axis extends from the base of the tank vertically up to the 3m
mark, the plates in the top 1m of the tank walls will not be loaded.
439
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If the pressure variation is defined by an equation, the equation must have "x" as the variable
representing the distance along the load axis and can include any of the operators "+", "-",
"*", "/", "\”, "%" and "^". It can also include any of the functions sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan,
sqrt, factorial, abs, log, ln and exp.
For example, the pressure on the walls of a bulk solids container could be represented by the
equation Pressure = rc(1-e(-z/z0))/, where, for a typical coal container could have values of
=10.8, rc=0.88, z0=4.03 and =0.62.
OR
Select "Varying Plate Pressure Loads" from the Loads menu, select the plates you
wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. Pick two points that represent the load axis along which the pressure variation will be
distributed.
Remember that when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in
the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, see "Using the
440
Graphical Input
3. In the form that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your requirements and
then click the Ok button. The graph at the bottom of the form represents the shape of
the pressure variation along the load axis.
The pressure variation can be linear for cases such as tanks subjected to hydrostatic
loads or, for more complex profiles, can be defined by an equation that you specify as
explained above.
If you specify "Local" axes then the pressure load will be applied in the local z-axis
direction (ie. normal to the plane of the plate). If you specify "Global" axes then you
must also specify a global XYZ vector that represents the direction of the pressure
load.
441
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
4. The pressure loads are then calculated and applied to the selected plates.
442
Graphical Input
After a buckling analysis, you can display the buckling mode shapes by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Buckling Mode Shapes" from the View menu.
You can limit the number of buckling modes shown by defining a filter and specifying a list
of the buckling modes required.
For 2D models, it is a good idea to view the buckling mode shapes from a 3D viewpoint so
that any out-of-plane buckling modes can be observed.
443
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
View diagrams
You can show loading diagrams, displacement diagrams, bending moment diagrams, shear
force diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion diagrams, stress diagrams and reactions by
clicking the , , , , , , or toolbar buttons or selecting from the
matching items in the View menu.
444
Graphical Input
Operation Keystrokes
Display mode shapes 1 to 9 1-9
Display the next mode shape Page down
Display the previous mode shape Page up
Change to load case <case> C <case>
Change the display from animated to static S
Change the display from static to animated A
Increase the amplitude (scale) Right arrow
Decrease the amplitude (scale) Left arrow
Increase the frequency (speed) Up arrow
Decrease the frequency (speed) Down arrow
You can exit from the dynamic mode shapes commands by pressing ESC or the right mouse
button. This also causes any animation to stop and revert back to a static display.
If you use REDRAW or any other tool which causes the graphics display area to be
regenerated while a dynamic mode shape is displayed, it will revert back to an animated
display, and the dynamic mode shapes commands will again become active.
Some examples of mode shapes for a plane grid from the dynamic frequency analysis module
are shown following.
445
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
View envelope
You can display an envelope of any currently displayed diagrams by clicking the toolbar
button or selecting "Envelope" from the View menu.
You can specify (a) just minimums, (b) just maximums, (c) both minimums and maximums or
(d) absolute maximums.
The load cases included in the envelope are the ones currently selected and displayed in the
load case selection combo box in the top toolbar. If you change the load case selection then
the envelope will be updated accordingly.
Envelopes of analysis results can also be obtained in output reports, including envelopes that
take their maximums and minimums from end A, end B or both ends of a member. For more
information, refer to Output
446
Graphical Input
You can show the global origin by clicking the (renderer) or (traditional graphics
window) toolbar button or selecting "Global Origin" from the View menu.
447
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Clicking the "More options..." item takes you to the following form from where you can
change colors, formatting, etc.
448
Graphical Input
449
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
450
Graphical Input
Note that many of the load case input fields have a button next to them. Clicking this
button also lets you see which load cases exist in your job, plus you can select from the
displayed list.
451
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Load case titles can be input via the load case titles datasheet from within the traditional
graphics window. For more information refer to Load case titles.
You can also input/edit load case titles via the combination load cases grid in the renderer by
right-clicking a column heading or a cell in the first column.
452
Graphical Input
You can show the member and plate local axes by clicking the toolbar button or selecting
"Local Axes" from the View menu.
453
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
View manager
In the renderer you can save the current view for later recall by clicking the button in the
top toolbar or by right-clicking anywhere in the graphics area and then selecting "Save View"
from the menu that appears. The view is saved as soon as you enter a name and click Ok in
the form shown below.
The view manager (located in a panel on the right side of the renderer) lists all of the saved
views. You can recall a view by simply clicking on it in the View Manager panel.
Note that the View Manager panel can be pinned open by clicking the button at the top of the
panel so that it changes to . If you click it again, it changes to , indicating that the
panel is not pinned and will slide closed as soon as you move away from it. Note also that you
can drag the View Manager panel away from the side of the renderer and dock it to another
location or you can just place it anywhere on your screen.
454
Graphical Input
Note that you can reverse the direction of members using the Reverse member direction tool.
455
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
456
Graphical Input
You can show or hide nodes, members or plates by clicking the , or toolbar
buttons or selecting "Nodes", "Members" or "Plates" from the View menu.
If the nodes, members or plates are hidden then any tools that require nodes, members or
plates to be selected are suppressed. For example, if the nodes are hidden then node loads
cannot be input or edited graphically.
457
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The following form allows you to select the type of contour diagram you wish to display as
well as specifying its smoothing, color and labelling settings.
If contour smoothing is turned on then the contours appear as continuous color gradients
rather than a discrete color for each plate element.
Contour diagrams are generated from the force, moment and stress values at each node. The
value at a given node can be determined by simply averaging the values from each element
that connects to it (non-weighted averaging) or the contribution from each element can be
weighted depending on how far the centre of the element is from the node (weighted
averaging).
For full details of the force, moment and stress contours that can be displayed, refer to "Sign
conventions".
The colors in a contour diagram can be changed by double-clicking any of the three color
icons and then selecting the desired color, or by clicking the "Color Picker" button.
If you wish to display the full range of contour values, ensure that the "Full range" option is
ticked. If not, you can "zoom in" on a particular range of contour values by unticking the
"Full range" option and specifying upper and lower limits. Values that fall within the upper
and lower limits will be colored depending on where they fall within the specified color
458
Graphical Input
spectrum, and any values that fall outside the limits will be given the same color as values that
fall on the upper and lower limits.
If you find that the contour diagram is predominantly showing the "middle" color, you may be
able to display more color detail by setting a narrower contour range.
459
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
460
Graphical Input
You can switch into steel member viewing mode by clicking the button in the side
toolbar.
to this:
The steel members are shown slightly shorter than their actual length so that you can easily
see where they start and finish.
When in steel member viewing mode the steel group numbers can be displayed instead of the
analysis member numbers as shown in the second diagram above. The numbers can be turned
on via the "Show steel member numbers" item in the button in the side toolbar.
You can also hover over any steel member while in steel member viewing mode to display its
steel input data in an information panel as shown below. If the information panel doesn't
appear then you should turn it on via the "Show Infotips" button at the bottom of the
side toolbar.
461
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
To view or edit the properties of a steel member you can simply click the right mouse button
on any part of a steel member and then select "View/Edit Steel Member (Form)" from the
popup menu that appears. Note that this can be done regardless of whether you are in steel
member viewing mode or not.
You cannot select individual analysis members while you are in steel member viewing
mode.
462
Graphical Input
You can view the design results by clicking the button in the side toolbar.
You can also change the pass/fail colors and threshold values by clicking the arrow on the
right of the button.
463
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
To view brief design result details of a steel member design group (see below) you can simply
click the right mouse button on any part of a design group and then select "Steel Member
Design Results" from the floating menu. You can then simply click on other members to view
their results. Note that this can be done regardless of whether the design results are displayed
or not.
You can also use filters to restrict the display of members based on their design results.
464
Graphical Input
465
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can show the flange restraints by clicking the button in the side toolbar.
Displays all of the flange restraints that you have specified for each design group. The flange
restraints are shown adjacent to their location on the top and bottom flanges.
466
Graphical Input
You can show the top flanges by clicking the button in the side toolbar.
The top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the same as the top flange for the first
analysis member in the design group. Therefore, to find the top flange of a design group you
must look at just the first member in the group.
467
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Viewpoint
This tool allows you to rotate your viewpoint around the structure. You can obtain an
elevation from any side, a plan view or a view from any other position. In the renderer you
can also switch between orthographic and perspective viewing modes.
Rotate the viewpoint by holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse. An
alternative to rotating the model by dragging it around directly is to drag the view selector
around. You can also click one of the view selector faces, edges or corners to go straight to a
specific viewpoint. If you click on the small square attached to the front face it will take you
to the 30,10 viewpoint.
Alternatively, you can rotate your viewpoint by clicking the toolbar button or selecting
"Viewpoint" from the View menu or the floating menu.
The current viewpoint setting is displayed near the top-right corner of the graphics display
area together with a small set of axes. You can watch the axes move as you change the
viewpoint or, by activating real-time structure rotation, you can also watch the entire structure
rotating as you change the viewpoint.
468
Graphical Input
2. Choosing "Viewpoint-View real-time" from the View menu or the floating menu
allows you to rotate the entire structure on the screen using the keyboard arrow keys.
After reaching the desired viewpoint, pick a point anywhere inside the graphics
display area to cause a redraw at the new viewpoint.
3. Choosing one of the "View front/View plan/View (30,10)/etc." items after clicking
the "Viewpoint" toolbar button or from the "Viewpoint" item of the View menu or the
floating menu causes the structure to be immediately redrawn at the new viewpoint.
The "(30,10)" item corresponds to a horizontal angle of 30 and a vertical angle of
10. It is a useful viewpoint for 3D structures.
4. Choosing "Select" after clicking the "Viewpoint" toolbar button or from the
"Viewpoint" item of the View menu or the floating menu causes the following form
to appear.
You can change the viewpoint by editing the "Horizontal angle" and "Vertical angle"
text boxes directly, or you can click on one of the arrow buttons at the bottom-left
corner of the form. When using the arrow buttons, the amount by which the viewpoint
changes can be controlled by setting the value in the "Angle increment" field.
Alternatively, you can click on one of the seven plane buttons which take you
immediately to a front, plan, left, (30,10), right, back or bottom viewpoint.
SPACE GASS normally assumes that the global Y-axis is vertical when displaying
the structure graphically, however the viewpoint form allows you to change the
vertical axis to one of the other global axes.
469
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The viewpoint settings (including the "Vertical axis" setting) only affect the graphics
display. They don’t affect the local axis definitions, the steel design top flange definitions, or
the analysis and design modules in any way.
470
Graphical Input
Views
This tool lets you save everything about the current graphics display including its load case
selections, filter selection, viewpoint, and any diagrams or node, member or plate properties
that might be shown.
To save the current view, just click the combo box in the above form, select a view number
and then type in the view’s name. You can overwrite previously saved views or you can select
and name an unused view. You can save up to 100 different views.
471
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
To delete, renumber or rename any of the previously saved views, click the desired view in
the datasheet shown above and then delete or edit it as required.
To select and activate a view, click the "Views" toolbar combo box
and make your selection.
Scrolling through the saved views can be most conveniently done using the keyboard
Shift+Ctrl+Page keys as described in Shortcuts.
472
Graphical Input
Zoom
The Zoom tool allows you to zoom in or out on the entire structure or just a part of it.
2. ZOOM window - requires you to place a window around a portion of the structure
which it then enlarges and redraws to fill the screen.
3. ZOOM in/out - requires you to position the graphics cursor at the zoom centre and
then click the left mouse button to ZOOM in or the right mouse button to ZOOM out.
473
Analysis
Analysis
SPACE GASS uses the well documented stiffness method combined with a wavefront
equation solver to model the elastic behaviour of structures. It is capable of performing five
types of analysis, as follows.
The SPACE GASS analysis modules can accurately deal with semi-rigid joints, elastic
supports, master-slave constraints, offsets, tension/compression-only members, and cable
members (static and buckling analysis only).
Although the wavefront method is not highly sensitive to badly numbered structures, a
wavefront optimizer which automatically minimizes the frontwidth is also available with
SPACE GASS. The wavefront optimizer means that both the node, member and plate
numbering sequences are incidental to the program.
SPACE GASS has been dimensioned dynamically. This means that during the analysis phase
SPACE GASS automatically adjusts its memory requirements according to the size of the job.
If the available memory in your computer is enough to solve the structure entirely in memory
then the analysis phase will be extremely fast. If you run out of memory during an analysis
then some of the analysis data will be automatically written to disk and the analysis phase will
not be quite as fast. You should aim to have as much of the data as possible held in memory
during the analysis by minimizing the frontwidth or by increasing the memory capacity of
your computer.
475
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Static analysis
Static analysis
The SPACE GASS static analysis module is capable of performing linear or non-linear
analyses. Furthermore, you can analyse some load cases linearly and others non-linearly in
the same model.
For non-linear analysis, SPACE GASS offers a choice of small, finite or large displacement
theories in its non-linear static analysis solver.
For cable members, SPACE GASS always uses a large displacement theory that has been
designed to cope with the highly non-linear behaviour and large deflections that occur within
cables (see also Cable members). For structures that contain both cables and non-cable
members, it is important to note that while the large local cable deflections are allowed for in
the analysis, the non-cable parts of the structure are still analysed using small displacement
theory.
The plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements only and therefore no P- or P- effects are
considered for them during a non-linear analysis.
Although a SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis includes simple buckling checks on
individual members and on the frame as a whole, a full buckling analysis is usually required
in addition to the static analysis. If the buckling capacity of the frame has been exceeded then
the static analysis results are invalid and should not used!
If the static analysis results are to be used for a steel design to AISC-LRFD, Eurocode
3, AS4100 or NZS3404, the load cases used in the strength design must be analysed non-
linearly unless you know that the second order effects are negligible.
The non-linear static analysis facility available with SPACE GASS considers geometric non-
linearities rather than material non-linearities.
There are many types of geometric non-linearities, some of which can be significant and
many of which are relatively insignificant. The most important geometric non-linearities are:
P- effect
P- effect
Axial shortening effect
Tension/compression-only effect
Catenary cable effect
Some sources refer to the additional effects of shear deformations and rigid end gussets as
being geometric non-linearities also. While SPACE GASS fully considers these additional
effects during the analysis phase, it does not consider them to be non-linearities because they
can be solved directly in one analysis and do not require an iterative procedure.
476
Analysis
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements only, no P- or P- effects are
considered for them during a non-linear analysis.
477
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
During the static analysis phase, there are three basic groups of data that have to be
calculated. They are node displacements, member and plate actions (forces and moments) and
support reactions.
Node displacements
Node displacements are calculated for each load case being analysed and for every
unrestrained degree of freedom in the structure. Each node may translate along or rotate about
any or all of the three global axis directions. Restrained (fixed or deleted) degrees of freedom
are automatically assigned displacements of zero except for those nodes that have prescribed
displacements specified. In such cases those nodes are assigned the prescribed displacement
only for the particular load case in which they were specified.
Member actions
There are twelve forces and moments that can be calculated for each member. Each end of a
member is subjected to an axial force, a torsion, bending moments about its y and z axes and
shear forces along its y and z axes.
The program is also capable of calculating forces and moments at user defined intermediate
points along members. These intermediate values, however are not calculated during the
analysis phase. Instead they are calculated as required when the output report is produced.
Plate actions
Three forces and three moments are calculated for each plate node, making a total of 18
actions per triangular plate and 24 actions per quadrilateral plate. Two axial stresses, three
shear stresses and three bending stresses are also calculated for each plate.
These are later used to calculate the 17 different force, moment and stress values for each
plate that can be shown graphically as colored contours or included in text reports.
Reactions
External node reactions are the forces and moments exerted by the structure on the supports.
They are calculated only for restrained nodes and are referenced by the global axes system.
478
Analysis
P-D effect
The P- effect occurs as a result of the ends of an axially loaded member moving laterally
with respect to each other. A moment of P. is induced which alters the member’s
equilibrium and causes the relative member end movement to change further.
P- effect
Unless the axial load P exceeds the member’s critical buckling load, a point of equilibrium
eventually occurs such that the P- moment is balanced by moments applied by other
members or restraints.
479
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
P-d effect
The P- effect occurs as a result of lateral curvature being induced in an axially loaded
member. A parabolic moment distribution is induced along the length of the member which
alters the member’s effective stiffness and causes the curvature to change further.
P- effect
Unless the axial load P exceeds the member’s critical buckling load, a point of equilibrium
eventually occurs such that the P- moments are balanced by internal flexural resistance built
up within the member.
480
Analysis
While in tension, tension-only members act identically to normal members with axial,
flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into compression then they are
automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed from the model. Similarly,
compression-only members act identically to normal members unless they are disabled as a
result of going into tension.
Unlike the P- and P- effects, tension-only and compression-only effects result in an exact
solution provided that convergence can be achieved.
During the first three iterations SPACE GASS disables tension-only members which have
either end in compression. During iterations four and five it disables tension-only members
which have the average of their end forces in compression. During the sixth and further
iterations it disables tension-only members which have both ends in compression. A similar
procedure is followed for compression-only members which have tensile forces at their ends.
If tension/compression-only effects have been activated with "No reversal" then convergence
is usually achieved after two or three iterations, even for highly symmetrical structures. This
"No reversal" method is not usually recommended, however because it sometimes results in
members being prematurely disabled and then not being able to be re-enabled in later
iterations after the axial forces have been redistributed around the frame.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Tension-only members should not be used to model cables.
481
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Cable members
The analysis of cable members requires special treatment because of their pure axial capacity,
large displacements and highly non-linear behaviour.
Cable members never actually go into compression, they simply sag or change their shape so
that they are in equilibrium at all times. They have no flexural, torsional or shear capacity,
and resist lateral loads by tension alone.
Cable loading
Cable members can be loaded with UDLs, thermal loads, prestress loads and self weight. For
"Local" or "Global projected" UDLs, the total load is equal to the load per unit length
multiplied by the actual (for "Local") or projected (for "Global projected") distance between
the end nodes. For "Global inclined" UDLs, the total load is equal to the load per unit length
multiplied by the unstrained cable length.
Cables must be loaded with at least one uniformly distributed load (self weight will do) in
every load case they are analysed for. If there is no UDL on a cable, SPACE GASS will apply
an artificial lateral UDL equal to one-tenth of the self-weight of the cable. While this adds a
non-existent load to the model, it is not likely to affect the results significantly due to the
small magnitude of the load.
Note that the procedure of converting cables without UDLs to tension-only members in
SPACE GASS 9.03 and earlier versions is no longer done.
Cable convergence
Convergence is often a problem for structures which contain cables because of their large
deflections and highly non-linear behaviour. There are four recognized methods for obtaining
convergence.
All four methods give the same results for the same final convergence. Methods 1 and 2 are
generally the fastest but they don’t achieve convergence in all structures, especially flexible
structures. Methods 3 and 4 are more likely to achieve convergence but sometimes require
more iterations. For methods 3 and 4, the number of iterations required is pre-defined by the
number of relaxation steps or load steps that you specify at the start of the analysis.
For each method, but methods 3 and 4 in particular, it is generally apparent after only a few
iterations whether convergence is going to be achieved or not. If the convergence level is not
steadily creeping upwards or has not reached about 60% or 70% by 5 or 6 iterations then it is
unlikely that convergence will be achieved. If this happens, it is generally best to stop the
analysis and then start it again with a different method, or change the damping, or increase the
number of load steps. For example, using method 4, it is quite feasible that 50 load steps will
converge where 40 load steps will not.
482
Analysis
If you lower the convergence accuracy, the analysis may not converge sufficiently and you
risk getting incorrect results. It is particularly important that you don’t lower the
convergence accuracy for highly non-linear structures such as those that contain cables.
Cable prestress
The prestress load you apply to a cable is not likely to be the final axial force in the cable at
the end of the analysis. This is because the axial force changes as the cable stretches or sags
as its end nodes move. If you wish to achieve a particular axial force at the end of the analysis
then a trial and error process is required. This involves setting an initial prestress force,
performing the analysis, checking the final axial force, adjusting the prestress and repeating
the process until the desired axial force is achieved. This is a common requirement in post-
tensioned concrete applications where the tendons are jacked to a known tension.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If cable members exist in your structure, it is imperative that you specify them as "Cable"
members in your SPACE GASS model. If you try to model them as "Normal" or "Tension-
only" members, the results will be incorrect.
483
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The procedure that SPACE GASS adopts to perform a non-linear static analysis is as follows.
2. For each element in each load case, a modified stiffness matrix is assembled.
For non-cable members, the modified stiffness is based on the deformation of the
structure and the member axial forces calculated in the previous analysis iteration.
The modifications to the stiffness matrix are in accordance with the theory presented
by Ghali and Neville (2) for small displacement theory or the theory presented by
Hancock (24) for finite and large displacement theory. They involve changes to the
axial and flexural stiffness terms, taking into account P- P- and axial shortening
effects (if activated).
For cable members, the modified stiffness is based on the unstrained cable length, the
cable lateral loads and the deflected position of the cable ends calculated in the
previous analysis iteration.
3. If P- effects are turned on with finite or large displacement theory, the non-cable
member fixed end actions are adjusted for the deformation of the structure.
4. If P- effects are turned on, the non-cable member fixed end actions are adjusted for
the change in flexural stiffness of the member.
5. The frame is re-analysed with the modified member stiffness matrices. In this and
later analysis iterations, each load case must be solved separately because the
structure stiffness matrix is now different for each load case. This can take
considerably longer than the initial linear analysis, especially if there are numerous
load cases.
6. The results of the latest analysis are compared with the previous analysis and the level
of convergence is displayed on the screen. If the level of convergence has reached the
requested convergence accuracy then the results have converged and the analysis
terminates. If not, steps 2 and 3 are repeated for the unconverged load cases until a
solution is reached. If some load cases have still not converged after the specified
number of iterations per load step then the program pauses and asks if further
iterations are required. If no further iterations are requested, the analysis terminates
and the results for the converged load cases only are saved.
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements, no P- or P- effects are
considered for them during a non-linear analysis.
484
Analysis
Although a SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis does not perform a full buckling analysis,
it does include some buckling checks as described below. For details of the capabilities of a
full buckling analysis, refer to Buckling analysis.
1. The SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis includes a simple buckling check on individual
members that is intended to alert you if a member is being removed from the model due to its
Euler buckling load being exceeded. However, it is not a full buckling check that considers
groups of members or the structure as a whole.
A common misconception appears to be that if the static analysis passes this simple single
member buckling check then buckling is not a problem. Another misconception is that if the
simple buckling check fails, you can just subdivide the buckled member until the error goes
away and everything will be Ok. Clearly, this doesn't fix the problem, it just transfers the
buckling from a single member mode to a multi-member mode that is no longer detected by
the single member buckling check. The only way to be sure that buckling is not a problem is
to perform a full buckling analysis.
2. The SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis also includes a frame buckling check that simply
alerts you if the structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded. This will allow you to
determine if the static analysis results are reliable or not, and nothing more. It will not
calculate member effective lengths or the buckling load factor, and hence will not be able to
alert you if buckling is close to happening. Consequently, a full buckling analysis will still be
required for most structures.
It is very important to note that the results of a static analysis will be incorrect if the
structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded, and hence one of the key roles of a
buckling analysis is to ratify the static analysis results.
Although most practical structures do not come close to reaching their buckling load, unless
you know that your frame has not reached its buckling load, you should perform a buckling
analysis.
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements, they will not buckle
regardless of the load applied.
485
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The SPACE GASS wavefront optimizer temporarily re-organises the structure during the
analysis phase to achieve close to the smallest possible frontwidth with the fastest possible
analysis time.
The basic philosophy behind the optimizer is quite simple. It alters the order in which
members and plates are loaded into the stiffness array by starting at one end of the structure
and proceeding through it to the other end in one complete pass. Depending on the operating
mode selected, the optimization can follow an irregular path, a straight line path or a circular
path.
The optimizer usually reduces the frontwidth to within 95% of the optimum, however some
structures such as large cubes which do not have a well defined "long dimension" can reduce
its efficiency to almost 60%. Large cubic structures therefore may require careful member
and/or plate numbering if they produce excessively large frontwidths.
If you have already numbered the members and plates to achieve the smallest possible
frontwidth then the optimizer will of course not have much effect. If, however you have
numbered the elements badly, the optimizer will probably have a dramatic effect. The most
noticeable effect will be the smaller analysis time which is partly proportional to the
frontwidth squared.
You can control the direction along which the optimization proceeds by selecting the
optimization mode at the start of the analysis. The various optimization mode settings are
described in the following sections.
Not activated
If the optimizer is not activated, the members and plates are loaded into the stiffness array in
the order that they are numbered. If they have been badly numbered and the structure is large
then excessive analysis times may result.
Auto mode
SPACE GASS trials the "General" and various "Linear" modes and then uses the one that
gives the smallest frontwidth. It doesn't add significant time to the analysis and is the
recommended setting.
General mode
SPACE GASS starts at the lowest numbered member or plate and then loads all of the
elements that are connected directly to it. It then takes each of the connected elements in turn
and loads all of the elements that are connected to them. This process continues until all
elements in the structure have been loaded. This mode results in very efficient frontwidths for
most structures.
Linear mode
This mode instructs the optimizer to proceed through the structure in a straight line direction
parallel to one of the global X, Y or Z axes or along a vector that you specify. After you have
specified linear mode, you must also nominate the axis or vector along which optimization
will proceed. This should generally be in the direction of the long dimension of the structure.
Linear mode is ideally suited to long thin structures which have a well defined long
dimension. The "long dimension" of a structure is not necessarily the dimension with the
greatest length, rather it is defined such that if you make a cut through the structure at right
486
Analysis
angles to the long dimension at its widest point, you will cut through the least number of
elements.
In the truss in the following diagram, the most efficient direction for the optimizer to proceed
is horizontally. This is because a cut at right angles to the horizontal cuts through only four
members.
Horizontal optimization
Vertical optimization
In the 2D multi-storey frame above, the most efficient direction for linear optimization is
vertical even though the frame height is less than the frame width.
Circular mode
This mode instructs the optimizer to proceed through the structure around an arc with the axis
of rotation parallel to one of the global X, Y or Z axes. After you have specified circular
mode, you must also nominate the axis about which optimization will proceed, followed by
the coordinates for the centre of rotation.
Circular mode is ideally suited to curved structures such as the circular frame shown
following. Structures which are not perfectly circular but which have a general shape which is
arranged around a central point can also be optimized very efficiently using circular mode.
The centre of rotation should generally be near the centre of the structure, however this is not
absolutely essential.
487
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Circular optimization
Circular mode can also be used to great advantage with structures that require linear
optimization in two directions.
A three dimensional multi-storey frame for example would probably require its primary
optimization direction to be vertical. As the optimizer reached each floor, however a
secondary horizontal direction would also need to be specified otherwise it would not know in
which direction to go along the floor. Without a secondary direction, the optimizer would
simply have to load the floor elements in the order of their numbering and this could result in
an unnecessarily large frontwidth if the elements were badly numbered.
It is not possible to specify a primary and secondary direction with the optimizer in linear
mode, however it is possible to do this in circular mode by having the centre of rotation a
large distance away from the structure. Using circular mode in this way is very similar to
linear mode except that as the optimizer progresses across (or up) the structure, the angle of
attack also changes slightly as it moves around the arc.
488
Analysis
Bi-directional optimization
Consider for example the three dimensional multi-storey frame shown above. The primary
optimization direction is vertical and the secondary direction for each floor is to the left. By
using circular mode and positioning the centre of rotation at a large distance away from the
frame as shown in the following diagram, the desired result can be achieved.
489
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
As the optimization line progresses up the structure, it reaches the right hand side of each
floor before the left hand side. Thus, the structure as a whole is optimized from bottom to top
and each floor is optimized from right to left.
Note that this method of optimization is usually the best way to deal with large cubic shaped
structures.
490
Analysis
Conventional structural analysis programs utilizing the stiffness method generally use a
bandwidth equation solver which requires that nodes be numbered correctly to ensure the
smallest possible bandwidth.
The wavefront method, however requires that the members and plates be numbered correctly
to ensure the smallest possible frontwidth. The optimum wavefront numbering sequence,
however is quite logical and is not sensitive to adding more nodes, members and plates at a
later stage which are out of sequence. This can be quite a problem with the bandwidth
method.
For most structures, the element numbering sequence doesn’t matter because the frontwidth
capacity of SPACE GASS is quite large. Large structures, however can be made to analyse
faster by optimizing the frontwidth. The displacements calculation time is roughly
proportional to the square of the frontwidth.
A wavefront optimizer is available with SPACE GASS which internally re-orders the stiffness
matrix and which generally reduces the frontwidth to within 95% of the optimum. The
optimizer adds only a few seconds to the analysis time and gives you the freedom of not
having to concern yourself with element numbering sequences even for the largest structures.
For those of you who are interested in the wavefront solution method, the following sections
should give you an insight into the inner workings of the SPACE GASS analysis module.
491
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
In order to minimize the frontwidth, members and plates should be numbered from side to
side across the structure’s shortest dimension while gradually proceeding up the length of the
structure. The numbering should proceed up the entire length of the structure in one pass. A
tall multistorey building for example would have the ground floor columns numbered first,
followed by first floor beams, first floor columns, second floor beams, second floor columns
etc., right up to the top.
1. This procedure assumes that the element numbering sequence proceeds generally from one
end of the structure to the other in a single pass as described in the paragraph above.
2. Make an imaginary cut through the structure at its widest point and at right angles to the
general direction of element numbering. For example, the multistorey frame described above
would have a horizontal cut at any one of its levels.
3. On one side of the cut only, count the number of nodes that are connected to elements that
have been cut.
4. Add 1 to the number of nodes in step 3 above and multiply by the degrees of freedom (DOF)
per node. For 3D frames this will generally be 6 DOF per node.
5. Subtract the number of restrained DOF (ie. the restraints applied to the nodes counted in step
3).
It is generally not necessary for you to know any more about the wavefront method than has
been described above, however for those of you wishing to know more, a detailed explanation
of the wavefront analysis method follows.
492
Analysis
Both the bandwidth and wavefront methods are primarily concerned with the assemblage and
solution of a very large structure stiffness array. This array equates node displacements to
externally applied loads as follows.
[P] and [K] are fully defined while [D] is the unknown.
The wavefront method is different to the bandwidth method in that the structure stiffness
array is assembled in order of element numbering rather than node numbering, and a much
smaller portion of the array is required in memory at any one time.
In the wavefront method, the program loads each element into the stiffness array in order of
the element numbering sequence. The nodes associated with each element have stiffness
equations that occupy certain rows and columns in the array.
This loading process continues until one or more nodes have been fully assembled. A node is
said to be fully assembled when all elements connected to it have been loaded into the array.
At this point the equations associated with that node can be solved and removed, thus leaving
space in the array for other nodes.
Further elements are then loaded and their nodes take the place of nodes that have previously
been solved and removed. More node equations are eliminated and the whole process
continues until the entire structure has been fed in and the stiffness array emptied. The
frontwidth is equal to the largest number of node equations that occupied the stiffness array at
one time.
493
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can run a static analysis by selecting "Linear Static Analysis" or "Non-linear Static
Analysis" from the Analysis menu or you can change from linear to non-linear or vice-versa
using the Type analysis parameter in the form shown below.
For the fastest analysis time you should generally analyse only the load cases that can occur in
reality. For example, there is no point in analysing a live load case on its own because it can't
occur in real life without being combined with dead load. This means that you should
generally analyse just the combination load cases and not the primary load cases that the
combinations are made from.
It is sometimes also possible to achieve time savings by analysing non-linearly only those
load cases that cause 2nd order effects, and analysing all of the other load cases linearly. This
would have to be done in two runs, however because a non-linear analysis can take
considerably longer than a linear analysis (especially if there are a large number of load
cases), it is often worthwhile.
Further time savings can be made by not analysing linear combination load cases. "Linear
combination load cases" are combinations that have all of their primary load cases analysed
linearly. Results for non-analysed linear combinations are assembled from the primary load
cases at the time a report or graphics output is generated. If a combination load case has one
or more of its primary load cases analysed non-linearly or if the structure contains tension-
only or compression-only members then the combination will have to be analysed in order to
obtain results for it.
When specifying the load case list, you can either list them directly, or you can click the
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as shown below.
494
Analysis
Tension/Comp-only effects
Tension/compression-only effects can be "fully operational", "operational with no reversal" or
"fully de-activated".
"Fully operational" means that tension-only or compression-only members which have been
disabled during the analysis are able to be re-enabled if their axial force is reversed.
"Operational with no reversal" means that once they have been disabled they cannot be re-
enabled even if their axial force has reversed. No reversal is useful if the fully operational
analysis will not converge, however you should check the results and, if required, manually
disable some tens/comp-only members and then re-analyse.
No reversal normally applies from the first iteration onwards, however you also have the
option of activating it after a specified number of iterations. This means that the analysis will
initially proceed with tension/compression-only effects fully activated and, if convergence
hasn’t been achieved after a specified number iterations, it will change to "no reversal" mode.
"Fully de-activated" means that they are treated as normal members, able to take tension and
compression.
where Ratio depends on the damping relaxation and Damping is the cable damping factor.
495
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Setting the damping relaxation steps to zero causes the damping to be relaxed in direct
proportion to the change in deflection between the current and previous iterations. As
convergence approaches 100%, the change in deflections approaches zero and hence the
damping approaches zero.
Alternatively, setting the damping relaxation steps to a finite value causes the damping to be
relaxed in uniform steps down to zero. If this method is used, the analysis keeps iterating until
the damping is fully relaxed, regardless of whether convergence has been achieved earlier or
not.
The analysis will finish if the convergence accuracy is satisfied, even if the number of
iterations per load step hasn’t been completed.
If you lower the convergence accuracy, the analysis may not converge sufficiently and you
risk getting incorrect results. It is particularly important that you don’t lower the
convergence accuracy for highly non-linear structures such as those that contain cables.
496
Analysis
displayed whenever a member fails the simple buckling check. For more information, refer to
Static analysis buckling.
For example, if a node was connected to a number of members, all of which were pin-ended,
a rotational instability would normally result due to the unrestrained rotation of the node.
However, the stabilize option would apply a temporary rotational restraint to the node during
the analysis, preventing an instability.
Although this solves many instabilities, it doesn’t fix them all, and the prevention of non-
trivial instabilities is still dependent on good modelling practice.
Type
Even though you have already chosen "Linear" or "Non-linear" from the Analysis menu, this
pair of radio buttons allows you to change your mind without having to exit the form. A linear
analysis generally involves only one iteration and does not adjust the stiffness of the structure
based on its deformation. It is suitable for simple beams or fully braced frames, but not for
sway frames or flexible structures in which non-linear effects are significant. A non-linear
analysis involves an iterative procedure that updates the stiffness of the structure after each
iteration and gives more realistic results than a linear analysis.
Solver
The "Paradise" solver is a new parallel multi-core sparse solver that fully utilizes the multiple
cores in a modern computer's CPU. All of the available cores are run in parallel to get the
maximum possible analysis speed. It also takes full advantage of the sparseness of the
structural matrix during the solution to minimize memory requirements and further increase
the speed. The Paradise solver is the recommended setting for all static analyses.
497
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The "Wavefront" solver also takes into account the sparseness of the matrix but doesn't run in
multi-core mode. It is generally slower than the Paradise solver and can be used if the
Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution.
The "Watcom" solver is the one used in pre-SPACE GASS 12 versions. It is considerably
slower than the Paradise and Wavefront solvers and is therefore of limited use.
Theory
Small displacement theory (based on Ghali and Neville (2)) is the default setting and is
suitable for most structures in which the members aren't subjected to significant chord
rotations (changes in direction of members). Small displacement theory results are output in
the undeformed axes system. The finite and large displacement theories (based on Hancock
(24)) take member chord rotations into account and base their equilibrium equations on the
deformed geometry. Finite and large displacement theory results are output in the deformed
axes system.
Large displacement theory uses more exact methods than finite theory when adjusting the
stiffness matrix to allow for the deformation of the structure, however for many structures
they yield very similar results.
Note that although the finite and large displacement theories can handle larger
displacements, it is often harder to achieve convergence with them than with small
displacement theory, especially when large displacements occur.
Matrix
The main stiffness matrix can be a secant matrix (relating the full loads to the total
displacements) or a tangent matrix (relating the residual loads to incremental displacements).
A tangent matrix generally reaches convergence in a smaller number of iterations than a
secant matrix and is more suited to large displacements, however this is not always the case.
They both yield similar results. Note that small displacement theory always uses a secant
matrix.
Residual loads are the imbalance between the applied loads and the internal frame forces at
each node. Incremental displacements are the difference in displacements between the current
and the previous iteration. The residual loads and the incremental displacements both
approach zero as the solution approaches convergence.
Note that if you use a secant matrix with finite or large displacement theory and full loading,
the stiffness matrix is non-symmetrical. This means that during the analysis, the stiffness
matrix uses up twice as much memory as it otherwise would and so it should be avoided if
your model is large.
Loading
For a secant matrix, you can choose between full or residual loading (see above), whereas the
tangent matrix always uses residual loading. They both yield similar results, but if
convergence is a problem then it may be worth experimenting with this setting.
Convergence
Convergence can be based on deflections or residuals or both and is achieved when they
approach zero. It is recommended to have them both selected.
498
Analysis
Optimization method
The wavefront optimizer can be de-activated or it can be operated in one of four modes as
follows.
1. No optimization
2. Auto mode - SPACE GASS trials the "General" and various "Linear" modes and then
uses the one that gives the smallest frontwidth. It doesn't add significant time to the
analysis and is the recommended setting.
3. General mode - SPACE GASS determines the path along which optimization
proceeds through the structure.
4. Linear mode - You select from the X, Y or Z axes or a vector along which
optimization proceeds in a straight line through the structure.
5. Circular mode - You select either of the X, Y or Z axes about which optimization
proceeds around an arc through the structure.
Optimization axis
If you have selected "Linear" or "Circular" for the wavefront optimization mode then you
must select the axis or vector along or about which optimization will proceed.
When all of the information has been entered, the static analysis module calculates the
displacements, forces, moments and reactions for each load case and then saves them ready
for graphical or text report output.
499
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If you want to terminate the analysis before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button. If you terminate the analysis in this way, the results for any load cases which have
already converged are saved. This applies to non-linear analyses and to linear analyses with
tension-only or compression-only members.
500
Analysis
At the end of the static analysis, a message stating whether the analysis was successful or not
is displayed together with a number of possible warnings and errors.
Refer to "Static analysis buckling" for details of what to do if a frame buckling message is
displayed.
You can also query individual nodes, members or plates graphically to find their
displacements, forces and moments as described in "Query analysis results".
For full details of the forces, moments and stresses in members and plates, refer to
"Sign conventions".
Bill of materials
A bill of materials report showing quantities, lengths and masses of each type of component
in the structure can be included in a report. It bundles members of the same type and length
together and shows their individual and total lengths and masses. It also shows the total
structure mass and centre of gravity location.
Centre of gravity
The SPACE GASS bill of materials report includes the coordinates of the structure centre of
gravity.
501
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Buckling analysis
Buckling analysis
The SPACE GASS buckling analysis module performs a rational elastic buckling analysis of
a frame to determine its buckling load factors, buckling mode shapes and member effective
lengths.
The buckling load factor is the factor by which the loads need to be increased to reach the
buckling load. A load factor less than 1.0 means that the working loads exceed the structure’s
buckling capacity.
For information about displaying buckling mode shapes and finding out where buckling is
occurring, refer to "Buckling analysis results".
The buckling modes considered in the buckling analysis involve flexural instability due to
axial compression in the members (also known Euler buckling) and should not be confused
with flexural-torsional buckling (torsional instability due to bending moments) or axial-
torsional buckling (torsional instability due to axial loads).
An accurate buckling analysis such as the one available in SPACE GASS looks at the
interaction of every member in the structure and detects buckling modes that involve one
member, groups of members, or the structure as a whole.
1. Determines if the loads exceed the structure's buckling capacity and by how much.
2. Calculates the member effective lengths for use in the member design.
Points 1 and 3 above highlight the fact that a buckling analysis must always be performed
unless you are certain that the structure's buckling capacity exceeds the applied loads by a
suitable factor of safety.
Important points
1. The results of a static analysis will be incorrect if the structure's buckling capacity has
been exceeded (see point 3 above), and hence one of the key roles of a buckling
analysis is to ratify the static analysis results.
2. If you get buckling load factors that are below the minimum allowable value (eg.
shown as "<0.001" when the minimum allowable value is 0.001), this could indicate
an instability problem rather than a buckling problem. It is even more likely to be an
instability problem if the low buckling load factors occur in every load case.
3. If the model contains instabilities, the buckling analysis may, in some cases, give
invalid results. In the absence of instability or buckling messages from the static
analysis, you should always check the deflections to see if they are excessive or not.
Excessive deflections are sometimes the only indicator of instabilities.
4. Spectral load cases are not included in a buckling analysis. Furthermore, if you
perform a buckling analysis on a combination load case that contains spectral load
502
Analysis
cases, only the non-spectral load cases in that combination will be considered. This
means that if you transfer member compression effective lengths from a buckling
analysis into a steel member design, any spectral load cases considered in the design
will not be involved in the calculation of the effective lengths.
5. Because plate elements are linear elements only, they will not fail during a buckling
analysis regardless of the magnitude of the applied load. This means that their
capacity and restraining effect on other members may be overestimated during a
buckling analysis.
Once the buckling load factors have been determined, a simple formula is used to calculate
the member effective lengths as described in the next section. The effective lengths can then
be automatically transferred into the steel member design modules.
The method that SPACE GASS uses to calculate the buckling factors (eigenvalues) and
corresponding mode shapes (eigenvectors) is based on the theory developed by Wittrick and
Williams (12).
Note that the magnitudes of the effective lengths or the effective length factors (k factors)
from a buckling analysis cannot be used to determine if buckling is a problem or not. This
can only be determined by looking at the buckling load factor.
Refer to "Static analysis buckling" for details of some simple buckling checks that are
included in non-linear static analyses.
Refer to "Special buckling considerations" for details of items to be aware of when preparing
your model for a buckling analysis.
Refer to "Buckling analysis results" for details and interpretation of the results of a buckling
analysis.
503
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The effective length of a compression member is the length of an equivalent pin-ended strut
that has an Euler buckling capacity equal to the axial force Pcr in the member at the point of
frame buckling. It can be determined from:
It is evident from the formula that because the member actual length is not involved in the
calculation, subdividing the member into smaller segments does not change its effective
length. Thus, the effective length of a strut is the same as the effective length of one of its
segments if it has been subdivided.
Effective lengths calculated by the buckling analysis can be automatically transferred into the
steel member design modules. This has the obvious advantage that effective lengths don't
have to be transferred manually, but it also offers design efficiencies in that the effective
lengths will be calculated specifically for each design load case rather than having to use one
set of effective lengths for all load cases.
If you are manually specifying the compression effective lengths in the steel member design
data rather than having them transferred automatically from the buckling analysis, for design
groups that consist of a number of analysis members connected end-to-end, you should use
the MAXIMUM (not the sum!) of its individual analysis member effective lengths.
For example, the buckling collapse of the left-hand column of a portal frame due to a heavy
load applied to it can control the effective length of the right-hand column which has no such
load applied. Consequently, each column would have a different effective length.
It would be ideal if the buckling analysis could increase the BLF beyond the first buckling
mode so that the effective length for each member could be based on a buckling mode that
involved that member. Unfortunately, this is not often possible because once the frame has
reached its first buckling mode, it has generally collapsed and cannot resist any increase in
load.
However, if the first buckling mode involves only minor members such as bracing or similar,
rather than a collapse of the frame, it may be possible to continue the buckling analysis to a
higher order buckling mode in order to get more realistic effective lengths.
You can see from the above discussion that members which are lightly loaded at the point of
frame buckling will get a long effective length because of their small Pcr (see the equation
above). In some cases, this may result in conservative designs, however there are a few
factors that can help as follows:
1. Members that have long effective lengths are generally lightly loaded axially, and these two
effects tend to cancel each other out during the design phase.
504
Analysis
2. For codes such as AS4100 that don't require it, turn off the slenderness ratio check at the start
of the design phase. This is often very effective because, in the slenderness ratio check, a long
effective length does not benefit from being cancelled out by a small axial force.
3. For sway members, you can limit the effective lengths to a multiple of the actual member
length by entering a factor into the "compression effective length ratio limit" field at the start
of the design phase. In fact, effective lengths charts in most design codes limit the effective
lengths for sway members to not more than 5.0 times the actual member length.
4. For braced members, you can simply specify them as "braced" in the steel member design data
for the direction(s) in which they are braced. This will limit the effective lengths from the
buckling analysis to the actual member length.
505
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Although a buckling analysis requires no more input data than a standard static analysis, there
are a number of items to be aware of when preparing a model for a buckling analysis.
Conversely, it is also important that you don’t prevent node movements that can occur in the
real structure. For example, consider a plane frame rafter that is restrained in the out-of-plane
direction at the two ends via an RRFRRR general restraint, but which is able to buckle in the
out-of-plane direction between the ends. If you subsequently add some intermediate nodes to
the rafter, they will also get the general restraint and this will prevent them from translating
out-of-plane, changing the out-of-plane buckling characteristics of the rafter. To avoid this,
you could apply restraints of RRRRRR to the intermediate nodes so that they don’t get the
general restraint.
Note that a static analysis of a plane frame is not as sensitive to out-of-plane restraints as a
buckling analysis because static analysis out-of-plane displacements generally only occur if
out-of-plane loads are applied. This is not true of a buckling analysis which can cause
buckling in any direction, even if there are no loads in that direction.
This is particularly true of tower structures that contain large numbers of slender members
that prevent buckling of the major support members.
For example, consider a portal frame building modelled in 3D with tension-only wall bracing
members that prevent the building from swaying longitudinally. Special treatment is required
for the load cases that contain predominantly gravity loads which would cause all the wall
braces to go into compression and therefore become disabled. In such load cases, the buckling
analysis would yield very low buckling load factors because the wall bracing members would
have been disabled and a longitudinal sway buckling mode at very low load would result. Of
course, in the real structure this could not happen because the wall brace members would
prevent it as soon as the sway mode was initiated.
One solution is to introduce a very small horizontal load into these load cases which is small
enough to have a negligible effect on the static analysis results but large enough to cause the
wall brace members to go into tension. The result is that they are not removed from the
buckling analysis model and are therefore able to prevent the unrealistic longitudinal sway
buckling mode.
506
Analysis
Similar situations can occur in any structures that contain tension-only or compression-only
members.
For example, if a buckling analysis of a working load case for a cable structure yields a
primary buckling load factor of 5.2, you could create a combination load case which factors
up the working loads for the particular load case by 5.0 say, and then re-do the buckling
analysis for the combination load case instead. If the subsequent buckling load factor is 0.90
say, then the final load factor (for the working load case) is 5.0 x 0.90 = 4.50.
Buckling instabilities
Occasionally, you may find that a requested buckling mode can't be calculated and "Unstable"
appears in the buckling output report. This occurs when a node floats free due to local
buckling of all of the members to which the node is connected. Sometimes it is possible to
avoid this problem and calculate higher order buckling modes by adding intermediate nodes
to the members which have buckled.
507
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can run a buckling analysis by selecting "Buckling Analysis" from the Analysis menu.
The input data requirements for a buckling analysis are the same as those for a static analysis.
No extra buckling data is required.
For the fastest analysis time you should generally analyse only the load cases that can occur in
reality. For example, there is no point in analysing a live load case on its own because it can't
occur in real life without being combined with dead load. This means that you should
generally analyse just the combination load cases and not the primary load cases that the
combinations are made from.
When specifying the load case list, you can either list them directly, or you can click the
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as shown below.
508
Analysis
Tolerance
The accuracy to which the buckling load factors will be calculated. For example, a tolerance
of 0.01 means that the load factors will be within +/- 0.01 of the exact value.
Each extra decimal place in the tolerance will increase the number of iterations per
mode by 3 or 4. For example, a tolerance of 0.001 will require 3 or 4 more iterations per
mode than a tolerance of 0.01.
Buckling modes
The number of buckling modes that are required. Normally only the first buckling mode is of
interest, because beyond that the structure has usually collapsed and further modes are of
academic use only.
If the first buckling mode is caused by local buckling of a slender member or group of
members rather than the frame as a whole, the model should be changed so that overall frame
buckling occurs instead. One way of achieving this could be to change the slender members
into tension-only members so that they become disabled rather than buckle (see also
Members).
You should view the buckling mode shapes graphically to determine whether or not overall
frame buckling has occurred.
509
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For example, if a node was connected to a number of members, all of which were pin-ended,
a rotational instability would normally result due to the unrestrained rotation of the node.
However, the stabilize option would apply a temporary rotational restraint to the node during
the analysis, preventing an instability.
Although this solves many instabilities, it doesn’t fix them all, and the prevention of non-
trivial instabilities is still dependent on good modelling practice.
Solver
The "Paradise" solver is a new parallel multi-core sparse solver that fully utilizes the multiple
cores in a modern computer's CPU. All of the available cores are run in parallel to get the
maximum possible analysis speed. It also takes full advantage of the sparseness of the
structural matrix during the solution to minimize memory requirements and further increase
the speed. The Paradise solver is the recommended setting for all static analyses.
One current restriction of the Paradise solver is that it doesn't generate buckling mode shapes
and so if mode shapes are essential then you should use the Wavefront solver instead. This
restriction is likely to be removed in a future version. Note that buckling mode shapes are for
visual purposes only and do not affect the calculation of the buckling load factor, the member
effective lengths or any of the other modules that use the buckling analysis results.
The "Wavefront" solver also takes into account the sparseness of the matrix but doesn't run in
multi-core mode. It is generally slower than the Paradise solver and can be used if the
Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution or if you require buckling mode shapes.
The "Watcom" solver is the one used in pre-SPACE GASS 12 versions. It is considerably
slower than the Paradise and Wavefront solvers and is therefore of limited use.
Optimization method
The wavefront optimizer can be de-activated or it can be operated in one of four modes as
follows.
510
Analysis
1. No optimization
2. Auto mode - SPACE GASS trials the "General" and various "Linear" modes and then
uses the one that gives the smallest frontwidth. It doesn't add significant time to the
analysis and is the recommended setting.
3. General mode - SPACE GASS determines the path along which optimization
proceeds through the structure.
4. Linear mode - You select from the X, Y or Z axes or a vector along which
optimization proceeds in a straight line through the structure.
5. Circular mode - You select either of the X, Y or Z axes about which optimization
proceeds around an arc through the structure.
Optimization axis
If you have selected "Linear" or "Circular" for the wavefront optimization mode then you
must select the axis or vector along or about which optimization will proceed.
When all of the information has been entered, the buckling analysis module calculates the
buckling load factor and mode shapes for each load case and then saves them ready for
graphical or text report output.
If you want to terminate the analysis before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button.
Because plates are linear elements, they will not buckle regardless of the load applied.
511
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
At the end of the buckling analysis, a message showing the lowest buckling load factor is
displayed as follows.
This gives an instant indication of whether the buckling capacity of the frame has been
exceeded or not. A buckling load factor of less than SF x 1.0, where SF is a suitable safety
factor would be unsatisfactory.
Based on the buckling load factor for each load case, a simple formula is then used to
calculate the member effective lengths as described in "Buckling effective lengths". The
effective lengths can then be automatically transferred into the steel member design modules.
For a more detailed list of the buckling load factors and member effective lengths for each
load case, you should view or print a report that includes the buckling load factors and/or
buckling effective lengths.
If you get buckling load factors that are below the minimum allowable value (eg. shown as
"<0.001" when the minimum allowable value is 0.001), this could indicate an instability
problem rather than a buckling problem. It is even more likely to be an instability problem if
the low buckling load factors occur in every load case.
By displaying the buckling mode shapes, you can generally see where the buckling would
occur, however some models show no movement at all. In these cases, the buckling generally
involves node rotations without any translations, making it difficult to see the source of the
buckling. The buckling load factor report, however, gives the locations of the maximum node
translations and rotations which can help to identify where the buckling is happening.
Load Load Node at Node at
Case Mode Factor Tolerance Iterations Max Trans Max Rotn
In the above example, the buckling mode involves translations in the X-axis direction and
rotations about the Z-axis.
If you want to display any higher order mode shapes, just press the "Filters" toolbar button
and then list the mode shapes required in the "Buckling modes" field.
512
Analysis
If a frame appears to buckle in the wrong direction, it is because the buckling mode
shape diagrams are only intended to show the mode of buckling and not its direction or
magnitude.
513
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Important points
You must perform a dynamic frequency analysis before performing a dynamic spectral
response analysis.
514
Analysis
Modelling considerations
The dynamic properties of a structure are dependent only on its geometric properties, stiffness
and mass. The geometric properties and stiffness of the structure are determined automatically
from the node coordinates, member connectivity and fixity, plate connectivity, node
restraints, section properties and material properties. The structure mass is made up of self
mass (applied as lumped masses on every node) and extra applied lumped masses. Self mass
can be calculated automatically during the dynamic frequency analysis if requested, while any
extra lumped masses must be pre-defined by the user.
In most cases, lumped masses placed at nodes are an adequate means of defining the mass
distribution throughout the structure. However, where the distribution of mass is critical, extra
nodes may be required. For example, consider a vertical cantilevered structure (such as a pole
or tower). In order to accurately determine the natural frequencies you must define the
distribution of mass up the cantilever by adding intermediate nodes with masses applied to
them. A similar situation applies with a continuous beam where the mode shapes between
supports are important.
As a general rule, extra intermediate nodes (with masses applied) should be added to
members for which the mass is a significant part of the total mass of the structure. Structures
with a small number of members are often affected in this way.
The dynamic frequency analysis module cannot analyse structures that contain cable
members.
515
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can run a dynamic frequency analysis by selecting "Dynamic Frequency Analysis" from
the Analysis menu.
The dynamic frequency analysis is a linear analysis and hence cannot be used with models
that contain cable members. Furthermore, it treats tension-only and compression-only
members as normal members that can take tension and compression.
Note that the requirement to save the stiffness matrix during an initial static analysis is no
longer required for a dynamic frequency analysis.
When specifying the load case list, you can either list them directly, or you can click the
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as shown below.
516
Analysis
Note that only the load cases that contain lumped masses or self-weight are considered during
a dynamic frequency analysis. Load cases that contain self-weight with other static loads and
no lumped masses are not considered, however load cases that contain only self-weight are
considered. Any static loads that exist in the dynamic load cases are ignored.
Self mass
The self mass of the structure can be calculated automatically by SPACE GASS and included
in the dynamic frequency analysis. This can be done either by adding self-weight to a load
case that contains lumped masses or by combining lumped mass and self-weight load cases
into a combination load case.
Self mass is applied by calculating the mass of each member and then applying half of it as
translational lumped masses to each of the member end nodes in each of the unrestrained X,
Y and Z global axis directions. The mass of each plate is also calculated and applied to its
perimeter nodes
Self mass generation does not calculate rotational masses because of the large number of extra
masses that would be calculated for a fairly insignificant improvement in results accuracy. If
required, rotational self mass must be manually applied as rotational lumped masses.
517
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Tolerance (Hz)
The accuracy to which the dynamic natural frequencies will be calculated. For example, a
tolerance of 0.001 means that the frequencies will be within +/- 0.001 of the exact value.
The tolerance can also have a significant effect on the accuracy of the mode shapes. While the
mode shapes are usually of secondary importance if only a dynamic frequency analysis is
done, they are very important if the frequency analysis is followed by a dynamic response
analysis. Inaccurate mode shapes from the frequency analysis can cause significant errors in
the mass participation factors from the response analysis and its results in general.
Even if a natural frequency is accurate to within 0.01Hz, its corresponding mode shape may
not be accurate enough for a dynamic spectral response analysis. If the "Extra iterations for
mode shape accuracy" option is turned on (see below) then SPACE GASS will detect
significantly incorrect mode shapes during the frequency analysis and will correct them
automatically by doing more iterations. Small mode shape inaccuracies cannot be detected by
the frequency analysis, however they sometimes make themselves evident in the response
analysis by mass participation factors that exceed 100%. A warning is given if this occurs and
you should repeat the frequency analysis using a smaller tolerance.
If the results of the frequency analysis won’t be used in a response analysis then a tolerance of
0.01 is more than enough, however if a response analysis is to follow then a tolerance of
0.001 or less should be used.
Each extra decimal place in the tolerance will increase the number of iterations per
mode by 3 or 4. For example, a tolerance of 0.0001 will require 3 or 4 more iterations per
mode than a tolerance of 0.001.
Dynamic modes
The dynamic frequency analysis module calculates the mode shapes, natural frequencies and
natural periods for the number of dynamic modes requested. It also sorts them into ascending
frequency order.
For example, if your structure has natural frequencies of 1.2Hz, 3.2Hz, 6.7Hz, 10.2Hz,
15.3Hz and 16.1Hz but you are only interested in the frequencies above 10Hz, you could
specify a frequency shift of 10Hz. This would skip the lower three modes (saving you
considerable analysis time) and just calculate frequencies 10.2Hz, 15.3Hz and 16.1Hz.
518
Analysis
For example, if a node was connected to a number of members, all of which were pin-ended,
a rotational instability would normally result due to the unrestrained rotation of the node.
However, the stabilize option would apply a temporary rotational restraint to the node during
the analysis, preventing an instability.
Although this solves many instabilities, it doesn’t fix them all, and the prevention of non-
trivial instabilities is still dependent on good modelling practice.
If, however, a dynamic response analysis is to be done based on the frequency analysis then
the mode shapes are very important and it is imperative that the "Extra iterations for mode
shape accuracy" option is turned on. Even with the extra iterations, in some cases the mode
shapes may still not be accurate enough (as sometimes evidenced by a mass participation
factor from the response analysis that exceeds 100%) and further accuracy can then only be
achieved by using a smaller tolerance.
Solver
The "Paradise" solver is a new parallel multi-core sparse solver that fully utilizes the multiple
cores in a modern computer's CPU. All of the available cores are run in parallel to get the
maximum possible analysis speed. It also takes full advantage of the sparseness of the
structural matrix during the solution to minimize memory requirements and further increase
the speed. The Paradise solver is the recommended setting for all dynamic frequency
analyses.
The "Wavefront" solver also takes into account the sparseness of the matrix but doesn't run in
multi-core mode. It is generally slower than the Paradise solver and can be used if the
Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution.
The "Watcom" solver is the one used in pre-SPACE GASS 12 versions. It is considerably
slower than the Paradise and Wavefront solvers and is therefore of limited use.
519
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Optimization method
The wavefront optimizer can be de-activated or it can be operated in one of four modes as
follows.
1. No optimization
2. Auto mode - SPACE GASS trials the "General" and various "Linear" modes and then
uses the one that gives the smallest frontwidth. It doesn't add significant time to the
analysis and is the recommended setting.
3. General mode - SPACE GASS determines the path along which optimization
proceeds through the structure.
4. Linear mode - You select from the X, Y or Z axes or a vector along which
optimization proceeds in a straight line through the structure.
5. Circular mode - You select either of the X, Y or Z axes about which optimization
proceeds around an arc through the structure.
Optimization axis
If you have selected "Linear" or "Circular" for the wavefront optimization mode then you
must select the axis or vector along or about which optimization will proceed.
When all of the information has been entered, the dynamic frequency analysis module
calculates the natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes for each load case and then saves
them ready for graphical or text report output.
If you want to terminate the analysis before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button.
520
Analysis
The natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes calculated during the static analysis can be
included in a report. They can also be viewed graphically in animated diagrams superimposed
over the undeformed frame as described in "View dynamic mode shapes".
Mode shape displacements are relative only. They define the mode shape, not its magnitude.
You can’t compare the displacements of different mode shapes in an attempt to determine
which mode will result in the largest displacements. The scale factor for the displacements of
each mode shape is unique to that mode.
The mode shapes in SPACE GASS are normalized. This means that the translations and
rotations in a mode shape will have been adjusted such that each translation or rotation is
divided by the absolute value of the largest translational displacement for the mode shape
under consideration. This makes it easier for you to relate the displacement of a particular
node to the maximum displacement within a mode shape. For example, a normalized
displacement of 0.60 indicates that the node moves by an amount which is 60% of the
maximum displacement in that particular mode shape.
If you wish to use the dynamic frequency analysis results to perform an earthquake analysis,
refer to "Dynamic spectral response analysis".
521
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The spectral module considers the vibration of the structure and identifies the maximum
values that result from the vibration. Generally, the maximums at different points of the
structure occur at different times during the dynamic event. Consequently, the spectral results
do not represent an equilibrium state of the structure, rather an envelope of the maximums.
Furthermore, because the earthquake action has no sign (ie. its accelerations are both positive
and negative), the maximum values have no sign and hence the sign of the results is
indeterminate. Usually, the results are dominated by one of the mode shapes which SPACE
GASS can identify and apply its sign to the results. Alternatively, you can select which mode
shape the sign should be taken from.
The spectral module is not code specific, however for ease of use with the Australian, New
Zealand and Indian loading codes, many of the analysis input parameters have alternative
code specific input options. These options require you to simply select from tables taken from
the code rather than having to type in numeric values. Future versions will include these input
aids for other international codes also.
The earthquake loads are provided in the form of curves called "acceleration response
spectra" which graph acceleration versus period. Each spectral curve is derived from the time-
history record of a ground vibration for a specific level of damping, and is not dependent in
any way on the properties of the structure being analysed. Usually, for one earthquake, there
are several spectral curves for different damping ratios (eg. 0%, 1%, 2%, 5% and 10% of the
critical damping). In the design codes, the spectral curves are derived from a set of earthquake
records which are smoothed and averaged.
A spectral curve library containing some standard (unauthorised) curves is supplied with
SPACE GASS. The built-in graphical spectral curve editor allows you to modify or create
your own spectral curves as required. The acceleration values in a spectral curve are always
specified in terms of g (acceleration due to gravity) units. Before being used in an analysis,
SPACE GASS automatically multiplies them by the dimensionless spectral curve multiplier
and by the appropriate value of g to yield acceleration units that are consistent with the
currently selected units system.
For an accurate spectral analysis, it is important that the spectral load cases have been defined
correctly and that appropriate combinations of the spectral load cases have been specified. For
more information, refer to "Spectral load data".
The results of the spectral analysis include deflections, forces, moments and reactions that can
be displayed graphically, printed, or used in a steel design in the same way as the results from
a static analysis. It is also possible to combine spectral load cases with static load cases in
combination load cases.
Important points
522
Analysis
3. P-andP- effects are not taken into account during a spectral analysis.
4. The spectral analysis must be repeated after a static or dynamic frequency analysis
because its results will have been deleted.
Refer to "Dynamic response analysis results" for details and interpretation of the results of a
dynamic spectral response analysis.
523
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can run a dynamic spectral response analysis by selecting "Dynamic Response Analysis"
from the Analysis menu.
Before a dynamic spectral response analysis can proceed, you must have performed a
dynamic frequency analysis.
When specifying the load case list, you can either list them directly, or you can click the
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as shown below.
524
Analysis
Loading code
This allows you to select the loading code to be used. If you choose the AS, NZS or IS code,
you should ensure that you have also selected spectral curves for that same code in your
spectral load data.
One major difference between the "General" loading code and the other codes is that the
spectral curve multiplier must be manually defined for General, whereas it can be calculated
based on code specific factors for the AS, NZS and IS codes.
The selected ductility factor is only used if a non-NZS spectral curve is used in the
spectral load data. If you have used a predefined NZS spectral curve then the ductility factor
is derived from it.
The static force for each mode is calculated based on the mass in the structure multiplied by
the acceleration obtained from the spectral curve being used. It is calculated for each axis
direction and for the earthquake direction as defined by the direction vector in the spectral
load data. The static force used for base shear scaling is taken from the static force in the
earthquake direction for the dominant mode (ie. the mode with the largest mass participation
factor). If the base shear is less than the user defined percentage of the static force (NZS) or
525
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
100% of the static force (IS) then the results (deflections, forces, moments and reactions) are
scaled up accordingly. No scaling is done for the AS code.
For the "General" code, the results are scaled up if the base shear is less than the user defined
percentage of the mass in the structure. This is equivalent to scaling based on a static force
calculated using an acceleration of 1g.
Factors
There are a number of code specific factors that can be typed in directly or calculated
automatically based on descriptions of the structure location, structure importance and
construction method. They are used to calculate the spectral curve multiplier and other
parameters in the spectral analysis.
526
Analysis
factor. Each of the code specific factors can be typed in directly or calculated automatically
based on descriptions of the structure location, structure importance and construction method.
Either method can be used regardless of the spectral curve damping factors.
When all of the information has been entered, the dynamic spectral response analysis module
performs its calculations for each load case and then saves them ready for graphical or text
report output.
If you want to terminate the analysis before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button.
527
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
1. Forces, moments and reactions are calculated from the node displacements for each mode.
2. Displacements, forces, moments and reactions for each mode are combined into a single set of
values for all the modes combined. This is done using SRSS or CQC as specified by the user.
3. If base shear scaling is requested, the displacements, forces, moments and reactions are then
scaled by a factor so that the base shear is equal to the base shear factor times the total mass
(for "General") or not less than the base shear factor times the total static force for the
dominant mode (for NZS or IS loading codes).
Note that the base shear is simply the X, Y and Z reactions resolved into a vector in the
direction of the earthquake. Similarly, the total static force is the X, Y and Z static forces
resolved into a vector in the direction of the earthquake.
For "General", if the direction vector is predominantly horizontal then the horizontal base
shear factor is used (this is the normal case), otherwise the vertical base shear factor is used.
For a detailed explanation of the dynamic spectral response analysis results, refer to
"Dynamic response analysis results".
528
Analysis
The results of a spectral response analysis include normal deflections, forces, moments and
reactions that can be displayed graphically, printed or used in a steel design in the same way
that the results of a static analysis are used. In addition, spectral load cases and static load
cases can be mixed together in combination load cases.
The output results also include a summary of the analysis input parameters and details of the
governing mode shapes, total static forces, total masses and mass participation factors. Details
are given for the three global axis directions and for the direction vector.
Total mass
The total mass (including self mass if self weight is included in the mass load cases)
applied to the model for each global axis direction. Note that any mass applied to restrained
degrees of freedom is ignored.
The total MPF for each direction is a reliable indicator of the number of modes required. If all
modes are considered then the sum of the MPF’s (the total MPF) will be 100%. In reality, we
only consider a finite number of modes and the total MPF should be at least 90% for a good
result. If the total MPF is less than 90% then more modes should be included in the analysis.
Usually, an earthquake is applied along one of the two horizontal axes, as defined by the
direction vector. For example, an earthquake acting in the X direction would have a direction
vector of Dx = 1.0, Dy = 0.0 and Dz = 0.0. In this case, the total MPF in the X direction
should be greater than 90%. The values of the total MPFs in the other two directions are not
important.
A MPF that exceeds 100% indicates that the mode shapes from the dynamic frequency
analysis are not accurate enough. If this happens, you should repeat the dynamic frequency
analysis using a smaller tolerance.
Base shear
The horizontal reaction in each global axis direction shown as a percentage of the total mass.
This should match the reactions shown graphically.
The table in the output report showing the mass participation factors for each mode shape
individually gives a good indication of the contribution of each mode shape in the overall
dynamic response of the structure. From it you can quickly see which mode is dominant.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SPECTRUM (kN,T,Sec,Hz)
-------------------------
529
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
530
Analysis
If any errors in the data are detected, SPACE GASS lists them on the screen, aborts the
analysis and then returns to the main menu, ready for correction of the offending items.
Warnings are displayed at the end of the analysis and do not cause it to abort.
Section # has impractically large section properties for the frame size
The properties of a section are too large for the frame dimensions. This error is often due to
the section properties being input in the wrong units.
Member # with PA<>0.0 must have identical Y and Z axis fixities at an end
Because of the difficulty involved in calculating the stiffness matrix for a member with a non-
zero principal angle when the member end fixities are about its non-principal axes, the Y and
Z fixities at an end must be the same.
531
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Member # must not have shear fixity released with semi-rigid joints
Members with semi-rigid joints cannot have shear fixities released. This restriction only
applies when the semi-rigid joint and the shear fixity act in the same plane.
UDL must act over full length of cable member #, load case #
Uniformly distributed loads applied to cable members must act over the entire cable length.
532
Analysis
WARNING: Analysis did not reach desired convergence in all load cases
The level of convergence in a non-linear analysis has not reached the required convergence
accuracy for some load cases. This is not necessarily fatal if the convergence achieved is close
to that requested. Note also that some of the load cases may have fully converged and this can
be checked by looking at the output reports.
533
Steel Member Design
Steel member design
Throughout this chapter it can be assumed that all information applies equally to all of
the supported steel member design codes unless specifically stated otherwise.
This chapter describes in detail the data required to be input before a design or check can
proceed. It discusses the internal methods, philosophies and assumptions that the program
uses as it designs or checks members, and it explains how to initiate the actual design or
checking process once the steel member design data has been input.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Before you use the steel member design module, you should read all of the assumptions
described later in this chapter (see also "Steel member design/check assumptions") to
verify that its performance and capabilities are adequate for your situation. It is up to you
to determine whether or not the steel member design module is suitable for your
requirements.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Adjustments are required when designing or checking US HSS sections due to the practice
of some steel manufacturers producing HSS sections with a wall thickness at the very low
end of what the specifications allow. To account for this, the US section libraries supplied
with SPACE GASS 12.27 and later include adjustments to the HSS section properties
(depending on the type of HSS section) and no extra adjustments are made to their
properties during an AISC 360-10 design or check. In SPACE GASS 12.26 and earlier, the
US section libraries contained non-adjusted properties for HSS sections and so to allow for
this their wall thickness was multiplied by 0.93 during an AISC 360-10 design or check.
It is therefore important that you match the version of the US library with the same version
of SPACE GASS, otherwise unsafe designs of HSS sections could result. It is also
important that you don't use HSS sections from SPACE GASS 12.26 and earlier with other
non-US design codes.
The steel member design module is a general purpose design and code checking program
which reads the frame analysis output data, calculates the critical location and load case for
each member and then selects the most suitable steel member size from a library of standard
sections. Alternatively, you may specify a steel member size to be checked and the program
determines whether or not the member is adequate. For a given frame, you can specify any
selected number of members to be designed or checked.
The design module is also capable of passing the designed steel sizes back into the frame
analysis data and re-analysing the structure. This process can be iterated until the results
converge. It usually only takes two or three iterations.
During the design/check phase SPACE GASS automatically calculates the load factor for
limit states codes or combined stress ratio for working stress codes at numerous stations along
each member. It considers yielding of the cross section, lateral buckling, slenderness ratios,
and all possible combinations of shear, tension, compression and bending for both in-plane
and out-of-plane failure.
535
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
After all specified members have been designed or checked, a detailed report can be produced
for each member showing the critical location or segment on the member, the critical load
case, section properties, effective lengths, and the complete computations involved in the
design. Sections of the report can be suppressed if required. A color-coded graphical
representation of the design/check results can also be displayed.
The SPACE GASS steel member design module can handle most types of steel members
including beams, columns, ties, struts, braces, and members subjected to combinations of
axial loads, shear forces and bending moments (uniaxial or biaxial).
All references to BS5950 in this document apply to BS5950-1:2000. Although SPACE GASS
still has a design module for BS5950:1990, it is now obsolete and is not referred to in this
document.
Refer to "Steel member input methods" for details on how to input steel member design data.
Refer to "Running a steel member design" for details on how to perform a steel member
design.
Refer to "Steel member design results" for details and interpretation of the results of a steel
member design.
536
Steel Member Design
After the quick initial input, you can refine the design parameters for each steel member by
using a steel member input form or datasheet (see items 2 and 3 below). You can also skip the
auto-create step completely if you prefer to input the steel design data from scratch using a
steel member input form or datasheet.
Alternatively, you can select "Steel Member Design Input-Datasheet" from the Design menu
to open a datasheet and input or edit design parameters for steel members regardless if they
have previously been defined or not.
The recommended procedure is to use the auto-create tool to perform a quick initial setup of
the steel members and then refine them using a steel member input form or datasheet.
Each of the three input methods are explained in detail in the following sections.
If you want to have multiple steel members with identical design parameters, you can copy
the design parameters from one steel member to many others by using the "Copy steel
member properties" tool. Note, however, that you can’t copy to steel members that haven’t
been defined yet.
537
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
This tool automatically creates multiple steel design members (also known as "design
groups") from a selection of analysis members. Each generated steel design member can
contain multiple analysis members connected end-to-end, provided they are of the same cross
section, are generally collinear and don’t extend past a major axis support.
You can access the auto-create steel members tool by selecting "Steel Member Design Input-
Auto create multiple steel members" from the Design menu or selecting "Auto-create multiple
steel members" from the floating menu.
You can select analysis members from different locations throughout the model and with
different section properties, and SPACE GASS will automatically sort through them and
group them appropriately into steel design members.
You can even select the entire model and have all of the steel design members created
automatically. However, you should check the generated members to ensure that their
effective lengths, restraints and other data are correct.
The numbering convention adopted by this operation is such that the number of each
generated steel design member is set to match the number of the first analysis member that it
contains. This makes it easy to keep track of how the steel design members relate to the
analysis members. However, please be aware that any existing steel design members that
don’t follow this convention will be overwritten if their numbers clash with the new steel
design members being generated. Of course, any steel design members that contain the
selected analysis members will also be overwritten during the generation.
After you have selected the analysis members to be grouped into steel design members, click
the right mouse button and select "Auto-create multiple steel members" from the floating
menu (or select "Ok" if you initiated the operation from the menu). You can then specify
restraint, effective length and other data for the generated steel members via the forms shown
below.
538
Steel Member Design
539
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed on both
flanges at every intermediate node.
If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed at the
intermediate nodes that are connected to other members. You have the option of ignoring
interconnecting members that lie in the plane of the steel member (ie. in the plane of the steel
member’s web). You can also control which flanges to which the restraints are applied.
If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed at the
intermediate nodes that have analysis restraints applied to them. Analysis restraints that only
apply in the direction of the plane of the steel member’s web are ignored.
Note that this only applies to normal analysis restraints and not the general restraint.
Tolerances
The tolerances affect whether or not a selection of analysis members are suitable for grouping
into a steel design member. A selection of analysis members of the same cross section
connected end-to-end will be able to be grouped into a steel design member provided the bend
angle, twist angle or step distance between adjacent analysis members do not exceed the
tolerances you specify.
After clicking the "Next" button, the following form appears. For detailed information about
the data in the form, refer to "Steel member design data".
540
Steel Member Design
All steel design members generated will be created with the data that you specify in this form.
After the steel design members have been created, you should check each one, paying
particular attention to the following:
1. You should split any steel design member that extends past an interconnecting member that
effectively acts as a major axis support point for the design member.
2. If you have specified that bending effective lengths are to be calculated automatically based
on the flange restraints, they will be calculated such that they never substantially exceed the
actual length of the steel design member. If the unrestrained flange length is longer than this
(ie. the bending effective length is longer than the steel design member length) then you
should specify them manually rather than having them calculated automatically.
You can show the steel design members graphically by clicking the button near the
bottom of the side toolbar. They show up as thickened lines that are drawn slightly shorter
than their actual length so that you can easily see where they start and finish.
541
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Steel design members can be viewed or edited graphically on an individual basis as described
in "Steel member input form", "Steel member input datasheet" or via the steel member design
datasheet.
For an overview of the various methods available for inputting steel member design data,
refer to "Steel member input methods".
542
Steel Member Design
This tool allows you to graphically define and edit steel design members (also known as
"design groups"). Note that multiple steel design members can be defined in a single
operation using the "Auto-create steel members" tool.
You can access the steel member input form by selecting "Steel Member Design Input-
Graphical" from the Design menu or selecting some members and then "Steel Member Design
Input (Form)" from the floating menu.
It is recommended that you initially generate all the steel design members using the "Auto-
create steel members" tool and then check and edit them on an individual basis using the
procedure described here.
Each steel design member contains one or more analysis members connected end-to-end.
After you have selected the analysis members that you wish to include in a steel design
member, click the right mouse button and select "Steel Member Design Input (Form)" from
the floating menu (or select "Ok" if you initiated the operation from the menu).
Because the top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the same as the top flange for
the first member in the design group, it is important to be able to control which member
comes first in the design group. Flange restraint positions are also referenced from the end of
the first member in the design group.
If you are inputting a new design group, the member that you select first will be placed first in
the design group (assuming that it is at either end of the group). If you want to select a "first"
member, you should pick it directly or ensure that it is the only member selected if you use a
window.
If you use a window and select a group of members initially, then the end one with the lowest
member number will be placed first in the design group.
In the steel member form that appears, type in the data for the selected design group, and then
click the form Ok button.
For detailed information about the data in the form, refer to "Steel member design data".
543
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can show the steel design members graphically by clicking the button near the
bottom of the side toolbar. They show up as thickened lines that are drawn slightly shorter
than their actual length so that you can easily see where they start and finish.
You can also show the flange restraints graphically by clicking the button near the bottom
of the side toolbar. It enables you to see exactly where the flange restraints are and whether
they are on the correct flange or not.
For an overview of the various methods available for inputting steel member design data,
refer to "Steel member input methods".
544
Steel Member Design
This tool allows you to graphically edit steel design members (also known as "design
groups") that were previously defined using the "Auto-create steel members" and/or "Steel
member input form" tools.
You can access the steel member input datasheet by selecting "Steel Member Design Input-
Datasheet" from the Design menu or selecting some members and then "Steel Member Design
Input (Datasheet)" from the floating menu.
After you have selected one or more steel design members, click the right mouse button and
select "Steel Member Design Input (Datasheet)" from the floating menu (or select "Ok" if you
initiated the operation from the menu).
For detailed information about the data in the datasheet, refer to "Steel member design data".
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
For an overview of the various methods available for inputting steel member design data,
refer to "Steel member input methods".
545
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Note that the properties can only be copied to members that have already been set up as steel
design members.
1. Select the source member that you wish to copy the properties of, click the right mouse button
and then select "Copy Steel Member Properties" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Copy Steel Member Properties" from the Design menu and then select the source
member that you wish to copy the properties of.
2. Select one or more destination members by picking them individually or by putting a selection
window around them and then click the right mouse button and click "Ok".
3. The steel design properties of the source member will then be copied to the selected
destination members.
4. Select another source member, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from the tool.
After the copy, you should check the destination members to ensure that the effective lengths,
flange restraints and other data are appropriate. In particular, check that the effective lengths
are correct and that the flange restraints are not located off the ends of the steel design
member.
For an overview of the various methods available for inputting steel member design data,
refer to "Steel member input methods".
546
Steel Member Design
For an overview of the various methods available for inputting steel member design data,
refer to "Steel member input methods".
The form that appears when you input steel member design data graphically is shown above.
The steel member datasheet contains the same information in a different format.
Group
Each steel design member is made up of one or more analysis members. Hence, the concept
of steel design groups is introduced. A steel design group usually represents a single piece of
steel in the real structure. It could be modelled as a single member or a number of members in
the analysis model.
547
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Description
An optional brief description of the steel design group.
Member list
A list of analysis members to be combined into the steel design group. This is often only one
member in each group.
Strength grade
The strength grade for members can be set to normal or high. The actual yield strengths are
taken from the standard section libraries supplied with SPACE GASS. All of these libraries
can be viewed or edited (see also Section libraries).
Units
The compression effective lengths and flange restraint positions can be specified as actual
distances or as ratios of the design group length.
The load height position affects the value of the load height factor kl which is used to
calculate the bending effective length of the member.
548
Steel Member Design
Scan code
In order to control the types of steel sections that the program selects during the course of a
design, a library scan code is required. This allows you to select the types of sections that
should only be considered for each member. For example, you could use it to tell the program
that only I-sections were to be considered for the design of a portal frame column. Without
the library scan code the program would simply choose the lightest adequate steel section
from the library, regardless of its type or shape.
The library scan code is simply a list of up to four characters that contains the group codes of
sections that are to be considered during the design of a member. You can input the scan code
directly or click the "Select" button and then choose the section types you require and the scan
code will be created for you.
Compression effective lengths can be calculated from a buckling analysis, however you can
elect to input them directly if you prefer. To have them calculated, select the "Calculate from
Buckling Analysis" check box. Of course to have Lc calculated, you must have the buckling
analysis module (it is not a standard program feature) and you must run a buckling analysis
before you can run the steel member design.
Having the Lc values calculated automatically is generally more efficient than specifying
them directly because case specific Lc values can be calculated for each design load case.
However, the buckling analysis sometimes over-estimates the Lc values for members that are
not directly involved in the buckling of the model (refer to "Overestimation of compression
effective lengths" in Buckling effective lengths for further information). If you specify Lc
values directly then they are used for every load case.
If the Lc values are not being transferred automatically from a buckling analysis, for design
groups that consist of a number of analysis members connected end-to-end, you should use
the MAXIMUM (not the sum!) of its individual analysis member effective lengths.
549
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The "Braced in Position at Both Ends of Group" check boxes indicate whether or not the
group is braced for each of the major and minor axis directions. If you specify that the group
is braced then its compression effective length in the direction you specify will not be allowed
to exceed the overall group length, regardless of whether it was calculated from a buckling
analysis or specified directly by you. Because this can substantially reduce the effective
lengths used in the design, please use this option with care!
It is sometimes useful to model more than one structure in a single job, however this is
not recommended if you are performing a buckling analysis to obtain compression effective
lengths. The buckling analysis finds the lowest buckling load factor for the entire model and
then calculates the effective lengths for all the members in the model based on that buckling
load factor. For example, if you have modelled structure A and structure B in one job, and
structure A has the lowest buckling load factor, the effective lengths for structure B will be
incorrectly based on the buckling load factor from structure A. SPACE GASS can't detect if
there are multiple structures in a single model and therefore you need to put them into
separate jobs if you want to use effective lengths from a buckling analysis.
If the compression effective lengths are calculated from a buckling analysis, they are
always taken from the first buckling mode regardless of how many buckling modes were
calculated.
During the design phase, the compression effective lengths as calculated or defined by
you may be adjusted depending on parameters you specify at the start of the design phase.
For more information about this, refer to Running a steel member design.
For single angle sections, the compression effective lengths must be input relative to
the non-principal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD, AISC-ASD,
HK CP2011, EUROCODE 3 and IS800, they are optionally converted to the principal axes
during the design/check phase. To prevent this conversion, refer to Running a steel member
design.
In order to cater for all design code naming conventions, the compression effective
lengths are referred to as "Lc major" and "Lc minor" in this document and in the data entry
parts of the program. However, in the design output reports, they are changed to match the
notation of the design code that was used.
During the design, if you have elected to have the bending effective length calculated, it is
taken as the length of the segment under consideration multiplied by three additional factors
550
Steel Member Design
kt twist factor), kl (load height factor) and kr (lateral rotation factor) such that Lb = Lseg x kt
x kl x kr.
Alternatively, if you have specified the bending effective length directly then the specified
value is used without modification.
kt, kl and kr are fully explained in AS4100/NZS3404 clause 5.6.3. In AS1250, SABS0162,
BS5950, AS3990, HK CP2011 and EUROCODE 3 there are no kt kl and kr factors and so
SPACE GASS uses the rules of AS1250 clause 5.9, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause
4.3.5, AS3990 clause 5.9, HK CP2011 clause 8.3.4 or EUROCODE 3 clause F.1.2 to
calculate equivalent kt, kl and kr factors which, when multiplied together, produce an overall
effective length factor kb.
Because the steel member design module can't detect if the member being designed is a
cantilever or not, it is recommended that for cantilevers (for which the critical flange may be
the tension flange) you check that the calculated bending effective length is correct and, if
not, specify it manually.
S In order to cater for all design code naming conventions, the bending effective length
is referred to as "Lb" in this document and in the data entry parts of the program. However, in
the design output reports, it is changed to match the notation of the design code that was used.
551
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For a "Non-seismic" member classification, none of the above checks are performed. For a
"Non-specific" member type (with OCBF, SCBF, OMF or SMF classification), only the "All
member types" checks are performed.
The checks for "E250B steel of IS2062 only" in clauses 12.8.2.1 and 12.11.1 simply look for a
yield stress of between 230MPa and 250MPa and an ultimate stress of 410MPa. Because
these yield and ultimate stress properties apply equally to E250A, E205B and E250C steel,
and because SPACE GASS can't detect the difference between them, it is up to the user to
ensure that E250A and E250C steel is not used when clauses 12.8.2.1 or 12.11.1 apply.
It is up to the user to create the load combinations in clause 12.2.3 and include them in the
list of load cases to be considered in the design/check. The IS800 module will identify the
clause 12.2.3 load combinations SOLELY by the presence of a multiplying factor of 2.5 and
will use those load combinations for columns ONLY if clause 12.5.1 is satisfied.
Any load combinations containing a multiplying factor of 2.5 will only be used if they are
included in the list of load cases to be considered, seismic checks are activated, and clause
12.5.1 for columns is satisfied. Furthermore, only their axial forces will be considered.
For a "Non-seismic" member classification, none of the above checks are performed. For a
"Non-specific" member type (with category 1-4 classification), all of the above checks are
performed.
Note that the item 1 check in NZS3404 Table 12.4 uses the actual yield stress rather than the
12 < t <= 20 mm grade reference yield stress.
Flange restraints
Flange restraint positions are referenced from the end of the first member in a design group.
SPACE GASS assumes that there is a restraint at each end of a group and you should
therefore specify the intermediate restraint positions only.
Restraint positions should be specified independently for the top and bottom flanges. Up to
100 intermediate positions can be specified for each flange. If there are no intermediate
restraints for a particular flange then the restraint positions field should be left blank.
552
Steel Member Design
When specifying restraint positions, you can use @’s to specify relative positions or groups of
equally spaced positions. For example, restraint positions of 1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4
could be specified as 5@1.2,4@0.6, or positions of 1.2,1.8,2.7,3.3 could be specified as
1.2,1@0.6,2.7,1@0.6.
Depending on the "Units" selected, the restraint positions may be expressed as an absolute
distance or as a ratio of the total group length.
Flange restraint types must be specified for each intermediate restraint position and for the
two ends of the design group. Refer to "Flange restraints" for restraint definitions.
The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or z-axis if the
section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a group as a whole is defined
such that it is the same as the top flange of the first member in the group.
You can verify graphically which is the top flange by clicking the button near the bottom
of the side toolbar. It displays a small triangle that points to the top flange of each member.
For single angle sections, flange restraints must be input relative to the non-principal
axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD, they are
converted to the principal axes during the design/check phase.
Note that even if you select this check box, you can disable eccentric effects globally by
deselecting the eccentric effects check box in the steel member design/check form.
During the design, SPACE GASS checks to see that the bolts per cross section specified can
be fitted into the cross section. If not, the number is reduced to the maximum that can be
553
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
accommodated. If the member is too small to take even a single bolt then the connection is
assumed to be welded.
Bolt diameter
End connection bolt diameter.
Angle type
In order to define the geometry of single or double angle sections, SPACE GASS requires the
angle section type to be input.
Double angle sections are assumed to have no space between the individual angle
sections.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules assume that double angles are connected
together at intermediate points sufficient to ensure that half of the design axial compressive
force for the combined section does not exceed the compressive capacity of each angle
section considered individually using an effective length (for buckling of the sections away
from each other) equal to the distance between connection points.
554
Steel Member Design
All of the possible arrangements involving single and double angles are shown in the
diagrams above. It is important to note that the major axis of a single or double angle section
is assumed to be parallel to the short leg(s) of the section as shown in the diagrams.
For double equal angles, the long leg is assumed to be the vertical leg in the
diagrams above. Note that in SPACE GASS 10 and earlier, double equal angle
sections with long legs connected were adjusted internally and treated as though
their short legs were connected. This adjustment was removed in SPACE GASS 11
and later versions.
The design procedure for angle sections is considerably more complicated than for most other
sections. This is due to the significant moments generated by eccentric end connections which
cannot usually be avoided when working with angles. SPACE GASS is capable of taking
these effects into account for both single and double angle sections.
Furthermore, for single angle sections, the effective lengths and flange restraints must be
input relative to the non-principal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-
LRFD and AISC-ASD, they are converted to the principal axes during the design/check
phase.
End connection
For non-symmetric members subjected to axial loads, such as angle sections, channels and
Tees, the program needs to know which leg, flange or web is connected so that the extra
moments due to possible eccentric end connections can be calculated (if appropriate).
Design criteria
Most designs aim to minimize the structure weight, however if you are constrained to a
certain member depth then you can elect to minimize the member depth instead.
555
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
556
Steel Member Design
The steel member design module deals only with the member cross section axes. The
longitudinal axis of the member is of no relevance.
For most section types, steel member design input and output data always relates to the major
and minor principal cross section axes. The only exception is for single angle sections where
the effective lengths and flange restraints must be input relative to the non-principal axes
(the axes parallel to the angle legs) for all design codes.
During the design phase, the data for single angle sections is converted to the principal axes
for AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD. Output reports for
those codes also show the data in principal axes for single angle sections.
557
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Member groups
In a typical structure, the actual beams, columns, struts, ties, etc. are modelled in SPACE
GASS as members connected together at nodes. Sometimes, however it is convenient and
often necessary for members to have nodes placed at intermediate positions along them so
that they are subdivided into smaller members. This can occur when another member
intersects a member at an intermediate point or when a node is simply placed at an
intermediate point so that deflections, forces and moments are calculated at that point during
the analysis.
Quite often the placement of intermediate nodes along a member is done purely for frame
analysis modelling purposes rather than due to an actual discontinuity or connection in the
real structure. For this reason, SPACE GASS allows you to group frame analysis members
together and design them as though they are a single entity (as they are in the real structure).
In the remainder of this manual a "design group" represents an actual member in the real
structure which consists of one or more frame analysis members grouped together end-to-end.
Note that in the following discussion, members in a group can be listed in either
direction. For example, "1,3,8,5" and "5,8,3,1" are both suitable. The direction can, however
affect the definition of the top flange (see also Flange restraints).
Consider, for example, a simply supported beam with a node at each end which is subjected to
an axial compressive force and a uniformly distributed dead load. When analysed, the
deflected shape and bending moment distribution along its length is calculated by SPACE
GASS. If the structural adequacy of this member is then checked against one of the design
codes, various factors are calculated based on the deflected shape and the bending moment
distribution. These factors are then used in the calculations to determine if the member is
adequate or not.
If the same beam is modelled with a third node at midspan, you would still get the same
deflected shape and bending moment distribution, however unless you were able to group the
two halves of the beam together and design them as though they were a single member you
would get a completely different design result. This is because the factors and the combined
actions moments and axial forces would be based on the deflection and moment distributions
for only half of the beam rather than its full length.
If a member has been subdivided into smaller members in the analysis model, it is
important that these sub-members are grouped together in the design model.
The rules for deciding whether or not a run of frame analysis members should be grouped into
a design group are as follows.
1. Each member in a design group must be rigidly connected to each other end-to-end, they must
lie generally in a straight line, and they must have the same section properties.
2. The length of a design group should not be less than the major axis span.
3. A design group must be long enough to include all of the flange restraints that affect its
bending effective lengths. Furthermore, under no circumstances should the design group
558
Steel Member Design
length be less than the unrestrained lengths of the top and bottom flanges. This rule is not
applicable if the bending effective lengths are specified directly rather than being calculated.
4. Each end of a design group should coincide with the physical end of a member or a significant
change in direction of a member, or a support point for a member. It shouldn’t normally
extend past a support or past an intersecting member that effectively acts as a support.
"Support" refers to a support for the major axis span.
If it is not possible for all of the above rules to be satisfied then you should not use
SPACE GASS to design the steel members involved.
Consider the following examples, indicating how members in typical frames can be grouped
together.
Group 1: 1,2
Group 2: 3,4,5
Group 3: 6
Group 4: 7,8
Group 1: 1,2
Group 2: 3,4,5,6
Group 3: 7,8
559
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Group 1: 2,6,10,14,18,22
Group 2: 4,8,12,16,20,24
Group 3: 1
Group 4: 3
(Some of the non-critical members have not been grouped)
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The above grouping assumes that local bending of the chords between panel points is
insignificant compared with overall bending between the end supports (ie. the panel points
are not really acting as support points for the chords). If the chords were effectively
spanning L/6 instead of L then the chord members could not be grouped.
Group 1: 1
Group 2: 2
Group 3: 3
Group 4: 4
Group 5: 5
Group n: n
etc...
560
Steel Member Design
No grouping of multiple members can occur in this case because each member acts as a single
span. The horizontal beams act as supports for the columns at each floor and the columns act
as supports for the beams.
Note that, if there was no significant axial forces in the beams such that they were not acting
as supports for the columns then the columns could be grouped into one design group from
bottom to top. This would not, however be a common situation.
Group 1: 1,2,3,4
Group 2: 5,6
561
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Flange restraints
Because the positions of the start and finish flange restraints is known, only the intermediate
restraint positions should be specified. However, the end and intermediate restraint types
should be specified.
The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or z-axis if the section
has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a group as a whole is defined such
that it is the same as the top flange of the first member in the group.
You can verify graphically which is the top flange by clicking the button near the
bottom of the side toolbar. It displays a small triangle that points to the top flange of each
member.
There are two classes of restraint types; those that occur at a discrete point and those that
occur over a continuous length of flange between two point restraints. The number of point
restraint types should exactly match the number of restraint positions.
When @ multipliers are used in the restraint positions lists, the corresponding restraint types
must have only one character for each @ multiplier. For example, restraint positions of
1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 with corresponding restraint types of LLLLLPPPP could
be specified as 5@1.2,4@0.6 and LP. If the restraint types were LLPLLPPPP, however then
they would have to be specified as 2@1.2,3.6,2@1.2,4@0.6 and LPLP.
SPACE GASS accepts six point flange restraint types and two continuous flange restraint
types. They are defined as follows. Note that these definitions are slightly different to the ones
in the design codes because the code definitions apply to the cross section rather than to each
flange. The cross section restraints are determined from the flange restraints during the
design or check phase.
Full & rotational restraint (R) The same as full restraint above but
also with significant restraint against
lateral rotation of the flange about the
562
Steel Member Design
Partial & rotational restraint (S) The same as partial restraint above but
also with significant restraint against
lateral rotation of the flange about the
cross section’s minor axis.
An "unrestrained" end does not necessarily imply a cantilever. Flange restraints are
independent of the member support system. Cantilevers or beams with supported ends could
be restrained or unrestrained.
The following flange restraint types do not occur at a point but are continuous between two
adjacent point flange restraints.
The above definitions allow for full, partial, lateral or no restraint against twist of the cross
section (about its longitudinal axis) (F,P,L,C or U). They also allow for full or no restraint
against lateral rotation of the critical flange (about the minor cross section axis) in the
presence of full or partial twist restraint (R or S). An extra restraint condition which is catered
for in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, AS3990 and HK CP2011 only, that provides partial
restraint against lateral rotation of the critical flange is not supported by SPACE GASS.
For single angle sections, it is unclear whether or not lateral restraints applied to
either leg are effective in providing any restraint to the section. Consequently, you should
be very careful when applying lateral restraints to single angle sections and you should use
563
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
them only if you are sure they are effective in restraining the section. SPACE GASS will
apply them if you specify them and so the decision about whether or not they should be
used is entirely up to you.
Note that the design/check calculations are based on the effective cross section restraint
rather than the restraint on a particular flange. The effective cross section restraint
depends on which flange is the critical one and on what flange restraints are applied to the
critical and the non-critical flanges. Refer to "Effective flange restraints" for more
information.
The following diagrams are a collection of some fairly typical support and fly brace
connection details. The type of restraint that applies to each flange is shown as either "full",
"partial", "lateral" or "unrestrained". Note that the diagrams apply regardless of whether or
not rotational restraints also exists. The terms "full" or "partial" could also read "full and
rotational" or "partial and rotational" in each of the diagrams.
564
Steel Member Design
Consider, for example, the portal frame below. The roof bracing system laterally braces each
rafter at the eaves and apex. Purlins are positioned at ninth points along each rafter and fly
braces are attached to each third purlin at rafter third points. Girts are positioned at the mid-
height of each column.
565
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
We will assume that the roof sheeting has enough rigidity to allow the purlins to prevent
lateral deflection of the rafter top flange. Note that if the roof sheeting has insufficient rigidity
to prevent lateral deflection then the fly braces will not be capable of providing any restraint
to the bottom flange and will thus be totally ineffective.
The frame could be set up with four design groups, each containing the following members.
Group 1: 1,2
Group 3: 3,4,5
Group 6: 6
Group 7: 7,8
When determining flange restraint positions and types, we will assume that the footing, eave
and apex connections provide F (full) restraint to both flanges of each member framing into
them.
There is no fly bracing attached to the wall girts and they provide lateral restraint only to the
outside flange of the columns. Thus, groups 1 and 7 have top flange restraints of F (full) at
each end and L (lateral) at mid height, and bottom flange restraints of F (full) at each end
only. If there had been fly bracing to the girts then there would also be a bottom flange mid
height restraint of L (lateral). Note that the top flange for groups 1 and 7 is the outside flange
because the local y-axis for members 1, 2, 7 and 8 points towards the outside of the frame.
566
Steel Member Design
Similarly, groups 3 and 6 have top flange restraints of F (full) at each end and L (lateral) at
each purlin, and bottom flange restraints of F (full) at each end and L (lateral) at each fly
brace location. Thus, the restraint arrangements for the frame are:
Note that by applying L (lateral) restraints to both flanges at each fly brace location we are
assuming that the purlins are flexurally stiff enough to fully prevent twist rotation of the
rafter. If they can only partially prevent twist rotation of the rafter then the group 3 and 6
restraints would become FLLPLLPLLF on the top flange and FF on the bottom flange.
Restraint Forces
The brace, purlin, girt or other member that provides full, partial or lateral restraint to the
critical flange of a member must be capable of resisting the force required to provide such
restraint. This is not automatically allowed for in the analysis or design. If you wish to take
this into account then you should add the restraint forces to your applied loads. The restraint
forces are code specific and you should refer to the appropriate clauses for the design code
you are using.
This effect is particularly important for deep beams where the forces required to restrain
the critical flange can be quite high. You should check that your model is capable of
withstanding these forces.
567
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are therefore assumed to be lying on
their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping). They are
orientated at right angles to normal beam Tees which have the major axis parallel to the
flange.
Note that although beam Tees are supported by all of the steel member design modules, only
the AS4100, NZS3404, AISC-ASD, AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, HK CP2011 and BS5950
modules support column Tees.
568
Steel Member Design
Limit state codes such as AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, NZS3404, BS5950 and
HK CP2011 require second order effects to be taken into account by either performing a
first order (linear) elastic analysis with moment magnification or a second order (non-
linear) elastic analysis with no moment magnification. Because a non-linear analysis is
generally more efficient and accurate than moment magnification, and because SPACE
GASS has no facilities for moment magnification, it is recommended that a non-linear
analysis be used at all times for these codes.
2. Check mode
Just checks the section from the analysis data for the design group being checked.
Note that SPACE GASS can now do a steel member check using sections that haven't
been imported from a library, however you must have specified their steel design
properties via the Shape builder.
Member groups list
If you want to consider all design groups (for which steel member design data has been input)
then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type in a subset of design groups
(separated by commas or dashes).
569
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For example, if the columns in a frame all have section property number 3, you could instruct
the program to design only the columns by entering "3" in the section properties list.
Alternatively, you could type in all of the groups containing columns in the member groups
list above, however this would be much more cumbersome.
For members with analysis section properties that were read from a library, the steel member
design module uses that library to get information about the strength grade, properties, cross
section shape, etc. of the member.
For members with analysis section properties that were not read from a library, the design
module uses the default section library to get its information.
SPACE GASS automatically adds an extra station at each end of an analysis member, at each
point of application of a concentrated member load, at each flange restraint position, and at
the quarter points between flange restraints. If a design group consists of more than one
analysis member then the member stations are simply added together to give a total number of
stations for the design group as a whole.
The member stations are the points at which deflections, forces and moments are calculated.
They are also the points at which code checks are carried out. It is therefore important that
there are enough stations located along the design group to give a good representation of the
deflected shape, bending moment diagram and shear force diagram so that the design results
are accurate.
9 intermediate stations for each analysis member is normally quite accurate, however this can
be increased to 75 if required. Note that the speed of the design process is approximately
proportional to the number of stations per design group.
570
Steel Member Design
Compression effective lengths from a buckling analysis are limited to Ratio x GLen, where
Ratio is the compression effective length ratio limit that you specify and GLen is the overall
design group length.
Note that this limit applies only to compression effective lengths from a buckling analysis and
not to those specified directly.
The load factor applies to all limit state codes such as AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3,
AS4100, AS4600, BS5950, NZS3404 and HK CP2011. It is the amount by which the design
actions can be increased before the point of failure is reached.
For example, if the steel design returns a load factor of 1.12, you could theoretically increase
your loads by 12%, repeat the analysis and design, and expect the load factor to reduce to
1.00. This is not always the case however, because the non-linearity of the analysis means that
increasing your loads by 12% does not guarantee that the design actions will also increase by
exactly 12%.
For members designed in accordance with these codes, the load factor must be greater than
1.0. This means that the design actions can be factored up by an amount greater than 1.0
before the member becomes inadequate.
Because the relationship between design actions and design capacity is not linear, the
load factor is not equal to the inverse of the (design actions)/(design capacity) failure
equation at the end of the detailed calculations for each member in the steel design report.
The combined stress ratio applies only to AISC-ASD, AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990. It
is the ratio of the actual stresses to the permissible stresses for the governing combined stress
equation.
For members designed in accordance with AISC-ASD, AS1250, SABS0162 or AS3990, the
combined stress ratio must be less than 1.0. This means that the combined stresses in the
member are less than the combined permissible stresses.
During the design process, if the load factor is slightly less than 1.0 or if the combined stress
ratio is slightly greater than 1.0, the member is deemed to have failed. In a real design
situation however, you may decide to accept members which are very slightly overloaded. In
order to cater for this reality, SPACE GASS allows you to decrease the load factor limit or
increase the combined stress ratio limit so that the design program can accept a small amount
of overload.
Alternatively, you can increase the load factor limit or decrease the combined stress ratio limit
if you wish to design conservatively.
571
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For the applicable design codes, recommendations for maximum slenderness ratios range
from 180 to 300 for struts, 300 to 350 for ties and 250 to 300 for beams. The maximum values
depend on various factors including whether the predominant load is due to wind or not.
For tension members and members that have zero axial load, there is no slenderness check for
compression effective lengths, however there is a slenderness check for bending effective
lengths. Because of this, you may notice that in some cases the output report shows a value of
l/r (compression) which exceeds the permissible l/r ratio without the member failing.
Alternatively, you can elect to have interrupted checking which causes the program to stop
after each member check, notifying you of the results of the check and allowing you to
manually select other member sizes for checking. If you decide not to try other member sizes,
the program saves the results of the check and moves on to the next member.
If this option is not selected, the design module will design each member independently rather
than matching a single section size to all members that share the same analysis section
property number. For the portal frame example mentioned above, this could results in four
different member sizes rather than two.
This happens regardless of whether the compression effective lengths are calculated from a
buckling analysis or specified directly.
If you select the "Adjust based on flange restraints generally" check box, the minor
compression effective length will be adjusted if:
a. both ends of the segment have full or partial flange restraints; or
b. both ends of the segment have full, partial or lateral flange restraints and the member
is a tube or box section.
If you also select the "Adjust for L restraints on equal flanged I or W shapes" check box then
condition (b) above will also be extended to apply to equal flanged I or W shapes. Note,
572
Steel Member Design
however, that there is some recent doubt as to whether lateral restraints on equal flanged I or
W shapes can restrain the overall cross section laterally and therefore this check box defaults
to off.
This check box only affects the design groups that have eccentric effects enabled in their
design input data. For design groups that have their individual eccentric effects disabled, this
check box setting has no effect.
For tension members with AS4100/NZS3404, however the code allows you to use the above
approach or simply ignore the extra eccentric moments and apply a correction factor (Kt)
which is based on the cross section shape and the location of the point of connection (see
AS4100/NZS3404 clause 7.3.2). By default the steel member design module defaults to using
the Kt factor because it tends to give a more economical design in most cases, however you
can elect to use the eccentric moments approach instead if you wish.
Other factors
Various other factors can also be defined depending on the design code being used. They
include AISC-ASD and AISC-LRFD U and Cb factors, Eurocode UK and Dutch factors, an
AS4600 appendix F switch and HK CP2011 mLT factors.
The HK CP2011 module also allows you to choose between using clause 8.9.2 or
clause 6.8.3. If you choose clause 8.9.2 then the analysis does not need to include initial
member imperfections or P- effects because they are accounted for in the design phase
(although it may be prudent for you to use both P- and P- effects in the analysis anyway).
Alternatively, if you choose clause 6.8.3 then you must include initial member imperfections
and both P- and P- effects in the analysis.
573
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
When all of the information has been entered, the SPACE GASS steel member design/check
proceeds.
If you want to terminate the process before it is finished, just press ESC or the right mouse
button. If you terminate the process in this way, the results for any groups that have already
been designed or checked are saved.
574
Steel Member Design
SPACE GASS has the ability to iterate the analysis-design process until the results converge.
The design sizes can then be printed out and used in the final computations.
You can access the updating tool by answering "Yes" to the "Do you wish to update the
analysis section properties with the new design member sizes?" question at the end of a steel
member design or by selecting "Update Analysis Member Sizes" from the Design menu.
Note that this tool only works if you have run the steel member design module in design mode
(as opposed to check mode).
After an initial design, you can use this tool to update the analysis section property data based
on the new design member sizes. You can also re-run the analysis and design modules, and
automatically iterate the entire update-analysis-design process until the analysis and design
member sizes match.
The iterative procedure does not currently include re-running the dynamic analysis
modules. Hence, if your steel member design is based on some dynamic spectral response
analysis results, you must re-run the dynamic analysis manually for each iteration.
575
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Serviceability check
The SPACE GASS steel member design module does not consider serviceability
requirements other than slenderness effects during the course of a design or check.
This is because there are numerous ways to limit excessive deflections, many of which
require extensive engineering judgement. The only deflections that can easily be checked for
adequacy by an automatic design program such as SPACE GASS are the local member
deflections that apply to each member individually. It is quite appropriate to check local
member deflections for simple beams and columns, however for sway frames and for
members that have been subdivided into smaller segments, the local member deflections
become meaningless.
Take for example a portal frame building that is found to have excessive lateral sway
deflections. The deflections could be reduced in many ways such as by increasing the size of
the columns, increasing the size of the rafters, introducing a haunch, increasing the size of the
haunch, adding extra roof and end wall bracing or by adding an external restraint such as
brickwork.
In order to satisfy serviceability requirements, it is recommend that the frame first of all be
designed to satisfy strength requirements. This includes the initial design and subsequent
analysis-design iterations (see also Updating analysis member sizes). It is then a simple matter
to obtain a graphical display or printout of the deformed geometry shape and simply observe
whether the frame has excessive deflections or not. If the deflections are excessive, you can
increase member sizes manually or add bracing as required, followed by another analysis and
obtain a revised deformed geometry display. If the deflections are satisfactory it is then a
matter of performing a final code check to ensure that the changes have not caused any
members to become inadequate.
576
Steel Member Design
The steps involved in a design are the same as those for a check except that a design tries
various member sizes until it finds one that is adequate, while a check simply tries a single
member size only and saves the results regardless of whether it is adequate or not. This
process is repeated separately for each design group.
In the remainder of this section, the process of trying a member size for compliance
with one of the steel codes will be referred to as "checking" regardless of whether it is done
as part of a steel member design or a steel member check.
577
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The analysis members that make up the design group are assembled together into one
complete design member. The intermediate member stations for each analysis member are
positioned along the design group and then for each flange additional stations are positioned
at the points of flange restraints and at quarter points between adjacent flange restraints.
For each load case being considered, the deflections, forces and moments are calculated at
each station along the entire design group. For single angle sections, they are calculated
relative to the cross section principal axes for AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-
LRFD and AISC-ASD, and relative to the non-principal axes for AS1250, SABS0162,
AS3990, EUROCODE 3 and HK CP2011.
578
Steel Member Design
Design segments
The program begins working its way along the design group until it gets to the end of a
segment. A segment end occurs at the start of the design group, at the end of the design group,
and wherever a full, partial or lateral flange restraint has been applied to the critical flange.
Thus the current design segment is the portion of the design group that extends from the
current critical flange restraint location back to the end of the previous design segment (or
start of the design group).
For each station in the segment, the program does a cross section capacity check using the
forces and moments which occur simultaneously at that point. It also does various member
checks for the segment as a whole using all possible combinations of maximum forces and
moments that occur anywhere in the segment.
579
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Section check
A section check simply considers the capacity of a cross section and is not related to effective
lengths or any other conditions that occur away from the cross section. The forces and
moments used are those which occur simultaneously at the cross section.
580
Steel Member Design
Member check
A member check considers the capacity of a member segment. The member check is affected
by the compression and bending effective lengths of the segment and the shape of the
deflection and bending moment diagrams along the segment. The forces and moments used in
a member check are the maximum values taken from anywhere along the segment.
581
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Critical flange
The critical flange at any point within a segment is assumed to be the compression flange
unless either end of the segment is laterally unrestrained in which case it is assumed to be the
tension flange.
Because the steel member design module can't detect if the member being designed is a
cantilever or not, it is recommended that for cantilevers (for which the critical flange may be
the tension flange) you check that the calculated bending effective length is correct and, if
not, specify it manually.
For more information refer to AS1250 clause 3.3.4.7, AS4100 clause 5.5, SABS0162 clause
7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3, NZS3404 clause 5.5, AS3990 clause 3.3.4.7 or HK CP2011 clause
8.3.
582
Steel Member Design
In the following discussion, the "segment length" is the distance between two adjacent cross
sections that are restrained or between a cross section that is restrained and the end of the
design group. A cross section is assumed to be restrained when a full or partial restraint is
applied to either flange or when a lateral restraint is applied to its critical flange.
The design group in the diagram above consists of three analysis members of different
lengths. The group has full or partial restraints at the ends and three equally spaced lateral
restraints on the top flange. For the bending moment diagram shown, the first top flange
lateral restraint is ineffective because the bottom flange is the critical flange at that point.
Thus, the first segment continues past the first top flange restraint to midspan where the top
flange has become the critical one.
When determining the effective restraint at a cross section, SPACE GASS looks at the
restraint applied to the critical flange, however it also looks at the other flange to see if a
restraint has been applied to it and, if so, whether or not it affects the cross section restraint.
Thus, the effective restraint for the cross section can be dependent on the restraint applied to
both flanges.
In the following table, the "critical flange" is as per the critical flange definition, the "other
flange" is the non-critical flange and the "effective restraint" is the cross section restraint that
SPACE GASS uses in the code check.
For restraint type definitions see also Flange restraints. A C (continuous) flange restraint is
assumed to be equivalent to a series of L (lateral) flange restraints spaced at increments of
1mm for the entire length of the continuous restraint.
583
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
L, P or F L, P, F, S or R F
S or R L, P, F, S or R R
For single angle sections, it is unclear whether or not lateral restraints applied to
either leg are effective in providing any restraint to the section. Consequently, you should
be very careful when applying lateral restraints to single angle sections and you should use
them only if you are sure they are effective in restraining the section. SPACE GASS will
apply them if you specify them and so the decision about whether or not they should be
used is entirely up to you.
584
Steel Member Design
Twist factor
The twist factor kt depends upon the flange restraint conditions and the cross section shape. If
the critical flange switches from top to bottom within the segment, the critical flange
thickness is assumed to be the thickness of the flange at the end of the segment. For AS4100
and NZS3404, kt is calculated from table 5.6.3(1), while for AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950,
HK CP2011, EUROCODE 3 and AS3990 it is taken as 1.0.
585
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The load height factor kl relates to the point of application of gravity loads as specified by the
load height position (see also "Load height position" in Steel member design data). It is
always 1.0 if the loads are applied at or below the member's shear centre, however for non-
vertical members it can exceed 1.0 if the top of the member is subjected to a downwards load
that causes a destabilizing effect.
If the top of the member is loaded within the segment then kl = 1.2 for all codes, except
AS4100 and NZS3404 where kl = 1.4 if both ends of the segment are fully, partially or
laterally restrained or kl = 2.0 if either end is unrestrained.
If the top of the member is not loaded within the segment but shear force is detected at the
end of a segment that is unrestrained then kl = 1.2 for all codes, except AS4100 and NZS3404
where kl = 2.0.
If you specify the load height position as "Shear centre" then kl=1.0 regardless of the loading
condition.
For vertical members, kl=1.0 regardless of the load height position setting or the loading
condition.
The definition of "top of the member" in the above discussion is the side or flange that
is physically on top (ie. furthest from the ground). This definition is different to "top flange"
used elsewhere in this manual which can actually be on the bottom if you have rotated the
member about its own axis (eg. if the member is upside down).
586
Steel Member Design
The lateral rotation factor kr is based solely on the flange restraint conditions. Its value for
some codes is given in the following table. The restraint codes given represent the flange
restraints at each end of the segment under consideration. For example, PP represents partial
restraint at both ends, while PF represents partial restraint at one end and full restraint at the
other end.
End AS3990/
Restraints AS1250 AS4100 SABS0162 NZS3404
RR 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
SR 0.77 0.70 0.77 0.70
FR 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
PR .935 0.85 .935 0.85
LR 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
UR .935 1.00 .935 1.00
SS 0.84 0.70 0.84 0.70
FS .935 0.85 .935 0.85
PS 1.02 0.85 1.02 0.85
LS 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
US 1.02 1.00 1.02 1.00
FF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
PF 1.10 1.00 1.10 1.00
LF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
UF 1.10 1.00 1.10 1.00
PP 1.20 1.00 1.20 1.00
LP 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
UP 1.20 1.00 1.20 1.00
LL 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
UU 1.20 1.00 1.20 1.00
The values of kr in the table are taken from AS1250 clause 5.9, AS4100 table 5.6.3(3),
SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3.5, NZS3404 table 5.6.3(3) and AS3990 clause
5.9.
There are some specific assumptions affecting kr which you should be aware of, as follows:
AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990 do not give specific rules for
calculating kr for all combinations of flange restraints at the ends of the segment. In such cases
interpolation has been used to calculate some of the values of kr given in the table.
The extra restraint condition in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990
which provides partial restraint against lateral rotation (about the cross section minor axis) of
the critical flange is not supported in SPACE GASS.
Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine whether a member is a true cantilever or
not, AS1250 clause 5.9.4, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3(b), BS5950 clause 4.3.5.4/4.3.5.5, HK
CP2011 clause 8..4.3 and AS3990 clause 5.9.4 have not been considered. This may cause the
bending effective length for cantilevers to be underestimated and you should therefore check
the bending effective length for cantilevers calculated by the AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950,
HK CP2011 and AS3990 modules.
587
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
588
Steel Member Design
During a member check, various factors are calculated. In most cases, these factors are largely
dependent on the moments at the ends of the segment under consideration. Some of them,
however depend on the values of moments and/or displacements at mid or quarter points
along the segment. It is not always possible to have stations positioned exactly at the mid or
quarter points required because even though stations are positioned at mid and quarter points
between adjacent flange restraints, segments do not always extend between adjacent flange
restraints (particularly when the critical flange changes due to moment reversal). In such
cases, SPACE GASS simply takes the moment and/or displacement values from the station
nearest to the required point.
For the AS4100 and NZS3404 modules, m is calculated using the formula in clause
5.6.1.1(a)(iii) when the segment is restrained at both ends.
If the segment is unrestrained at one end, AS4100 and NZS3404 require the bending moment
diagram to be matched to one of the three diagrams shown in table 5.6.2. This is very difficult
when the bending moment diagram could be any conceivable shape. Therefore, SPACE
GASS uses m = 0.25 if there is a non-zero moment at the unrestrained end, m = 2.25 if the
mid-segment moment is less than 25% of the restrained end moment, m = 1.25 if the mid-
segment moment is less than 50% of the restrained end moment or otherwise m = 1.0. This is
less conservative than the approach adopted in v12.25.334 and earlier versions.
589
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Eccentric end connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial
compression are normally taken into account by calculating the extra eccentric moments and
then adding them to the normal design moments along the entire length of the design group
(unless they cause a net reduction in the final design moment).
For all codes, the eccentric moments are calculated by multiplying the axial force by the
distance from the centroid of the connected plate to the centroid of the cross section.
590
Steel Member Design
Eccentric end connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial
tension are taken into account in various ways depending on the design code being used.
For AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990, SPACE GASS simply calculates the extra eccentric
moments and then adds them to the normal design moments along the entire length of the
design group provided that they don’t cause a net reduction in the final design moment. This
method is used instead of reducing the effective area of the cross section in accordance with
AS1250 clause 7.3.2, SABS0162 clause 9.2 or AS3990 clause 7.3.2.
The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules also use the above method of calculating and adding
eccentric moments if the Kt method is not used. Alternatively, if the Kt method is used then
Kt is calculated in accordance with AS4100/NZS3404 clause 7.3.2 and used to reduce the
member tensile capacity rather than eccentric moments being added. The Kt method also
applies to I, H or channel sections which are connected by their flanges only. For these
sections, SPACE GASS assumes that the provisions of AS4100/NZS3404 clauses 7.3.2(b)(i)
and (ii) have been met and uses Kt = 0.85.
591
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
When all of the member properties, effective lengths, design loads and other factors have
been calculated, they are fed into the appropriate code specific subroutines to determine the
success or failure of the code check.
During this process the subroutines also calculate the load factor or the combined stress ratio
which is then passed back to SPACE GASS along with many other design result parameters.
If the latest check is more critical than any previous checks for the design group then the
results of the latest check are retained as the governing case until another check further along
the design group yields a smaller load factor or a larger combined stress ratio.
After considering every segment in the design group for each design load case, SPACE GASS
saves the data for the governing section and member check cases and moves on to the next
design group.
592
Steel Member Design
The pass/fail status of each member can also be shown graphically in a color-coded display as
described in "View steel member design results". Filters can also be created to filter members
in accordance with their pass/fail status as described in "Filters".
You can also query individual members graphically to get an abbreviated report showing the
results of the design or check as described in "Query steel member design results".
Reports for single angle sections are in principal axes for AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404,
AS4600, AISC-LRFD, AISC-ASD and IS800.
The section and shear checks are performed at numerous points along each design group.
They consider the capacity of a cross section and are not related to effective lengths or any
other conditions which occur away from the cross section under consideration. The forces and
moments used in a section or shear check are the ones which occur simultaneously at the
cross section. The governing location for the section and shear checks is shown under the
"Start Pos’n" heading.
The member check is performed for each segment between adjacent points of critical flange
restraint. The member check is affected by the axial and bending effective lengths of the
segment and the shape of the deflection and bending moment diagrams along the segment.
The forces and moments used in a member check are the maximum values taken from
anywhere along the segment. The governing segment for the member check has its start and
finish locations shown under the "Start Pos’n" and "Finish Pos’n" headings.
Load factor
The load factor applies only to AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, AS4600, BS5950,
NZS3404, HK CP2011 and IS800. It is the amount by which the design actions can be
increased before the point of failure is reached.
For example, if the steel design returns a load factor of 1.12, you could theoretically increase
your loads by 12%, repeat the analysis and design, and expect the load factor to reduce to
1.00. This is not always the case however, because the non-linearity of the analysis means that
increasing your loads by 12% does not guarantee that the design actions will also increase by
exactly 12%.
593
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
For members designed in accordance with these codes, the load factor must be greater than
1.0. This means that the design actions can be factored up by an amount greater than 1.0
before the member becomes inadequate.
Because the relationship between design actions and design capacity is not linear, the
load factor is not equal to the inverse of the (design actions)/(design capacity) failure
equation at the end of the detailed calculations for each member in the steel design report.
594
Steel Member Design
Note that some of the following general assumptions may be overridden by the code specific
items listed in the sections immediately following this one.
1. Frame imperfections are not automatically allowed for during the design phase. When
applicable (usually for multi-storey frames), you should apply notional horizontal
forces or initial deformations to the analysis model in accordance with the
requirements of the design code.
2. The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or z-axis if the
section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a member can be
easily determined by displaying the member local axes graphically and observing the
direction of the local y-axis (or z-axis if flipped).
3. The top flange of a group as a whole is defined such that it is the same as the top
flange of the first member in the group.
4. The critical flange at any point within a segment is assumed to be the compression
flange unless either end of the segment is laterally unrestrained in which case it is
assumed to be the tension flange. SPACE GASS is not able to determine whether a
loading condition is predominantly due to gravity or wind and you should therefore
check that the above rule is valid for your situation.
5. All section and member capacities are calculated assuming that stiffeners do not exist.
8. For single angle sections, the effective lengths and flange restraints must be input
relative to the non-principal axes. For all other sections, they must be input relative to
the principal axes.
9. The compression effective lengths Lmx and Lmy, used by AS4100 and NZS3404 in
clause 8.4.2.2 for the calculation of Nc when ke=1.0, are assumed to be equal to the
lesser of the total design group length and the normal compression effective lengths
for the segment under consideration. Lmx = MIN(Ltot,Lcmajor) and Lmy =
MIN(Ltot,Lcminor), where Ltot is the total design group length and Lcmajor and
Lcminor are the normal compression effective lengths.
10. The torsion effective length used by AS4100 and NZS3404 is assumed to be equal to
the distance between adjacent full or partial restraints.
595
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
restraint.
14. Member offsets are automatically ignored (skipped over) during a steel member
design/check provided that they occur at the ends of a design group. They are treated
the same as I (ignore) flange restraints.
15. The extra restraint condition in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and
AS3990 that provides partial restraint against lateral rotation (about the cross section
minor axis) of the critical flange is not supported.
16. Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine whether a member is a true
cantilever or not, AS1250 clause 5.9.4, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3(b), BS5950 clause
4.3.5.4/4.3.5.5, HK CP2011 clause 8.3.4.3 and AS3990 clause 5.9.4 have not been
considered. This may cause the bending effective length for cantilevers to be
underestimated and you should therefore check the bending effective length for
cantilevers calculated by the AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990
modules.
17. When calculating kt for AS4100 or NZS3404, if the critical flange switches from top
to bottom within the segment, the critical flange thickness is assumed to be the
thickness of the flange at the end of the segment.
18. When calculating kl, SPACE GASS assumes conservatively that top flange loads
always occur within the segment rather than at the segment end(s).
19. kl is calculated for "downwards" loads regardless of the member orientation and
flange positions. A "downwards" load is assumed to act in the direction from the top
flange to the bottom flange. If you want kl=1.0 for columns, sloping beams or beams
on their side then you should set the load height position to "Shear centre" regardless
of the loaded flange or the load direction.
20. The direction of the transverse load acting on a segment is determined by the sign of
the difference in shear force between the two segment ends.
21. AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990 do not give specific rules for
calculating kr for all combinations of flange restraints at the ends of the segment. In
such cases interpolation has been used to calculate some of the values of kr.
22. Eccentric end connection effects (if not suppressed) are taken into account in different
ways depending on the design code being used. In most cases, the eccentric end
moments are simply added to the normal design moments for the entire design group.
Exceptions are BS5950 which optionally uses the provisions of clauses 4.6.3
(tension) or 4.7.10 (compression) and AS4100 and NZS3404 which use a Kt factor
for tension members (if activated).
23. Where applicable (see previous item), moments due to eccentric end connection
effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial loads are added to the
normal design moments only if they don’t cause a net reduction in the final design
596
Steel Member Design
moment.
24. Eccentric end moments are calculated by multiplying the axial force by the distance
from the centroid of the connected plate to the centroid of the cross section.
25. The major axis of a single or double angle section is assumed to be parallel to the
short leg(s) of the section.
26. Double angle sections are assumed to have no space between the individual angle
sections.
27. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules assume that double angles are
connected together at intermediate points sufficient to ensure that half of the design
axial compressive force for the combined section does not exceed the compressive
capacity of each angle section considered individually using an effective length (for
buckling of the sections away from each other) equal to the distance between
connection points.
28. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules consider only axial forces and shears
for single or double angle sections. Bending moments are not considered. Eccentric
end moments are considered where applicable. The AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011,
EUROCODE 3 and NZS3404 modules consider axial forces, shears (along minor
axis) and bending moments (about both axes) for single or double angle sections.
30. Beam Tees have the major axis parallel to the flange and are therefore assumed to
have their web vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping).
31. Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are assumed to be lying on
their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no flipping).
32. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules do not support column Tee sections.
33. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support welded Tee sections unless they
are beam Tees with d/t<15 (lightly welded longitudinally) or d/t<14 (heavily welded
longitudinally).
34. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules assume that heavily welded (longitudinally) I
and H sections with equal flanges are flame cut. Lightly welded (longitudinally) or
unequal flanged I and H sections and all plate web girders are assumed to be welded
"as rolled".
35. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules do not support welded box sections.
36. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support welded circular hollow sections,
channels or angles.
37. The AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011 and NZS3404 modules assume that channel
sections have equal flanges.
597
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
38. The AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011 and NZS3404 modules assume that angle
sections have uniform plate thicknesses throughout the section.
39. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support solid sections.
40. The BS5950 and HK CP2011 modules assume that solid sections are class 1.
41. When calculating the area removed from the section due to a bolted end connection,
SPACE GASS assumes that the bolts are through the web(s) unless the end
connection type is specified as "F", in which case the bolts are assumed to be through
the flange(s).
42. The area removed from the section due to a bolted end connection is assumed to
apply for a distance of 250mm from each end of the design group.
43. The BS5950 module assumes conservatively that single angle sections are connected
with a single fastener for clause 4.7.10.
44. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules perform a web capacity check in accordance
with appendix I. If the check fails, SPACE GASS treats it as a warning rather than a
failure condition.
45. Serviceability requirements are not considered automatically. They must be checked
manually by direct inspection of displacement diagrams.
48. For the AS4100 and NZS3404 modules, m is calculated using the formula in clause
5.6.1.1(a)(iii) when the segment is restrained at both ends. If the segment is
unrestrained at one end, AS4100 and NZS3404 require the bending moment diagram
to be matched to one of the three diagrams shown in table 5.6.2. This is very difficult
when the bending moment diagram could be any conceivable shape. Therefore,
SPACE GASS uses m = 0.25 if there is a non-zero moment at the unrestrained end,
m = 2.25 if the mid-segment moment is less than 25% of the restrained end moment,
m = 1.25 if the mid-segment moment is less than 50% of the restrained end moment
or otherwise m = 1.0. This is less conservative than the approach adopted in
v12.25.334 and earlier versions..
49. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules do not consider shear force in the major
axis direction.
50. If any term in the steel member design failure equation becomes negative, it is
assumed that the section has failed and a value of 9.99 is used in place of the negative
value.
51. The brace, purlin, girt or other member that provides full, partial or lateral restraint to
the critical flange of a member must be capable of resisting the force required to
provide such restraint. This is not automatically allowed for in the analysis or design.
If you wish to take this into account then you should add the restraint forces to your
applied loads. The restraint forces are code specific and you should refer to the
appropriate clauses for the design code you are using.
598
Steel Member Design
This effect is particularly important for deep beams where the forces required to
restrain the critical flange can be quite high. You should check that your model is
capable of withstanding these forces.
599
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
600
Steel Member Design
601
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
6 Connections
6.2 Connections using bolts
6.2.3 Effect of bolt holes on the shear capacity
C Compressive strength
C.1 Strut formula
C.2 Perry factor and Robertson constant
602
Steel Member Design
Assumptions
3.1.1 Design strength py obtained from fy in SPACE GASS library.
A warning, not a failure is given if py exceeds Us/1.2.
py is not adjusted.
3.4.3 The determination of steel grade for calculating the Ke value is based on the SPACE
GASS library fy value, falling between the ranges specified in Table 9.
3.4.4 The bolt hole area is based on the values specified in the SPACE GASS Steel Member
Design data.
3.5 Solid square and solid circle sections are assumed to be a Class 1.
Solid rectangle is assumed to be an I beam with no flange outstands.
I and Box shapes use the "Generally" limits in Tables 11 and 12.
3.5.5 Unequal flanges for box sections use r1 eq 3.5.5b divided by 2.0 to allow for the 2
webs.
Outstands of box girders are not taken into account for the calculation of r1.
3.6.2.4 When used for webs for channels, webs are assumed to be 40t instead of 120t in
accordance with Table 11 and the use of 3.6.3.
4.2.3 Only vertical projection of inclined box girder web considered in shear capacity.
4.2.5.1 A warning, not a failure is given if the 1.2pyZ limit is reached.
4.2.5.2 Alternative for Class 3 sections used.
4.2.5.3 Alternative for Class 3 sections used.
Alternative with regards to reference H.3 for Class 3 and 4 sections not considered.
4.2.5.5 Bolt holes assumed to be distributed equally between top and bottom flange for
flanges and for webs equally distributed between the tension and compression
zone in bending.
4.3.6.7b Channels are loaded through their shear centre.
4.4.4.2c When using H3 and the section has two webs, the web forces are equally shared
between the webs - class 4 flanges - only the effective parts of the flanges are
used for calculation of flange capacity.
4.4.5 Simplified method used with stiffener spacing equal to infinity.
4.4.5.2 When using H1 to determine qw, sections other than I beams are assumed to be
applied in the same way where there are two webs (boxes), the web capacity is
for each web.
4.6 Full section properties used except where explicitly specified Zxeff and Sxeff.
4.6.2 If no eccentric moments are added and the section's connected elements cause
eccentricity then 4.6.3 used.
4.7.2 The 20% increase in slenderness for alternating restraints has not been allowed for.
4.7.5 Reduced py is used for all welded sections.
Table 23 welded angles, channels and Tees are assumed to be rolled but py is reduced as per
4.7.5.
Notes 2 and 3 not allowed for.
4.7.6c If no eccentric moments are added and the section's connected elements cause
eccentricity then 4.7.10 used.
4.7.10.1 The 20% increase in slenderness for alternating restraints has not been allowed for.
4.7.10.2 If there is a bolt area in one flange only then a single bolt hole is assumed, 80%
reduction allowed for.
4.7.10.4 If there is a bolt hole in the web then a single row is assumed.
4.7.10.5 If there is a bolt hole in the flange then a single row is assumed.
4.8.2.3 Only equal flanged I shapes, box shapes and CHS class 1 or 2 use this clause. Other
sections use 4.8.2.2.
4.8.2.2 App I.3 not used for asymmetric sections.
603
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
604
Steel Member Design
7 Section Classification
7.1 General
7.2 Classification
7.3 Stress Ratios for Classification
7.5 Effective Plastic Modulus
7.5.1 General
7.5.2 I or H Sections with equal flanges
7.5.3 Rectangular hollow sections
7.5.4 Circular hollow sections
7.6 Effective Width method for slender cross sections
7.8 Shift of the centroid of the effective cross section
605
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
8.7.4 Slenderness
8.7.5 Compression resistance
8.7.6 Compressive strength
8.7.7 Eccentric connections
8.8 Tension members under combined axial force and moments
8.9 Compression Members under combined axial force and moments
8.9.1 Cross section capacity
8.9.2 Member buckling resistance
9 Connections
9.3.4.4 Effective area for tension
9.3.4.5 Effective area for shear
Appendix 8.1
Appendix 8.2
Appendix 8.3
Assumptions
3.1.2 Class 1 and 1H steels assumed.
6.8.2(3) Frame and member imperfections are not automatically considered in the analysis,
however if clause 8.9.2 is used instead of clause 6.8.3 then there is no
requirement for member imperfections in the analysis.
1. Mcx and Mcy = Zpy.
7.5.1 I or H sections with unequal flanges Seff = Z as per other sections.
7.6 Same method as BS5950-2000 is adopted to calculate effective section and change in
centroid and properties for slender sections but with HK element limits.
8.2 Beam checked whether fully restrained or not.
8.3.5.2 Mb = Mcx from 8.2.2 if Lateral Torsional Buckling need not be checked.
8.3.5.3 Box sections use this code section.
8.3.5.3 Channels assume that loads pass through shear centre - warning given.
8.4 Webs without intermediate or transverse stiffeners assumed (a = infinity).
8.4.2 Warning given if eq 8.30 not met.
8.4.3 Warning given if eq 8.33 not met.
8.7 No check is done for compressive resistance if clause 6.8.3 is used instead of clause
8.9.2.
8.8 Only eq 8.77 is applied.
8.9.2 If clause 8.9.2 is used instead of clause 6.8.3 then second-order moments are used in
equation 8.79, making it slightly conservative. MLT is max moment in segment,
Mx is max moment in group and My is max moment in segment.
606
Steel Member Design
607
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
608
Steel Member Design
609
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Assumptions
GENERAL
The root radius for square and rectangular tubes is taken as the inside radius.
Flange bolt holes equally divided between flanges.
Web bolt holes equally divided between webs where applicable.
If the design calculates a high Ultimate Load Factor then a default failure equation (Yield
about xx axis) will be returned.
Warning - If a value has exceeded a limit related to a warning, the value is NOT adjusted to
be within that limit, its actual value is used in the calculation.
Section B4.2 Design Wall Thickness for HSS
This issue comes about due to the practice of some steel manufacturers producing HSS
sections with a wall thickness at the very low end of what the specifications allow.
To account for this, the US section libraries supplied with SPACE GASS 12.27 and later
include adjustments to the HSS section properties (depending on the type of HSS section)
and no extra adjustments are made to their properties during an AISC 360-10 design or
check. In SPACE GASS 12.26 and earlier, the US section libraries contained non-adjusted
properties for HSS sections and so to allow for this their wall thickness was multiplied by
0.93 during an AISC 360-10 design or check.
It is therefore important that you match the version of the US library with the same
version of SPACE GASS, otherwise unsafe designs of HSS sections could result. It is
also important that you don't use HSS sections from SPACE GASS 12.26 and earlier
with other non-US design codes.
Section B4.3b. Net Area
1/16" or 2 mm allowance for hole diameter already assumed to be allowed for in the design
data input.
No allowance for chain holes made.
Chapter D Design of Members for Tension
Pin connected members not checked.
Block shear strength not checked.
Eyebars not checked.
Section D3. Effective Net Area
A number of factors are unknown ie the length of the connection, number of bolts in line
and the type of the weld used. The user has the choice to leave U as 1.0 via the U flag or
turn it on and use the conservative approach as detailed in the Commentary Page 16.1-250
where the net area of the connected elements are used as Ae. A U value is returned to
indicate the reduction from the net area ie U = Ae/An.
Circular, square or rectangular solid sections plus circular tubes use a worst case
assumption of U = 0.75.
Section E5 Single Angle Compression members
Section E5.(a) used - group length used as they are individual members or web members.
Section F
Outstands on box girders treated as tee flanges.
Non double symmetric box girders are not supported by F7, each flange and web is still
checked individually.
No allowance made for loads placed above or below the centroid.
No allowance for cantilevers in calculation of Cb.
Section F10. Single Angles
Bending about principal axis only.
Section F11.1
610
Steel Member Design
Yielding of solid bars, warning issued if slenderness limit exceeded, capacities still
calculated.
Section F13.2 Proportions limits for I shaped members
Warning given if limits exceeded, calculations still done even though limits have been
exceeded.
Section G
No reduction in shear areas for bolt holes.
No web transverse stiffeners assumed.
No shear tension field action is considered (Sect G3).
Solid circle shear done same as CHS with wall thickness equal to radius.
Section G4 Single Angles
Star shapes have double shear capacity of equivalent single angle.
Section G5 Rectangular HSS and Box shaped members
Box sections with different thickness flanges and possibly outstands, the element that
produces the worst Cv value is used as the controlling cv and the sum of all of the
contributing shear elements is used for Aw.
If there is a flange outstand on the box girder these are treated like a T stem kv = 1.2.
Section G7 weak axis shear
If any torsion then equation H3-8 used.
Section H1.3
Applied if section is rolled compact in flexure about major axis (axial class ignored).
611
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
612
Steel Member Design
613
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Assumptions
Torsion is not considered.
No block or shear lag effects considered.
Hybrid girders not considered.
Webs are unstiffened.
Flange bolt holes equally divided between flanges.
Web bolt holes equally divided between webs where applicable.
If the design calculates a high Ultimate Load Factor then a default failure equation (Yield
about xx axis) will be returned.
3.2.6 G = 80769.231.
6.2.3(5) Tension – Channels connected only through the web and tees connected only through
the flange, the effective area is taken as the effective area of the connected element plus half
the area of the outstanding elements.
6.2.6(2) check is done even if there is torsion (torsion is not considered).
6.2.6(5) smallest flange area used.
6.2.9.1(4) I, channel and box shapes considered.
6.2.9.2(1) equation (6.44) used.
6.3.2.2(2) Mcr is calculated using EN 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F, including channel and unequal
angles.
Table A.2 Cmi0 based on member group.
Table B3 the highest Cm value calculated for uniform or concentrated load is used.
Table B.3 Cmy based on member group.
Table B.3 Cmz based on member segment.
Table B.3 CmLT based on member segment.
EN 1993-1-5:2006 5.2 Design resistance to shear – No contribution from flanges allowed.
EN 1993-1-8:2005 3.10.3 – 1 bolt, 1 row assumed.
614
Steel Member Design
SECTION 2 ELEMENTS
2.1 SECTION PROPERTIES
2.1.1 General
2.1.2 Design procedures
2.1.2.1 Full section properties
2.1.2.2 Effective section properties
(b) local instabilities
2.1.3 Dimensional limits
2.1.3.1 Maximum flat-width-to-thickness ratios
(a)(i),(b),(c)
2.1.3.4 Maximum web depth-to-thickness ratio
(a) unreinforced webs
2.2 EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF STIFFENED ELEMENTS
2.2.1 Uniformly compressed stiffened elements
2.2.1.1 General
2.2.1.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
(a),(c),(i),(ii)
2.2.1.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
(a) Procedure I
2.2.3 Stiffened elements with stress gradient
2.2.3.1 General
2.2.3.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
2.2.3.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
2.3 EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF UNSTIFFENED ELEMENTS
2.3.1 Uniformly compressed unstiffened elements
2.3.1.1 General
2.3.1.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
2.3.1.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
2.3.2 Unstiffened elements and edge stiffeners with stress gradient
2.3.2.1 General
2.3.2.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
2.3.2.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
2.4 EFFECTIVE WIDTH OF UNIFORMLY COMPRESSED ELEMENTS WITH AN
EDGE STIFFENER
2.4.1 General
2.4.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
2.4.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
615
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
SECTION 3 MEMBERS
3.1 GENERAL
3.2 MEMBERS SUBJECT TO AXIAL TENSION
3.2.1 Design for axial tension
3.2.2 Nominal section capacity
3.2.3 Distribution of forces
3.2.3.1 End connections providing uniform force distribution
3.2.3.2 End connections providing non-uniform force distribution
3.3 MEMBERS SUBJECT TO BENDING
3.3.1 Bending moment
3.3.2 Nominal section moment capacity
3.3.2.1 General
3.3.2.2 Based on initiation of yielding
3.3.3 Nominal member moment capacity
3.3.3.1 General
3.3.3.2 Members subject to lateral buckling
3.3.3.2.1 Open section members
3.3.3.2.2 Closed box members
3.3.3.3 Members subject to distortional buckling
3.3.3.4 Beams having one flange through-fastened to sheeting
3.3.4 Shear
3.3.4.1 Shear capacity of webs without holes
3.4 CONCENTRICALLY LOADED COMPRESSION MEMBERS
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Sections not subject to torsional or flexural-torsional buckling equation 3.4.2(1)
only
3.4.3 Doubly- or singly-symmetric sections subject to torsional or flexural-torsional
buckling
3.4.4 Point-symmetric sections
3.4.5 Non-symmetric sections
3.4.6 Singly-symetric sections subject to distortional buckling
3.4.7 Columns with one flange through-fastened to sheeting
3.6 CYLINDRICAL TUBULAR MEMBERS
3.6.1 General
3.6.2 Bending
3.6.3 Compression
3.6.4 Combined bending and compression
Assumptions
fy and fu are read directly from section properties. No reductions or increases in fy from
Clause 1.5.1.2 - Strength increase resulting from cold forming, or Clause 1.5.1.4(b) -
Ductility.
Shapes with intermediate stiffeners and stiffened lips are not supported. If they are used then
the resulting design or check will be conservative because the effect of the stiffeners will not
have been taken into account.
Unlipped (plain) Cee flanges are assumed to be an unstiffened element and the web a
stiffened element.
616
Steel Member Design
Webs of top hats that have edge stiffened bottom flanges are assumed to be a stiffened
element (ie. flanges are assumed to provide sufficient edge support to the web to have the web
classified as stiffened).
A ratio of effective section I to gross section I is included in the design report to provide a
deflection factor approximating the increase in gross section deflections at the reported design
load forces and moments. The SPACE GASS analysis deflections are based on gross sections.
Clause 1.3.39 - a single lateral restraint 'L' not combined with any other flange restraint is not
recognised as an effective restraint for a segment as they do not meet the requirements of a
partially retrained cross section for a segment.
Clause 1.3.39 - a continuous lateral restraint 'C' is recognised as a restraint and assumed to
meet the requirements of a partially restrained cross section for a segment.
Clause 2.1.1 - full section properties and yield strengths read directly from section properties.
Clause 2.1.2.1 - actual shape including bends is used to calculate effective section properties.
Clause 2.1.3.1 - failure if elements exceed prescribed ratios, warning given if elements exceed
clause note's ratios.
Clause 2.1.3.3 - shear lag effects not considered. A warning given if group length < 30 *
flange width.
Clause 2.2.1.3 - procedure I used, Procedure II not used.
Clause 3.2.3.1 - it is assumed (a) and (b) are satisfied for concentric end connections.
Clause 3.2.3.2 - for channels connected by flanges only, it is assumed b(i) and b(ii) are
satisfied.
Clause 3.3.3.2.1(b) - Iyc for zeds taken as geometric axis Iy/2.
Clause 3.3.2.3 - section moment capacity based on inelastic reserve capacity NOT considered.
Clause 3.3.3 - unequal angles, equation 3.3.3.2(13) used for bending in x and y axis.
Clause 3.3.3 - Mo is NOT calculated using a rational flexural-torsional buckling analysis.
Clause 3.3.3.3 - only lipped cee, lipped cee back to back and zed sections considered for
distortional buckling .
Clause 3.3.3.2.1(a) - alternative for Z-sections restrained by sheeting against lateral
movement NOT considered.
Clause 3.3.3.4 - only (i),(ii),(iii),(iv),(v),(vii)(vii based on group length) requirements are
checked, assumed other requirements checked by user.
Clause 3.3.4.1 - no shear buckling check on CHS sections.
Clause 3.3.4 - for top hat sections, shear in x axis carried by top flange and horizontal
component of web, shear in y axis carried by vertical component of the web.
Clause 3.4.1 - holes have not been allowed for in the calculation of Ae for Nc.
Clause 3.4.2 - grade 550 shapes less than 0.9mm thickness not supported.
Clause 3.4.2 - clause notes not applied. User to specify effective lengths in steel member
design group properties.
Clause 3.4.3 - alternative equation 3.4.3(2) not considered.
Clause 3.4.3 - equal angles, if no area reduction due to fy, foc based on maximum
compressive length and smallest radius of gyration in either axis.
Clause 3.4.6 - only lipped single or back to back cee considered for axial compression
distortional buckling.
Clause 3.4.6 - Fod calculated using Appendix D2.
Clause 3.4.7 - s = 0.5 (fastener in centre of flange), smallest flange width used for zed
sections.
Clause 3.4.7 - only (i),(ii),(iii),(iv),(v),(vi),(ix),(x based on group length) requirements are
checked, assumed other requirements checked by user.
Clause 3.5 - equations 3.5.1(2) and 3.5.2(2) are included in section checks. Msx and Msy are
used in equation 3.5.1(2)for the section check.
Clause 3.5.1 - equations 3.5.1(1) and 3.5.1(2) are included in member checks, equation
3.5.1(3) is used if N*/phicNc <= 0.15.
Clause 3.5.1 - actual group length used for L in the L/1000 centroid shift for angles.
Clause 3.5.2 - equation 3.5.2(1) is included in member checks only.
617
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Clause 3.5.2 - equation 3.5.2(1) the axial tension term is conservatively ignored (N* is always
zero) if axial tension exists.
Clause 3.6.3 - axial compression section capacity for CHS is based on gross area.
Appendix D - for zeds, the widest flange is used determining flange and lip properties.
Appendix D - flange and lip properties represented as square corners and centrelines.
Appendix D3 - no reduction in lambda for any bracing interval.
618
Steel Member Design
SECTION 2 MATERIALS
2.1 General
2.2 Structural Steel
2.2.4 Properties
SECTION 5 LIMIT STATE DESIGN
5.4 Strength
5.4.1 Design strength
5.5 Factors Governing the Ultimate Strength
5.6 Limit State of Serviceability
SECTION 6 DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS
6.1 Tension Members
6.2 Design Strength Due to Yielding of Gross Section
6.3 Design Strength Due to Rupture of Critical Section
SECTION 7 DESIGN OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
7.1 Design Strength
7.3 Design Details
7.3.1 Thickness of Plate Elements
7.3.2 Effective Sectional Area (Ae)
SECTION 8 DESIGN OF MEMBERS SUBJECTED TO BENDING
8.2 Design Strength in Bending (Flexure)
8.4 Shear
8.6 Design of Beams and Plate Girders with Solid Webs
8.6.1.1a and 8.6.1.2a Minimum web thickness when transverse stiffeners are
not provided
8.6.2 Sectional Properties
8.10 Bending in a Non-Principal Plane
8.10.2 Member loaded in a non-principal plane
SECTION 9 MEMBER SUBJECTED TO COMBINED FORCES
9.1 General
9.2 Combined Shear and Bending
9.3 Combined Axial Force and Bending Moment
SECTION 12 DESIGN AND DETAILING FOR EARTHQUAKE LOADS
12.1 General
12.2 Load and Load Combinations
12.5 Columns
12.7 Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)
12.8 Special Concentrically Braced Frames (SCBF)
12.9 Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)
12.10 Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF)
12.11 Special Moment Frames (SMF)
ANNEX E ELASTIC LATERAL TORSIONAL BUCKLING
E-1 Elastic Critical Moment
619
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
All of the errors in the following list cause SPACE GASS to abort the design or check of the
current design group and move on to the next group. If an error occurs during a design or an
uninterrupted check, the program continues without alerting you and puts the error message in
the output report. Alternatively, if an error occurs during an interrupted check, the program
pauses to display the message and, if it is a section related error, gives you the opportunity to
manually select other sections to be checked.
Warnings also appear in the output report but they do not cause SPACE GASS to abort the
design or check of the current design group.
There is a limit of 500 stations per analysis member which must be enough for the number of
intermediate member stations that you specify, plus the extra stations at the ends, at
concentrated member loads and at flange restraint points. The solution is to either add a node
at midspan of the analysis member which has too many stations or decrease the number of
stations that you specify at the start of the member design/check phase.
620
Steel Member Design
WARNING: Not all load cases considered have been analysed non-linearly
For AS4100 and NZS3404, a warning appears in the output report if any member
design/check load cases have only been analysed linearly.
621
Steel Connection Design
Steel connection design
The SPACE GASS steel connection design module lets you design or check any of the
connections in a structural model.
A video showing the steel connection design module in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/connect.
623
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Note that if you haven't purchased the steel connection design module, you can still run it in a
free trial mode that limits you to using minimum design actions, and prevents you from
exporting or saving the job. All other features are fully activated.
The connection design module is currently limited to open sections, however connections for
closed (tubular) sections are currently under development and are expected to become
available in the second half of 2014.
624
Steel Connection Design
Note that most connections require two members to be selected, however for base plates,
single member stiff seats and some of the tubular connections, only one member needs to
be selected.
You must then select the type of connection you want from the following table. Connections
that are invalid for the number of members you selected will be disabled in the table.
625
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Alternatively, if you wish to make it the same as a connection that has already been created,
you can click the "Copy from Existing Connection" button and then select from a list of the
existing connections.
626
Steel Connection Design
Note that if your model already contains connections, you can see which ones are attached to
a particular member by selecting that member, clicking the right mouse button, choosing
"Steel Connection Design" from the menu and, if the selected member already has
connections they will be displayed in the following table. You can then click "Add New
Connection" to create a new connection for that member or edit one of its existing ones.
Regardless of which of the above methods you used, the connection is then designed (or
checked if you have copied from an existing connection) and the results are presented in the
connection editor shown below.
627
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
From there, you can examine the connection, click the Ok button to save and exit if you
happy with it, or make changes to customize it to your exact requirements.
Connection viewer
The connection viewer in the right-hand side of the editor gives you a realistic 3D rendered
view of the connection.
You can zoom, pan and rotate the image using the mouse in the normal way.
Or you can click the buttons at the top of the connection viewer to do a "Zoom fit", display
annotated 2D elevations or switch back to the 3D rendered image.
628
Steel Connection Design
629
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Input/edit fields
In order to edit the connection, you can change any of the data fields in the left-hand side
panel. Some of the key input fields are as follows:
Connection number
This is the unique identification number of each connection. By default it is set to the node
number at the connection, however if that number is already taken by another connection then
it uses the next available number. You can manually set it to comply with whatever
numbering scheme you prefer.
Design code
Currently only AS4100 is available.
Title
You can specify an optional title that helps you to identify each connection. If you leave it
blank then the connection is referred to by its number and connection type.
Connection type
If you wish to change the connection type to one of a similar category then you can do so with
this field. For example, you could change a bolted end plate to a welded moment connection
or a web side plate to a flexible end plate, however you couldn't change a bolted end plate to a
web side plate because they are in different categories. If you wish to change to a connection
of a different category then you must click the "Change Connection Type" button on the right
side of the editor and then re-select from the table of connection types.
630
Steel Connection Design
Load cases
If you want to consider all load cases then this field should be left blank, otherwise you
should type in your desired list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes). Alternatively,
you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then select the load cases you
want from the list that appears as shown below.
Note that if you haven't purchased the steel connection design module, you can still run it in a
free trial mode that limits you to using minimum design actions. When running in this mode,
any load cases you type into the "Load cases" field are ignored and you can't turn off the
"Minimum design actions" option.
If you change one of the input fields that could be overwritten by a design, the connection
becomes locked. This is a safety feature that guards against you inadvertently clicking the
"Design" button and losing your changes. If you really want to design the connection after
making changes that lock it then you must first click the padlock button to unlock it.
631
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Note that some input fields do not cause the connection to be locked, as they are input fields
only and are not overwritten when you perform a design. Examples of these are bolt strength,
bolting procedure, weld strength, etc.
Locking a connection
If you wish to prevent any further changes to a connection that isn't already locked, you can
lock it by clicking the padlock button. This will stop any of the components of the connection
from being changed if a batch design is performed via the connection manager.
Auto check
If the "Auto check" option is ticked then a check is automatically done as soon as you make a
change to any component of your connection. If it is unticked then no checking is done until
you click the "Check" button.
Status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the editor indicates whether the connection has passed, failed
or passed with a warning. It includes the critical load case, the utilization ratio and a brief
explanation of the failure mode or warning message. A green line indicates it has passed, red
indicates failure and yellow is for a pass with a warning message. All of these colors can be
changed via the "Preferences" button.
Key diagrams
The symbols used in the connection input fields match the ASI design guides, however some
of the commonly used ones are also shown in key diagrams that you can view by clicking the
"Key Diagram" button.
632
Steel Connection Design
Hiding components
If you wish to examine components of the connection that may be difficult to see or partially
obscured, you can turn on or off the members, plates, bolts or welds using the buttons shown
below. They are all on by default.
633
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Reset
If you wish to undo all the changes made to a connection (except for its connection number
and title), you can click the "Reset" button. This will put it back to its default state, the same
as if you deleted the connection and then re-created it.
Reports
A single report (including a graphical representation of the connection) for the connection
currently in the editor can be obtained by clicking the "Report" button. Alternatively, you can
generate text reports for multiple connections via the report panel of the connection manager
or via the normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window. Refer to
"Connection reports" for more information.
Exporting
You can export the current connection to a CAD system via the "DXF" or "DWG" buttons. It
can then be imported into AutoCAD or any other program that supports those formats.
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various connection parameters and colors. For more
information refer to "Connection preferences".
634
Steel Connection Design
Infotips
Once you have created some connections, you can hover over a node or member in your
model to see which connections are attached to it.
635
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can get to the connection manager by clicking the button in the top toolbar of the
renderer or via its Design menu.
Connection table
You can click on any connection in the table to see it in the connection manager viewer or
you can scroll through them by using the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard. You can
double-click any connection in the table to open it in the connection editor or alternatively
you could use the "Edit Connection" button at the bottom of the table.
The colored blocks in the first column signify whether the connection has passed (green),
failed (red), passed with a warning (yellow) or has not yet been designed or checked (white).
If the colored block contains a small padlock then it means that the connection is locked
and cannot be designed unless you unlock it first or tick the "Include locked connections"
option below when designing in batch mode. By hovering over the colored block for a
particular connection you can obtain its critical load case, utilization ratio, failure mode (if
failed) or warning message (if there is one). Note that any of the colors can be changed via
the "Preferences" button.
636
Steel Connection Design
The second column indicates whether the connection has been design ("D") or checked ("C").
The remaining columns list the members involved in each connection, the connection type
and its title.
Connections can be added or deleted by using the "Add Connection" or "Delete Connection"
buttons at the bottom. It is recommended that new connections are added by using the
procedure explained in "Creating and editing connections" rather than via the "Add
Connection" button here.
Batch design/check
You can use this section of the manager to design or check all of your connections or just
some of them. This will be required from time to time if your model has been changed and/or
re-analysed.
Connections
If you want to design/check all connections then this field should be left blank, otherwise you
should type in your desired list of connections (separated by commas or dashes).
637
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then select the
connections you want from the list that appears as shown below.
Load cases
If you want to consider all load cases then this field should be left blank, otherwise you
should type in your desired list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes). Alternatively,
you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then select the load cases you
want from the list that appears as shown below.
Check
Tick this option if you want the locked connections (marked with in the first column) to be
checked. These are the connections that have been locked manually via the padlock button or
locked automatically due to changes made to them in the connection editor. They will simply
be checked for adequacy and none of their components or design parameters will be changed
during the check. Note that if the "Design" option is unticked then the locked and unlocked
connections will be checked.
638
Steel Connection Design
Design
Tick this option if you want the unlocked connections (not marked with in the first
column) to be designed. During the design some of their components may be changed if the
model or the design actions have changed since the last design.
Reports
Text reports for multiple connections can be generated by filling out the following form and
then clicking the "Generate Report" button. Alternatively, you can click the "Report" button
in the connection editor to obtain a report (including a graphical representation of the
connection) for the connection currently in the editor. You can also obtain text reports via the
normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window. Refer to "Connection
reports" for more information.
To export from the connection table you should select all of the connections to be exported,
click the right mouse button, select "Export" and then choose the desired export format. To
import, just click the right mouse button and choose "Import".
Note that the data being exported/imported is limited to the connection number, the
associated member numbers, the connection type and its title. None of the detailed connection
data is included. This means that any changes you have made to a connection will not be
included in the exported file and will be lost if you then re-import the file. For designed
connections however, once you import the data and re-design the connections, all of the
detailed connection data will be reinstated.
639
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various connection parameters and colors. For more
information refer to "Connection preferences".
640
Steel Connection Design
Design considerations
Design procedure
The design procedure varies for each connection type, however the general procedure is as
follows:
1. An initial plate size is chosen from the plate library, starting with the smallest size.
2. An initial bolt size and bolt count is chosen from the bolt library, starting with the
smallest size. The bolt count depends on the bolt size, the plate size and the
connection type.
3. An initial weld is chosen from the weld library, starting with the smallest size.
4. A number of checks are performed to determine the adequacy of each component and
the overall adequacy of the connection. If everything passes then the design stops. If
not, it continues as follows.
5. If any weld checks fail, the weld size is incremented (or is changed from a fillet to a
butt weld) and the procedure returns to step 4. If the maximum weld size has been
reached without a solution, the procedure continues as follows.
6. If any bolt checks fail, the bolt size is incremented and the procedure returns to step 3.
If the maximum bolt size has been reached without a solution, the procedure
continues as follows.
7. If any plate checks fail, the plate size is incremented and the procedure returns to step
2. If the maximum plate size has been reached without a solution then the connection
fails.
Note that the actual procedure is somewhat more complicated than described above due to the
differing nature of the interaction between the plates, bolts and welds for each connection
type.
Design actions
Some of the design actions that occur at a connection are not relevant for every connection
type. The design actions considered for each connection type are listed in the following table.
641
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Moment baseplate
Tubular Connections
Slotted end plate
Welded tee end plate
Flattened end
Bolted end plate splice
Bolted moment end plate
KN gap
KN overlap
KT gap
KT overlap
Mitred knee
Note that tubular connections containing a gusset plate and involving multiple members
consider the shear forces and moments generated by the eccentricity of the connected
members.
642
Steel Connection Design
Connection reports
Text reports can be generated via the following form in the connection manager, via the
normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window or via the "Report" button
in the connection editor.
After specifying which connections are to be included in the report and ticking the other
desired options in the above form, you should click the "Generate Report" button.
The following report is for a single connection that was generated from within the connection
editor.
643
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
644
Steel Connection Design
Connection preferences
You can change the defaults for various connection parameters such as dimensions, size
ranges, strength grades, colors and other options.
Note that not all parameters are used in all connections. For example, the default bolt gauge is
overridden by other requirements in the bolted end plate connection and others.
The bolt size, weld size and plate thickness ranges limit the size of the bolts, welds and plates
in a design and allow you to exclude sizes that are unavailable or not desired.
Most colors can also be changed and you can see the immediate effect of your changes in the
sample image on the right and in the sample pass/warning/fail status bars at the bottom.
645
Concrete Beam Design
Concrete beam design
The SPACE GASS reinforced concrete beam design module lets you design or check any
reinforced concrete beams in a structural model.
A video showing the reinforced concrete beam design module in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/rcbeam.
Note that if you haven't purchased the concrete beam module, you can still run it in a free
trial mode that limits you to using predefined cross section dimensions, and prevents you from
exporting or saving the job. All other features are fully activated.
Refer to "Creating and editing concrete beams", "The concrete manager" and "Concrete beam
preferences" for full details of the concrete beam design module.
647
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
648
Concrete Beam Design
Note that the reinforced concrete beam module does not let you input the cross section
shape or dimensions. The cross section geometry is taken from the beam's section
properties and must have been defined earlier by you using the shape builder.
The beam is then designed and the results are presented in the concrete beam editor shown
below.
649
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
From there, you can examine the beam, click the Ok button to save and exit if you happy with
it, or make changes to customize it to your exact requirements.
Before accepting the design results, you must ensure that the beam's supports have been
correctly detected! See "Supports" below for further information.
Blue may also be used in some circumstances to display other types of messages.
650
Concrete Beam Design
Data panel
The data panel on the left of the beam editor lets you make changes to the design data which
are then reflected in the diagrams and tables in the concrete beam editor. More information
about specific items in the data panel is presented in the following sections below.
651
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
652
Concrete Beam Design
Many of the input parameters affect both checks and designs (eg. ultimate load case list,
minimum design actions, cover, etc), whereas other parameters are design-specific (eg. design
priorities, bar size ranges, etc) or check-specific (eg. bar sizes, layers, etc). If you change a
parameter that affects both checks and designs then the previous action (ie. check or design)
will be repeated, whereas if you change a check-specific or design-specific parameter then it
will perform the action appropriate for that change.
Each time you make a change that triggers an automatic re-design or re-check there is a small
pause while the action is performed. If you don't want this to happen or if it becomes
annoying you should untick the "Auto" option at the bottom and then just click the Design or
Check buttons whenever you're ready.
If you have made changes to the reinforcement or layers then the beam will become locked to
guard against you accidently performing a design and losing your changes. If you really want
to do a design then you must click the red locked button first to unlock it.
General data
In this panel you can specify the beam number, design code, descriptive title, analysis
member list, load case lists and torsion switch. The beam number and analysis member list
are normally predefined based on which members you selected when you created the concrete
beam, however you can change them here if required.
It is important that you correctly specify the load case lists and don't just leave them blank.
The ultimate load cases are the ones that the strength design is based on and they are usually
the combination load cases that have been factored up to ultimate. The serviceability load
cases are used to calculate the short term deflections based on the cracked moments of inertia.
They are usually the short term primary live load and wind load cases. Finally, the sustained
load cases are used to calculate the long term deflections based on creep and usually consist
of just the long term dead loads. Neither the serviceability or sustained load cases are used in
the design calculations.
If you leave the ultimate load case list blank then all analysed load cases will be considered,
whereas if you leave the serviceability or sustained load case lists blank then they will not be
considered, effectively rendering them inactive.
If you wish to consider torsion then you should tick the "Torsion" checkbox. Enabling torsion
requires extra longitudinal reinforcement to resist the torsion moment. For AS3600 you can
specify "Indirect" torsion if torsional strength is not required for the equilibrium of the
653
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
structure and the torsion in the beam is induced solely by the angular rotation of adjoining
members. For further information refer to AS3600 clause 8.3.2.
When specifying load case lists, you can either list them directly, or you can click the "..."
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as shown below.
Design priorities
When performing a design, the module evaluates many solutions (sometimes hundreds),
discards the impractical ones and then sorts the rest according to the "Design Priority" setting
that you have selected. For example, if you have selected "Minimum bars" then it will put the
solution that has the minimum number of bars first and present that as the optimal solution.
"Minimum steel" gives the most efficient design in terms of total area of steel, however it
usually results in many different bar sizes throughout the beam and so is often impractical.
"Minimum layers" or "Minimum bars" give the best results in most circumstances.
654
Concrete Beam Design
By default there are five "Zones per span", consisting of a zone at the supports at each end of
the span plus three zones in the span. You can change the number of zones per span or, if you
want different numbers of zones in some spans, you should click the "..." button and specify
the number of zones in each span individually.
If you tick the "Same bar size in all zones" option then a bar that continues through multiple
zones will maintain a constant size.
For "T" or "L" beams, if the top bars don't fit inside the stirrups and "Keep inside stirrups" is
not ticked then the excess bars will be placed in the slab or flange.
During the shear design, the stirrups are kept at the size you specify and only their spacing is
changed. The stirrup size is always constant for the entire beam.
The "Top and bottom bar size ranges" simply limit the size of bars that will be used in a
design.
The "Layer spacing" is the centerline distance between bars in adjacent layers.
For AS3600, the "Crack control" requirements are more stringent if the beam is in an exterior
environment. For further information refer to AS3600 clause 8.6.1.
For IS456, the "Effective width" of a "T" or "L" beam depends on whether the beam is
integrated with a slab or is an isolated beam. For further information refer to IS456 clause
23.1.2.
Zones
By default there are five zones per span, consisting of a zone at the supports at each end of the
span plus three zones in the span. The number of zones per span can be changed in the beam
data panel described above.
In the zones panel you can change the current zone by selecting it in the "Zone" field at the
top or you can cycle through them by clicking the "Prev" or "Next" buttons. The current zone
655
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
is highlighted in the beam view panel at the top, in the bending moment, shear force or
deflection diagram in the middle, and in the cross section panel.
For each zone you can specify the number of layers, the bars per layer and the bar sizes. You
can also specify the stirrup details and, for AS3600, the Vuc criterion for crack control in
accordance with clause 8.2.7.4. Whenever you make changes to the reinforcement or layers,
the changes are locked to guard against you doing an accidental design and losing your
changes. If you really want to perform a design you must first unlock the beam before you can
click the "Design" button as described in "Checking and Designing" above.
The "Minimum top/bot steel (% of max)" parameters place a lower limit on the area of steel in
the current zone based on a percentage of the maximum area of steel used elsewhere in the
beam. For example, if the maximum top area of steel in the beam is 2575mm^2 and you have
specified a "Min top steel (% of max)" of 33% then the top area of steel for that zone will be
limited to no less than 850mm^2.
The "Copy to all zones" buttons allow you to copy the data from the current zone to all other
zones in the beam.
Development lengths
Development lengths are calculated automatically based on the bar size, bar type, end
anchorage, concrete properties and bar stress. They are included in the reports and are
displayed in the beam view panel. To see them more clearly you can turn them on or off in the
beam view panel by clicking the "View development lengths" button.
Bar anchorage
Bars can be left straight at the ends of the beam or they can be hooked or cogged.
656
Concrete Beam Design
Cover
The cover is specified as the clear distance from the edge of the bars and stirrups to the edge
of the concrete.
Moment redistribution
Moment redistribution allows you to reduce the bending moments at the supports with a
resulting increase in the span moments. It is generally only applied to the internal supports of
statically indeterminate beams, but you can also choose to redistribute the moments at the
beam's end supports if appropriate. When moment redistribution is activated you must choose
the amount of redistribution and specify whether that amount applies at the support
centerlines or at the faces of the supports. During moment redistribution the shear forces are
also adjusted to maintain static equilibrium.
Moment redistribution should be used with utmost care and if used inappropriately could
result in unsafe designs. You should ensure that there is adequate rotation capacity in
critical moment regions to allow the assumed redistribution of bending moments to be
achieved.
Supports
The beam's supports are automatically detected based on node restraints and steps in the shear
force diagram, however it is possible that for some beams, supports may be missed or non-
existent supports may be detected. The supports are shown in the bending moment, shear
force and deflection diagrams as small black triangles and so it is easy for you to visually see
if they are correct or not.
Because the beam design or check relies on knowing where the supports are, it is
imperative that the supports are correct before you accept any results.
657
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
If a support occurs at a node that doesn't have a vertical node restraint, such as if the beam is
supported on columns or other beams, it is detected by measuring the upwards step in the
shear force diagram and if the shear step exceeds the "Shear step threshold" percentage then a
support is assumed to exist at that location. The shear step threshold is determined by
calculating the maximum shear force anywhere in the beam from all analysed load cases and
then multiplying it by the threshold percentage that you specify. 5% has been found to
produce good results, but if supports are being missed or non-existent supports are being
detected then you should adjust the threshold until all the supports are found correctly.
You can also zoom, pan and rotate the beam to show the dimensions, cross section and
reinforcement in more detail.
658
Concrete Beam Design
You can also click the "2D View" tab to display a 2D drawing of the beam.
The buttons at the top of the panel let you do a "zoom fit" or quickly switch to a side view or
"30,10" view. You can also turn on/off the stirrups, main bars, development lengths or
dimensions for a clearer view.
After a design, the critical zone is selected and is shown shaded in the moment, shear and
deflection diagrams. You can also click on any zone in the diagram to select that zone so that
its reinforcement and other details are shown in the data panel on the left, and its dimensions
and reinforcement are displayed in the cross section panel at the bottom of the editor.
The green lines above and below the bending moment envelope represent the bending
capacity of the beam and give a very good indication of how efficient your beam design is.
The closer they track the bending moment envelope the more efficient your beam design is.
Note however that if torsion is included then the capacity lines may overstate the bending
659
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
capacity because some of the steel will be required to resist torsion and will not be available
for bending. In this case there will be a gap between the bending moment envelope and the
capacity lines, with the gap representing the reduction in bending capacity due to the torsion
requirement. If minimum design actions govern then there may also be a significant gap
between the capacity lines and the moment envelope.
You can hover the mouse cursor over any part of the diagram to show the underlying values
at the cursor's location.
You can also zoom the diagram by placing the mouse cursor at the desired location and then
using the mouse scrollwheel. If the zoom feature doesn't work then it is because the diagram
doesn't have focus, in which case you should click on it and then try again.
The shear tab displays the shear force envelope for the ultimate load cases.
660
Concrete Beam Design
The deflections tab displays the elastic, short term, long term and total deflections based on
the "Serviceability" and "Sustained" load cases specified above the diagrams. The elastic
deflections match the deflections from the SPACE GASS analysis and are based on the
serviceability load cases using the gross moment of inertia (Ig). The short term deflections are
also based on the serviceability load cases but using the cracked moment of inertia (Iefs),
whereas the long term deflections are based on the sustained load cases using the moment of
inertia adjusted for creep (Iefl). You can see graphs of Ig, Iefs and Iefl by clicking the "Ig, Ief"
radio button. The total deflections are the sum of the short term and long term deflections.
Note that all deflections displayed in the diagram include the free body movement of the
beam based on the elastic deflections of the supports and so if you are manually checking the
total deflections by simply summing the short and long term deflections you must also
subtract the deflections at the supports so that they are not doubled up. If your supports have
short term or long term deflections that are significantly different to their elastic deflections,
such as if the beam is supported on other beams for example, then you may need to adjust the
short and long term deflections along the beam to allow for those support deflections.
The lines below the deflection curves are based on the L/d limits you can specify in the data
panel to provide an indication of whether the deflections are excessive or not. Note that the
L/d limits are purely for your visual checking and are not used in the design calculations.
661
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can also click the "DXF/DWG" or "Save Image" buttons on the right side of the editor to
export the cross section to a DWG or DXF file, or save the cross section image to a metafile
(EMF) file. An EMF file can be used to generate a high quality image with no pixilation
regardless of how much it is enlarged.
You can also click the Output tab to show a list of the main checks and variables used in the
design/check.
662
Concrete Beam Design
Preferences
You can click the "Preferences" button to open the concrete beam preferences form and then
change the defaults for various concrete parameters such as the default bar library,
dimensions, clearances, zones, cover, size ranges, design priorities, code specific parameters,
colors and other options.
Reports
The reports button lets you generate various types of reports for the concrete beam.
To see a video that shows the reinforced concrete beam module in action, visit
www.spacegass.com/rcbeam.
663
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can get to the concrete manager by clicking the button in the top toolbar of the
renderer or via its Design menu.
Beams/columns/footings table
You can click on any beam, column or footing in the table to see it in the concrete manager
viewer or you can scroll through them by using the up and down arrow keys on your
keyboard. You can double-click any item in the table to open it in the editor or alternatively
you could use the "Edit..." button at the bottom of the table.
The colored blocks in the first column signify whether the beam, column or footing has
passed (green), failed (red), passed with a warning (yellow) or has not yet been designed or
checked (white). If the colored block contains a small padlock then it means that the item
is locked and cannot be designed unless you unlock it first or tick the "Include locked
beams/columns/footings" option below when designing in batch mode. By hovering over the
colored block for a particular item you can obtain its critical load case, critical zone,
utilization ratio, failure mode (if failed) or warning message (if there is one). Note that any of
the colors can be changed via the "Preferences" button.
The second column indicates whether the beam, column or footing has been design ("D") or
checked ("C"). The remaining columns list the item number, the members involved and the
title.
664
Concrete Beam Design
Beams, columns and footings can be added or deleted by using the "Add..." or "Delete..."
buttons at the bottom. It is recommended that new beams are added by using the procedure
explained in "Creating and editing concrete beams" rather than via the "Add..." button here.
Batch design/check
You can use this section of the manager to design or check all of your beams, columns and
footings or just some of them. This will be required from time to time if your model has been
changed and/or re-analysed.
Beams/columns/footings
If you want to design/check all items these fields should be left blank, otherwise you should
type in your desired list of beams, columns or footings (separated by commas or dashes).
Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the input fields and then select the
items you want from the list that appears as shown below.
665
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Load cases
If you want to consider all load cases then this field should be left blank, otherwise you
should type in your desired list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes). Alternatively,
you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then select the load cases you
want from the list that appears as shown below.
The following options let you decide which beams, columns and footings should be checked
or designed.
Check
Tick this option if you want the locked items (marked with in the first column) to be
checked. These are the items that have been locked manually via the padlock button or locked
automatically due to changes made to their reinforcement or layers in the editor. They will
666
Concrete Beam Design
simply be checked for adequacy and none of their input parameters will be changed. Note that
if the "Design" option is unticked then both the locked and unlocked items will be checked.
Design
Tick this option if you want the unlocked items (not marked with in the first column) to be
designed. During the design their reinforcement may be changed if the model or the design
actions have changed since the last design.
Reports
Text reports for multiple beams, columns and footings can be generated by filling out the
following form and then clicking the "Generate Report" button. Alternatively, you can click
the "Report" button in the editor to obtain a report (including a graphical representation of the
beam, column or footing) for the item currently in the editor. You can also obtain text reports
via the normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window.
To export from the table you should select all of the items to be exported, click the right
mouse button, select "Export" and then choose the desired export format. To import, just click
the right mouse button and choose "Import".
667
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Note that the data being exported/imported is limited to the beam/column/footing number, the
associated member numbers and the title. None of the detailed data is included. This means
that any changes you have made to a beam, column or footing will not be included in the
exported file and will be lost if you then re-import the file. For designed beams, columns and
footings however, once you import the data and re-design the items, all of the detailed data
will be reinstated.
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various beam, column and footing parameters and
colors. For more information refer to "Concrete beam preferences".
668
Concrete Beam Design
The bar size ranges limit the size of the reinforcing bars in a design and allow you to exclude
sizes that are unavailable or not desired.
Most colors can also be changed and you can see the immediate effect of your changes in the
sample image on the right and in the sample pass/warning/fail status bars at the bottom.
669
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
670
Concrete Beam Design
671
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
(b)
8.1.6 Minimum strength requirements
8.1.6.1 General
8.1.9 Spacing of reinforcement and tendons
8.2 STRENGTH OF BEAMS IN SHEAR
8.2.1 General
8.2.2 Design shear strength of a beam
(a),(c)
8.2.4 Maximum transverse shear at support
8.2.5 Requirements for shear reinforcement
(a),(b)
8.2.6 Shear strength limit by web crushing
8.2.7 Shear strength of a beam excluding shear reinforcement
8.2.7.1 Reinforced beams
8.2.8 Minimum shear reinforcement
8.2.9 Shear strength of a beam with minimum reinforcement
8.2.10 Contribution to shear strength by the shear reinforcement
(a),(b)
8.2.12 Detailing of shear reinforcement
8.2.12.1 Types
(a)
8.2.12.2 Spacing
8.3 STRENGTH OF BEAMS IN TORSION
8.3.1 General
8.3.2 Secondary torsion
8.3.3 Torsional strength limited by web crushing
8.3.4 Requirements for torsional reinforcement
(a),(b)
8.3.5 Torsional strength of a beam
(a),(b)
8.3.6 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement
(a),(b)
8.3.7 Minimum torsional reinforcement
(a),(b),(i),(ii)
8.3.8 Detailing of torsional reinforcement
(a),(b),(c)
8.5 DEFLECTION OF BEAMS (Informative only)
8.5.1 General
8.5.3 Beam deflection by simplified calculations
8.5.3.1 Short-term deflection
(a),(b),(c)
8.5.3.2 Long-term deflection
8.6 CRACK CONTROL OF BEAMS (Informative only)
8.6.1 Crack control for tension and flexure in reinforced beams
(a),(b),(d),(i),(ii)
8.6.3 Crack control in the side face of beams
8.8 T-BEAMS AND L-BEAMS
8.8.2 Effective width of flange for strength and serviceability
(a),(b)
672
Concrete Beam Design
Assumptions
Serviceability and deflection results are informative only. No serviceability or deflection limit
checks control the results.
Clause 3.1.2 - Ec is taken from Table 3.1.2 for standard f'c values, where f'c is taken from the
material properties of the member in the SPACE GASS model. For non-standard f'c values,
Ec is taken from the material properties of the member in the SPACE GASS model.
fsy and reinforcement ductility is taken from the SPACE GASS reinforcing bar library. If the
section contains a mixture of bars with different fsy and ductility values, the fsy and ductility
of the first bar on the bottom layer is used.
Fire resistance results are informative only. No fire resistance limit checks control the results.
Clause 6.2.3 - Optional preference to reduce maximum negative bending moment at support.
Clause 8.1.6 - Optional setting to comply with minimum design actions for positive and/or
negative moments.
Clause 8.1.9 - User specified preference for minimum clear bar distance.
Clause 8.1.10.3 - Not checked, but a zone setting is available for design mode where the user
can specify minimum steel top and bottom based on a percentage of the steel required for the
respective maximum moment along the entire beam.
Clause 8.2.4 - Optional preference to specify location or not. No checks done for
8.2.4(b)(i),(ii), or (iv).
Clause 8.2.5(a) - In design mode, shear reinforcement at 300 centres is always provided.
Clause 8.2.7.4 - A zone setting is provided to set Vuc to be equal to zero, else Vuc will be
calculated as per normal code requirements.
Clause 8.2.12.2 - Transverse spacing only checked for single fitments, transverse spacing not
checked for double fitments.
Clause 8.3.2 - A beam setting is provided to specify if the torsion being applied is an indirect
(secondary) torsion or direct torsion. If indirect is chosen, the torsion capacity is still
calculated for informative purposes only.
673
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Clause 8.3.8(b) - Closed fitments are assumed if torsion is to be considered. Only spacing
check is considered.
Clause 8.5.3.1 - The gross I can be optionally based on the steel transformed to an equivalent
concrete area or just on a homogeneous section. The alternative equation for Ief is not used.
Clause 8.5.3.2 - The alternative kcs method is used to calculate additional long term
deflection. The Asc/Ast is based on each specific zone reinforcement.
Clause 8.6.1 - Crack control is informative only. No crack control limit checks control the
results.
Clause 8.8 - No checks are done for flange-web connection capacities of T and L beams.
674
Concrete Beam Design
675
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Assumptions
Serviceability and deflection results are informative only. No serviceability or deflection limit
checks control the results.
If there are bars with different fy values, the fy design is the fy of the first bar at the bottom
layer and the design/check process assumes all bars have the same fy.
Clause 5.3.3 - Size of aggregate: The default aggregate size is 20 mm, but the user can change
the value (General Preferences).
Clause 6.2.5.1 - Creep coefficient: The user has options for creep coefficients.
Clause 22.6 - Critical sections for moment and shear: The user has the option to take the
moment and shear at the face of the support or at a user-defined distance from the face of the
support.
Clause 26.2 - Development lengths are calculated so that at any point within the considered
zone the bond capacity between concrete and steel is sufficient to carry the maximum tensile
or compressive stress in the zone.
Clause 26.3.2c - The requirement for vertical spacing between layers of reinforcement is not
checked.
Clause 26.5.1.3 - The side face reinforcement for crack control is not checked.
676
Concrete Column Design
Concrete column design
The SPACE GASS reinforced concrete column design module lets you design or check any
reinforced concrete columns in a structural model.
677
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
A video showing the reinforced concrete column design module in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/rccolumn.
Note that if you haven't purchased the concrete column module, you can still run it in a free
trial mode that limits you to using predefined cross section dimensions, and prevents you from
exporting or saving the job. All other features are fully activated.
Refer to "Creating and editing concrete columns", "The concrete manager" and "Concrete
column preferences" for full details of the concrete column design module.
678
Concrete Column Design
Note that the reinforced concrete column module does not let you input the cross section
shape or dimensions. The cross section geometry is taken from the column's section
properties and must have been defined earlier by you using the shape builder.
The column is then designed and the results are presented in the concrete column editor
shown below.
679
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
From there, you can examine the column, click the Ok button to save and exit if you happy
with it, or make changes to customize it to your exact requirements.
Blue may also be used in some circumstances to display other types of messages.
Data panel
The data panel on the left of the column editor lets you make changes to the design data
which are then reflected in the diagrams and tables in the concrete column editor. More
information about specific items in the data panel is presented in the following sections
below.
680
Concrete Column Design
Many of the input parameters affect both checks and designs (eg. ultimate load case list,
minimum design actions, cover, etc), whereas other parameters are design-specific (eg. design
priorities, bar size ranges, etc) or check-specific (eg. bar sizes, bar counts, etc). If you change
a parameter that affects both checks and designs then the previous action (ie. check or design)
681
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Each time you make a change that triggers an automatic re-design or re-check there is a small
pause while the action is performed. If you don't want this to happen or if it becomes
annoying you should untick the "Auto" option at the bottom and then just click the Design or
Check buttons whenever you're ready.
If you have made changes to the reinforcement then the column will become locked to guard
against you accidently performing a design and losing your changes. If you really want to do
a design then you must click the red locked button first to unlock it.
General data
In this panel you can specify the column number, design code, descriptive title, analysis
member list, load case list, and the biaxial bending and shear check switches. The column
number and analysis member list are normally predefined based on which members you
selected when you created the concrete column, however you can change them here if
required.
The ultimate load cases are the ones that the strength design is based on and they are usually
the combination load cases that have been factored up to ultimate. If you leave this list blank
then all analysed load cases will be considered.
Biaxial bending checks are important and so you should always tick the "Biaxial bending
check" option unless you specifically want to check uniaxial moments only. For circular
columns, the normal procedure for handling biaxial moments is to combine them into a single
moment at an angle to the cross section axes and then just treat it as a uniaxial moment
problem. You can do this by ticking the "Combine Mx and My moments" option. For circular
columns with "Combine Mx and My" unticked or non-circular columns, the biaxial checks
are done using the equations in AS3600 clause 10.6.4 or IS456 clause 39.6.
Note that because AS3600 clause 10.6.4 applies to rectangular sections only, you should
perform your own independent checks if you have biaxial moments in non-circular
columns or non-combined moments in circular columns.
Shear in columns rarely governs, however if you wish to consider shear then you should tick
the "Shear check" check box. If shear is being checked then you must also specify a shear
area ratio (see below).
682
Concrete Column Design
When specifying load case lists, you can either list them directly, or you can click the "..."
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in the job as shown below.
AS3600
IS456
Moment magnifiers
Moment magnifiers (AS3600) or additional moments (IS456) are calculated automatically if
the "Calculate" options are ticked, otherwise you can specify them manually.
For AS3600, the moment magnifiers are affected by whether the column is braced or
unbraced as defined in the "Column effective lengths" panel below and by whether the design
actions are from a linear or non-linear analysis. If braced or non-linear analysis, the moment
magnifier is calculated in accordance with equation 10.4.2, using the value of d that you
specify. For an unbraced column with a linear analysis, the moment magnifier is also based
683
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
on uc in equation 10.4.3(2). uc should be set by you based on the results of a buckling
analysis using reduced section properties of 0.4Ec.If for flexural members and 0.8Ec.Ic for
columns. A handy way of applying the reduced section properties is to give the flexural
members and the columns separate concrete materials in your SPACE GASS model and then
manually reducing the Ec for each material to 0.4Ec and 0.8Ec respectively before performing
the buckling analysis. Note that for a non-linear analysis, uc is not used.
AS3600
IS456
The "Braced" options (AS3600 only) affect how the moment magnifiers are calculated (see
above) and whether or not the column is deemed to be "short" or "slender" based on clause
10.3.1. They do not affect the column effective length calculations.
Reinforcement
When performing a concrete column design, SPACE GASS calculates the optimal
reinforcement (subject to the steel range % and bar size range limits that you specify at the
top of the reinforcement panel) and presents it in the lower part of the panel. If you have the
"Auto" option at the bottom of the form ticked and the column is not locked (ie. the padlock
button at the bottom is green) then whenever you make a change to any of the design
parameters, the reinforcement could change.
If you manually change any of the bar counts or sizes in this panel then the column will
become locked (ie. the padlock button at the bottom will become red) and any further changes
you make to the design parameters will simply cause the reinforcement to be checked rather
than be changed. Alternatively, if you wish to lock the bar counts, but still allow the bar sizes
684
Concrete Column Design
to change then you could tick the "Lock bar count" option. In this case a re-design could
cause the bar sizes to change but the number of bars would remain as they were.
If you wish to change the size of all your bars, you can click the library button (circled below)
in the "Total bars" row and then select a new size from the reinforcing bar library. Sometimes
this row will also contain the word "Variable" if you have a mixture of different bar sizes in
your column.
If you wish to change the position or size of individual bars then you can click the "Bar
Table" button and then make your changes in the table below. The bar table also lets you add,
delete or generate bars, or unify the bar sizes.
685
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Design priorities
When performing a design, the module evaluates many solutions (sometimes hundreds),
discards the impractical ones and then sorts the rest according to the "Design Priority" setting
that you have selected. For example, if you have selected "Minimum bars" then it will put the
solution that has the minimum number of bars first and present that as the optimal solution.
"Minimum steel" gives the most efficient design in terms of total area of steel, however it
usually results in quite small bar sizes and so is often impractical. "Minimum bars" gives the
best result in most circumstances.
686
Concrete Column Design
687
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can also zoom, pan and rotate the column to show the dimensions, cross section and
reinforcement in more detail.
The buttons at the top of the panel let you do a "zoom fit" or quickly switch to a side view or
"30,10" view. You can also turn on/off the stirrups, main bars or dimensions for a clearer
view.
Interaction diagram
The interaction diagram represents the capacity of the column in terms of its axial load versus
moment envelope. Interaction curves are included for the actual reinforcement (shown in red)
together with the 1%, 2%, 3% and 4% reinforcement percentages. Note that you can vary the
1%, 2%, 3% and 4% values via the concrete column preferences form if you wish to change
the steel percentages for the extra curves.
Each load case is shown as a green dot in the diagram and should fall within the red curve. If
a load dot falls outside the red curve then failure has occurred. Note that the interaction
diagram applies to uniaxial moments only and so you could get a biaxial failure even if all the
load dots fall within the curve.
The special points labelled as "Ecc", "Dec" and "Bal" are defined as follows:
688
Concrete Column Design
Ecc: The minimum eccentricity point that coincides with M=e.N, where e is the minimum
eccentricity, M is the moment and N is the axial compression. e = 0.05D for AS3600 (clause
10.1.2) and e = max(L/500 + D/30, 20mm) for IS456 (clause 25.4). If minimum moments are
complied with then all the load points should be located on the high moment side of the line
connecting the origin with the Ecc point.
Dec: The decompression point that coincides with the extreme tension fibre being zero. This
is the point at which it switches from being partially in tension to fully in compression.
Bal: The balanced point at which the tensile steel reaches yield. This is the point at which it
switches from a compression failure to a tension failure.
You can hover the mouse cursor over any part of the diagram to show the underlying values
at the cursor's location.
You can also zoom the diagram by placing the mouse cursor at the desired location and then
using the mouse scrollwheel. If the zoom feature doesn't work then it is because the diagram
doesn't have focus, in which case you should click on it and then try again.
689
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Panels to the right of the interaction diagram let you combine the curves for positive and
negative moments or turn on/off various display options.
690
Concrete Column Design
You can also click the "DXF/DWG" or "Save Image" buttons on the right side of the editor to
export the cross section to a DWG or DXF file, or save the cross section image to a metafile
(EMF) file. An EMF file can be used to generate a high quality image with no pixilation
regardless of how much it is enlarged.
Voids
Multiple voids of any shape or size can be included in the cross section and taken into
consideration in the column calculations. You simply add them as negative shapes in the
shape builder when you are creating your cross section for the analysis model.
691
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Preferences
You can click the "Preferences" button to open the concrete column preferences form and
then change the defaults for various concrete parameters such as the default bar library,
spacings, cover, size ranges, colors and other options.
Reports
The reports button lets you generate a concise or a full report for the concrete column.
To see a video that shows the reinforced concrete beam module in action, visit
www.spacegass.com/rccolumn.
692
Concrete Column Design
You can get to the concrete manager by clicking the button in the top toolbar of the
renderer or via its Design menu.
Beams/columns/footings table
You can click on any beam, column or footing in the table to see it in the concrete manager
viewer or you can scroll through them by using the up and down arrow keys on your
keyboard. You can double-click any item in the table to open it in the editor or alternatively
you could use the "Edit..." button at the bottom of the table.
The colored blocks in the first column signify whether the beam, column or footing has
passed (green), failed (red), passed with a warning (yellow) or has not yet been designed or
checked (white). If the colored block contains a small padlock then it means that the item
is locked and cannot be designed unless you unlock it first or tick the "Include locked
beams/columns/footings" option below when designing in batch mode. By hovering over the
colored block for a particular item you can obtain its critical load case, utilization ratio, failure
mode (if failed) or warning message (if there is one). Note that any of the colors can be
changed via the "Preferences" button.
The second column indicates whether the beam, column or footing has been design ("D") or
checked ("C"). The remaining columns list the item number, the members involved and the
title.
693
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Beams, columns and footings can be added or deleted by using the "Add..." or "Delete..."
buttons at the bottom. It is recommended that new columns are added by using the procedure
explained in "Creating and editing concrete columns" rather than via the "Add..." button
here.
Batch design/check
You can use this section of the manager to design or check all of your beams, columns and
footings or just some of them. This will be required from time to time if your model has been
changed and/or re-analysed.
Beams/columns/footings
If you want to design/check all items these fields should be left blank, otherwise you should
type in your desired list of beams, columns or footings (separated by commas or dashes).
Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the input fields and then select the
items you want from the list that appears as shown below.
694
Concrete Column Design
Load cases
If you want to consider all load cases then this field should be left blank, otherwise you
should type in your desired list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes). Alternatively,
you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then select the load cases you
want from the list that appears as shown below.
The following options let you decide which beams, columns and footings should be checked
or designed.
Check
Tick this option if you want the locked items (marked with in the first column) to be
checked. These are the items that have been locked manually via the padlock button or locked
automatically due to changes made to their reinforcement or layers in the editor. They will
695
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
simply be checked for adequacy and none of their input parameters will be changed. Note that
if the "Design" option is unticked then both the locked and unlocked items will be checked.
Design
Tick this option if you want the unlocked items (not marked with in the first column) to be
designed. During the design their reinforcement may be changed if the model or the design
actions have changed since the last design.
Reports
Text reports for multiple beams, columns and footings can be generated by filling out the
following form and then clicking the "Generate Report" button. Alternatively, you can click
the "Report" button in the editor to obtain a report (including a graphical representation of the
beam, column or footing) for the item currently in the editor. You can also obtain text reports
via the normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window.
To export from the table you should select all of the items to be exported, click the right
mouse button, select "Export" and then choose the desired export format. To import, just click
the right mouse button and choose "Import".
696
Concrete Column Design
Note that the data being exported/imported is limited to the beam/column/footing number, the
associated member numbers and the title. None of the detailed data is included. This means
that any changes you have made to a beam, column or footing will not be included in the
exported file and will be lost if you then re-import the file. For designed beams, columns and
footings however, once you import the data and re-design the items, all of the detailed data
will be reinstated.
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various beam, column and footing parameters and
colors. For more information refer to "Concrete column preferences".
697
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The bar size ranges limit the size of the reinforcing bars in a design and allow you to exclude
sizes that are unavailable or not desired.
Most colors can also be changed and you can see the immediate effect of your changes in the
sample image on the right and in the sample pass/warning/fail status bars at the bottom.
698
Concrete Column Design
699
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Assumptions
Clause 3.1.1.3 - f'ct.f is taken as 0.6(f'c)^0.5.
Clause 3.1.2 - Ec is taken from Table 3.1.2 for standard f'c values, where f'c is taken from the
material properties of the member in the SPACE GASS model. For non-standard f'c values,
Ec is taken from the material properties of the member in the SPACE GASS model.
fsy and reinforcement ductility is taken from the SPACE GASS reinforcing bar library. If the
section contains a mixture of bars with different fsy and ductility values, the fsy and ductility
of the first bar on the bottom layer is used.
Clause 8.1.6.1 - If the user has elected to comply with minimum design actions, Equation
8.1.6.1(1) is used even if Ast is sufficient to satisfy Equation 8.1.6.1(2).
Clause 10.5.3 - The effective lengths of columns are not automatically calculated by the
reinforced concrete module. Instead, the user must provide the effective length factors kx and
ky.
Clause 10.6.4 - Equation 10.6.4 is used for biaxial bending checks with rectangular, Tee,
cruciform, trapezoidal and flat oval cross sections even though it is intended for rectangular
cross sections only. It is expected that a future version will offer a method that combines the
biaxial moments and calculates an interaction diagram about axes that are aligned with the
combined moment.
Clause 10.7.2 - Shear checks are automatically performed, however torsion checks are not.
The user must manually check if columns are adequate for torsion.
Clause 10.7.3.1(b) - If a load falls within the confinement region of a column with f'c >
50MPa it is treated as a failure. In such cases the column strength may pass the AS3600 code
checks but the user must ensure that sufficient confinement to the core is provided based on
AS3600 10.7.3.
Shear checks are based on single stirrups (ie. two legs) even if additional stirrups have been
provided to restrain the longitudinal bars.
700
Concrete Column Design
No checks are done to detect bars positioned inside or too close to a void.
No checks are done to detect voids positioned too close to the edge of the column.
701
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Assumptions
Clause 38.1c - A rectangular stress block is assumed:
The uniform stress level = 0.4 * fck (Ref: P.C. Varghese, "Limit State Design of
Reinforced Concrete", Second Edition, Chapter 5).
The depth of the stress block is to the neutral axis.
The uniform stress level already includes the partial safety factor 1.5 for concrete.
The design compressive strength of concrete = 0.66 of the characteristic strength of
concrete.
702
Concrete Column Design
Shear checks are based on single stirrups (ie. two legs) even if additional stirrups have been
provided to restrain the longitudinal bars.
No checks are done to detect bars positioned inside or too close to a void.
No checks are done to detect voids positioned too close to the edge of the column.
703
Output
Output
Text and graphics reports can be viewed or printed. Print previews can be obtained and the
page setup form gives you full control over the printer selection, paper size, orientation,
margins, layout, scales and output format.
You can initiate a report by clicking the toolbar button or selecting the Output menu. You
can then choose between viewing a text report, printing a text report or printing graphics.
For text reports, the output can be limited to just input data or just output data and even to
specific nodes, members, section properties and load cases if required. You can also limit the
output to the data specified in any of the graphical filters.
Prior to generating a report, you must choose the items that you want to include in the report
by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the above form. You can turn a whole column of
check boxes on or off by clicking the "All on" or "All off" buttons at the bottom of the form.
After completing your selections, you can proceed to the following form.
705
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Filters
You can select from any of the graphical filters to limit the output report to the data defined in
a filter. Alternatively, you can select "Use Filter Selected in Main Toolbar" so that the data
included in the output report always matches what is shown in the graphics display area.
You can also further limit the output data by specifying lists of nodes, members, section
properties, load cases, etc. If you want to include all items for a particular list then the list
field should be left blank, otherwise type in a list of items (separated by commas or dashes)
that you want to include in the report.
Format
Output can be printed in fixed point format (eg. 12.45) or exponential format (eg.
1.245E+01). Fixed point is generally preferred as it is easier to read and allows numbers with
different orders of magnitude to be readily identified. It cannot, however be used with very
large or very small values. In such cases, exponential format must be used.
As well as specifying the format, you can select the number of decimal places to be included.
This cannot be greater than 3 for exponential formatting and cannot be greater than 8 for fixed
706
Output
point formatting. These limits are imposed because of a maximum 10 digit field width. Care
must be taken when specifying the number of decimal places with fixed point format. You
must ensure that for the range of values likely to be encountered, you don't exceed the 10 digit
field width. For example five decimal place fixed point format could only handle values from
-999.99999 to 9999.99999. Values outside of this range would simply be printed as
"**********".
Section and material properties are always presented in exponential format regardless of the
format you specify (due to the extreme range of values usually encountered).
Enveloping
The analysis results data for each load case can be printed separately or can be combined into
a load case envelope. If a load case envelope is specified, the program selects and prints the
maximum and minimum values from the list of specified output load cases. The report also
includes the load case numbers and the matching coincident values that occur at the same
location and load case as each maximum and minimum.
At the end of an envelope report is a summary envelope showing the maximums and
minimums for a group of nodes and/or members. The summary report also shows the load
case numbers and the matching coincident values.
Include warnings
This check box allows you to suppress warning messages relating to the analysis results
which sometimes appear in output reports. For example, if a non-linear analysis does not
reach the requested convergence in some load cases, then warning messages are posted in the
output report for those load cases.
Intermediate stations
SPACE GASS can print the displacements, forces and moments at any intermediate points
along a member (not just at the end nodes). Before intermediate member displacements,
forces and moments can be printed, you must specify how many equally spaced intermediate
member stations are to be considered. The program automatically adds an extra station at each
end of the member and at each point of application of a concentrated member load.
707
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Sorting options
Analysis results output can be sorted in one or both of two ways.
1. If sorted in order of load case, the report lists the data for every node (or member)
under a main load case heading. This is repeated for each load case.
2. If sorted in order of node/member, the report lists the data for every load case under a
main node (or member) heading. This is repeated for each node (or member).
A description of the failure mode for each load case does not necessarily indicate that
failure has occurred. It simply indicates the failure mode if the loads were increased enough
to cause failure.
Connection specifications
This allows you to include or suppress the list of detailed specifications for the bolts, plates,
welds, stiffeners and cleats from the detailed output reports.
Connection calculations
This setting allows you to include or suppress the loads, stresses, capacities, factors and other
calculated values from the detailed output reports.
Pass/fail criteria
For output of steel member and connection design results you can set the "Pass/fail criteria"
value to include only the members/connections which have passed, only the ones which have
failed, or all members/connections.
After completing the fields in the above form, you can click the Ok (if viewing), Print, Print
preview or Page setup buttons.
708
Output
Page setup
You can access the page setup form by selecting "Page Setup" from the File menu or clicking
the "Page Setup" button on the "Print Text Report" or "Print Graphics" forms.
The page setup form gives you full control over the printer selection, paper size, orientation,
margins, layout, scales and output format for both text and graphics.
There are separate tabs for text and graphics settings, however if the "Keep text and graphics
common items the same" check box is selected then items that are common to both text and
graphics only need to be changed in one tab rather than both.
If you want the text and graphics settings to be different then you must de-select the
"Keep text and graphics common items the same" check box before making the changes.
If you want to include your own logo in printed output, you should create a logo image file in
JPG format, install it with the SPACE GASS utility tool, and then select either of the "Logo
on first page only" or "Logo all pages" check boxes in the page setup form below. For best
results, make the image file large enough so that it contains enough pixels for a printer
resolution of 300 dpi or more. For example, if your printer operates at 600 dpi and you want
the printed logo height to be 20mm, your logo image file will need to be at least 472 pixels in
height (ie. 600/25.4x20). Regardless of the size of your logo image file, it will be scaled to
print at the exact height you specify in the page setup form.
709
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
710
Output
711
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
You can view a text report by clicking the toolbar button and then selecting "View Text
Report" from the floating menu, or selecting "View Text Report" from the Output menu.
You must first select the data that you want to view, after which the report viewer is displayed
as follows.
The report viewer allows you to view any of the input or output data in an easy-to-read
format. The side menu lets you go directly to any part of the report or hide any sections of the
report before printing via the button located just above the side menu.
712
Output
Print preview
You can generate a print preview by clicking the "Print Preview" button in the "View Text
Report", "Print Text Report" or "Print Graphics" forms.
The print preview allows you to see exactly how the output will appear on your printer. For
text reports, the side menu lets you go directly to any part of the report or hide any sections of
the report before printing.
You can output direct to the printer or you can output to a text, PDF, HTML or picture file.
713
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
714
Output
You can print a text report by clicking the toolbar button and then selecting "Print Text
Report" from the floating menu, or selecting "Print Text Report" from the Output menu.
You must first select the data that you want to print, after which the print is produced.
715
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Print graphics
You can print graphics by clicking the toolbar button and then selecting "Print Graphics"
from the floating menu, or selecting "Print Graphics" from the Output menu.
Scale
Specify the desired hardcopy scale or leave it at zero for automatic scale to fit. For example,
type in a value of 100 for a 1:100 scale.
Title
This is simply a description which you can use to describe the particular view that is being
printed. It is placed near the bottom-left corner of the hardcopy and can be left blank if it is
not required.
After completing the fields in the above form, you can click the Print, Print preview or Page
setup buttons.
716
Output
717
Standard Libraries
Standard libraries
SPACE GASS is supplied with libraries of standard sections, materials, bolts, plates, welds,
spectral curves, reinforcing bars and moving load vehicles.
The libraries can be accessed by SPACE GASS for rapid and convenient input of standard
properties. They are also scanned frequently during analysis and design operations.
You can get access to the libraries and retrieve data via the built-in library editor by clicking
the button at various locations throughout SPACE GASS. You can also access the
library editor by choosing "Edit Libraries" from the File menu. The library editor is shown
below.
You cannot modify any of the standard libraries supplied with SPACE GASS, however you
can create your own custom libraries and edit them without restriction. You can also copy
719
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
data from the standard libraries into your custom libraries. For more information, refer to The
library editor.
720
Standard Libraries
You can open the library editor from the File menu or by clicking the button from
various places within SPACE GASS. If opened from the File menu, the library editor gives
you access to all types of library data (eg. sections, materials, bolts, plates, welds, reinforcing
bars, spectral curves and moving load vehicles). If opened via the button from an area of
SPACE GASS that is working with a specific type of data (eg. section property data), the
library editor gives you access only to the applicable library types (eg. section property
libraries).
Custom libraries
You cannot edit or delete standard libraries (shown black in the library tree), however you can
create and edit your own custom libraries (shown blue in the library tree). To create a custom
library, click the appropriate library type in the library tree (eg. Section Libraries) and then
click the "Add Library" button at the bottom of the library editor. Alternatively, you can right-
click on "Section Libraries" in the tree and then select "New Library".
721
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Similarly, for section libraries you can add groups (sub-categories) by clicking the "Add
Group" button at the bottom or by right-clicking on the custom library name and then
selecting "New Group".
Once a custom library has been created, you can add data by clicking the appropriate "Add"
button at the bottom or by right-clicking on the custom library, selecting the appropriate
"New" item and then entering the required data. For section libraries, new sections can be
added via the shape builder which automatically opens when you click the "Add Section"
button. Sections can also be edited by clicking the shape builder button near the top-right
corner of the library editor.
You can also drag library items from a standard or custom library into a custom library. For
section libraries, you can even drag a whole group into a custom library. If you hold down the
Ctrl key while dragging then the items will be copied rather than being moved.
For information on how to import or export library data in other formats, refer to Importing
and exporting.
For information on how to import SPACE GASS 10 or older libraries, refer to Importing old
libraries.
722
Standard Libraries
For information on how to import SPACE GASS 10 or older libraries, refer to Importing old
libraries.
723
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
724
Standard Libraries
Section libraries
Section libraries contain the geometric and strength information for the sections they contain.
This includes the section name, shape type, section properties, dimensions, fabrication type
and material strengths. Section libraries are now capable of holding non-standard sections and
sections built from up to 10 shapes.
When importing section data from another source into a SPACE GASS section library, if you
are not sure what the correct format is, you should export one of the standard SPACE GASS
libraries to a file and then open the file to see how it is formatted and then use that as a pattern
for the file you wish to import.
2. Moments of inertia and plastic section modulii are for the principal axes.
3. The principal angle is positive when the principal axes are rotated anti-clockwise with
respect to the non-principal axes when looking at the cross section from a member's
node A end towards its node B end. Note that the sign of the principal angle is shown
reversed in the shape builder.
4. The centroid dimensions are the distances from the shape's reference point to the
centroid along the y and z axes. Reference points are shown as a red dot in the image
for each shape type in the Shape builder.
5. For column Tee sections, the dimensions are orientated the same as for beam Tee
sections (ie. the depth is parallel to the web) even though column Tees are rotated
through 90 degrees compared to beam Tees when used in a SPACE GASS model.
Circular Bar
Square Bar
Rectangular Bar
Circular Tube
Square Tube
Rectangular Tube
I or H Section
Plate Web Girder
Channel
Beam Tee
Column Tee
Equal Angle
Unequal Angle
Cruciform
Box Girder
Wedge
Slice
Fillet
Points Shape
725
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
LiteSteel Beam
LSB Back-to-Back
Lines Shape
Triangle
Cee Shape
Zed Shape
Top Hat
Double Angled Short
Double Angled Long
Double Angled Starred
Polygon
Polygon Tube
Equilateral Triangle
Schifflerized Angle
726
Standard Libraries
Material libraries
Each material in a standard material library contains the following information.
1. Young’s modulus
2. Poisson’s ratio
3. Mass density
4. Thermal coefficient
5. Concrete strength
727
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Bolt libraries
Each bolt in a standard bolt library contains the following information.
1. Diameter
2. Tensile strength (normal strength)
3. Tensile strength (high strength)
4. Tensile stress area - Cross-sectional area for calculating tensile stress
5. Shank area - Plain shank cross-sectional area
6. Core area - Core cross-sectional area
7. Minimum tension - Minimum bolt tension at installation
728
Standard Libraries
Plate libraries
Each plate in a standard plate library contains the following information.
1. Width
2. Thickness
3. Yield stress (normal strength)
4. Tensile strength (normal strength)
5. Yield stress (high strength)
6. Tensile strength (high strength)
729
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Weld libraries
Each weld in a standard weld library contains the following information.
1. Size
2. Tensile strength (normal strength)
3. Tensile strength (high strength)
730
Standard Libraries
731
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
732
Standard Libraries
Vehicle libraries
Each vehicle in a standard vehicle library contains the following information.
1. Vehicle name
2. X, Y and load data for each wheel, where X is the distance back from the front of the
vehicle to the wheel, and Y is the distance sideways from the centerline of the vehicle
to the wheel.
733
Portal Frame Analysis
Portal frame analysis
This worked example considers the analysis of a typical 25m span haunched portal frame.
Linear (1st order), non-linear (2nd order), dynamic (frequency and response) and buckling
analyses have been performed and the results are presented in the computer printout at the end
of this appendix.
This appendix considers only the analysis of the portal frame. The portal frame member and
connection design is covered in Portal frame member design and Portal frame connection
design.
This example is loosely based on the design example used in the AISC publication by
Woolcock, Kitipornchai and Bradford (9). There are, however a number of significant
differences between this example and the AISC example which can be summarized as
follows.
Because SPACE GASS has facilities for projected length member loads, the live load
has been input over the plan rafter length rather than its inclined length. This was a
situation that the software used in the AISC example could not model.
Because SPACE GASS has facilities for automatically calculating haunch section
properties based on the rafter size and the size of the member from which the haunch
was cut, the haunch section properties are different. The AISC example simply
approximates the haunch to a 530UB82 for half of its length and a 410UB60 for the
other half.
SPACE GASS uses a value for gravitational acceleration of 9.8066, the AISC
example uses 9.82.
SPACE GASS uses grade 300 steel, whereas the AISC example uses grade 250 steel.
The purlins used in the AISC design example are assumed to be spaced at a
maximum of 1500mm, while the structural drawings elsewhere in the publication
show them to be spaced at 1200mm maximum. This SPACE GASS example uses
purlin spacings of 1200mm as they are shown in the drawings.
Because the members in the AISC example have been designed by hand, they have not been
able to take full advantage of some of the more calculation intensive and slightly more
efficient higher tiers offered by the SPACE GASS steel member design module.
The differences between this example and the AISC example prohibit the direct
comparison of results. However, if you wish to do so, you should first modify the SPACE
GASS example in accordance with the differences listed above. If you do the modifications,
you will find that the results of the two examples agree almost exactly.
735
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The distributed live load is based on a roof area of 9m x 25m = 225sqm which requires a
distributed live load of 0.25kPa.
The wind loads are based on terrain category 3 (industrial area) for region B with Vu = 60m/s
and Vs = 38m/s. Taking into account the height of the rafters and purlins (200mm), the eaves
height is assumed to be 8m and the apex height is assumed to be 8.7m.
736
Portal Frame Analysis
Load combinations
The static load combinations are in accordance with typical strength limit state stipulations
(excluding earthquake loading) as follows.
1. 1.25G + 1.5Q
2. 1.25G + Wu
3. 0.80G + 1.5Q
4. 0.80G + Wu
While these load combinations are no longer in line with AS1170, they have been retained for
compatibility with the AISC publication on which this example is based.
In this worked example it has been assumed that the distributed live load in load case 2
need not be considered to act simultaneously with any wind load. The structure will be
designed to support either the distributed live load or the wind load, whichever produces the
most critical effect.
737
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
the values of forces and moments at these points. Of course you can obtain the deflections,
forces and moments at these points without having to have nodes there by simply scaling
them off the diagrams or by obtaining an intermediate displacements, forces and moments
report, however these methods may sometimes be less convenient than having the values
displayed graphically.
Nodes have also been positioned at the mid-points and end-points of the haunches. These are
necessary so that the section properties can be varied along the haunch. In the above example,
the haunch has been modelled as a tapered 360 UB 50.
Only two prismatic members were used to approximate the tapered haunch because tests have
shown that this gives results very close to the exact solution. If you wish to experiment with
this, try inputting some frames with varying numbers of haunch segments, and compare the
results of the deflections and bending moments.
In fact, haunches do not have much effect at all on the bending moments in other parts of the
frame, however they do eliminate the need to design the rafters for the high bending moments
which usually occur at the knee. Haunches can also offer significant reductions in deflection
of the frame.
738
Portal Frame Analysis
Frame elevation
739
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Method of input
The portal frame in this example was initially input as a single bay portal frame using the
structure wizard. This allowed quick and easy generation of the basic structural geometry,
restraints, section properties (including the haunch section properties) and material properties.
If the extra column and rafter nodes were not required, it would then have been a simple
matter to add the loads (graphically or using datasheet input) and then perform the analysis.
Node restraints
When the structural geometry was established, node restraints of FFFRFR were applied to
support nodes 1 and 13, and restraints of RRFRRR were applied to rafter nodes 3, 6, 7, 8 and
11. The restraints on nodes 1 and 13 specified that the structure was pin-based, allowing
rotation about both the X and Z axes. The standard 2D frame pin restraint of FFFFFR was
not used in this case because it would have prevented rotation about the X-axis.
The rafter node restraints were applied to simulate the effect of wall and roof bracing that
would prevent any out-of-plane (Z-axis) movements at those nodes. A general restraint of
RRFRRR was not used in this case because it would have prevented the out-of-plane
movements of nodes 2, 4, 5, 9, 10 and 12 which, in real life, would be free to move in that
direction. Although no out-of-plane movements would occur in a static analysis (due to no
loads in that direction), they could occur in a buckling analysis and, if restrained, could result
in incorrect buckling load factors and effective lengths.
If no intermediate nodes were present that could move in the out-of-plane directions then a
general restraint could have been used.
Under normal circumstances it would not have been necessary to match the node and
member numbering with the AISC example. This would have removed the necessity to
subdivide the members, or change the member properties and node restraints as described
above.
Loads
The node and member loads were applied graphically. Although there are many member
loads, the graphical input facility made it very easy to input them en-masse. For most load
cases, it was simply a matter of placing a window around the members and then specifying
the load applied to them.
Self weight, combination load cases and load case titles were input using datasheets.
Input check
As a final check before the analysis was initiated, loading diagrams for each load case were
viewed followed by an output report of the complete structural data. Any errors in the data
were corrected and the model was then ready for analysis.
740
Portal Frame Analysis
Analysis procedure
Linear analysis
The first analysis to be performed was a linear analysis for the primary load cases 1 - 7. The
results of this analysis were used to check frame deflections.
Non-linear analysis
Load cases 10 - 14 were analysed in a second run because the steel member design example is
based on factored combination load cases analysed non-linearly. Both P- and P- effects
were activated, while axial shortening wasn’t. The linear analysis results for the primary load
cases were retained and the stiffness matrix was written to the disk.
A general optimization method was used, however this had little impact on the analysis
time due to the small size of the model.
Buckling analysis
The default options were selected for the buckling analysis (ie. only one mode shape was
calculated).
741
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Analysis results
The following summary was developed based upon the results:
The dynamic response spectrum analysis resulted in small displacements, forces and moments
that were insignificant in comparison with the static load cases.
The results of the non-linear analysis were then used to perform a steel member check and a
steel connection design.
As an interesting exercise, the results of the non-linear analysis were then compared with the
results of a linear analysis of the combination load cases. Load case 11 was still found to be
critical with the new moments being 542kNm at the knee, 223kNm at the end of the haunch
and 132kNm at the apex. You can see that the linear moments are actually greater than the
non-linear moments. This is also shown in the AISC example.
742
Portal Frame Analysis
Graphical output
The following diagrams are examples of the graphical output that can be obtained from
SPACE GASS on the screen or printer.
743
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
744
Portal Frame Analysis
745
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Buckling mode shape (load case 12) – Note the out-of-plane buckling mode
746
Portal Frame Analysis
This report extract shows all of the frame analysis input data, including lumped masses and
spectral load cases.
747
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
748
Portal Frame Analysis
13 FFFRFR
749
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
750
Portal Frame Analysis
751
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
752
Portal Frame Analysis
753
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
754
Portal Frame Analysis
This report extract shows the node displacements for primary load cases (1-9), the member
forces and moments for combination load cases (10-14), and the node reactions for all load
cases. Note that SPACE GASS lets you choose any desired load cases for each part of the
report.
Although load case 9 is a spectral load case rather than a static load case, it is also included in
this part of the report because its results are in the same form as those of a static analysis.
755
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Load case 5 (Linear): Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
756
Portal Frame Analysis
757
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
758
Portal Frame Analysis
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P- P- 4 Itns, 99.987% Cnv (Res gov)
759
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
760
Portal Frame Analysis
761
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Load case 5 (Linear): Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
762
Portal Frame Analysis
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P- P- 4 Itns, 99.988% Cnv (Res gov)
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P- P- 4 Itns, 99.987% Cnv (Res gov)
763
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P- P- 4 Itns, 99.995% Cnv (Res gov)
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P- P- 4 Itns, 99.988% Cnv (Res gov)
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P- P- 4 Itns, 99.983% Cnv (Res gov)
764
Portal Frame Analysis
765
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
This report extract covers the same information as the previous section except that the results
are enveloped. It allows you to quickly locate the maximum and minimum values together
with their coincident values.
Note the summary envelopes at the end of each section which show the overall maximums
and minimums for all selected nodes and members.
766
Portal Frame Analysis
767
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
The following maximums and minimums are taken from either end of the member
768
Portal Frame Analysis
769
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
770
Portal Frame Analysis
771
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
772
Portal Frame Analysis
This report extract shows the bill of materials listing that can be produced by SPACE GASS.
773
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
This report extract shows the natural frequencies and periods for each of the dynamic modes
within each mass load case. In this case there was only one mass load case which we analysed
for three dynamic modes.
774
Portal Frame Analysis
This report extract shows the general results of a dynamic response spectrum analysis for
spectral load case 9. A dynamic spectral response analysis also calculates displacements,
forces, moments and reactions just like a static analysis and, for comparison purposes, they
are included with the static analysis results in this report.
775
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
This report extract shows the buckling load factors and the member effective lengths for each
combination load case. The primary load cases were not included in the buckling analysis
because in real life they could not occur in isolation.
Note that member effective lengths are not calculated for load cases 11 and 13 because their
buckling load factors are greater than 1000 (beyond the upper limit specified at the start of the
analysis).
776
Portal Frame Analysis
777
Portal Frame Member Design
Portal frame member design
This worked example considers the AS4100 member design of the 25m span haunched portal
frame which was analysed in the previous appendix. The design is based on the non-linear
analysis results of the combination load cases 10 - 14.
This appendix considers only the design of the portal frame members. The portal frame
analysis and connection design is covered in Portal frame analysis and Portal frame
connection design.
This example bases the member design directly on the forces and moments obtained from the
non-linear analysis. The non-linear analysis results for combination load cases 10 - 14 are
included in the static analysis report (itemised) of the portal frame analysis worked example.
The portal frame has wall girts spaced at 1200mm and 1700mm, and roof purlins spaced at
1000mm, 1200mm and 800mm as shown in the following drawing. The frame is fully
symmetrical about its centre.
779
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
In order to define the steel member design data for the frame, the following design groups
were specified.
780
Portal Frame Member Design
Groups 3 and 4 were specified as members 10,9,8,7 and 12,11 (rather than 7,8,9,10 and
11,12) so that the positions and types of flange restraints could be referenced from the column
base and the narrow end of the haunch in similar fashion to groups 1 and 2. This was not
absolutely necessary, however it made the input of the restraint data for groups 3 and 4
identical to the data for groups 1 and 2.
In the diagram above, the thick grey lines show the four design groups. They are drawn short
of their ends so that you can easily see where they start and finish.
Even though the haunches can’t be design or checked (because of their varying properties and
non-standard shape), they have been included in the rafter groups 2 and 3. They have,
however, been excluded from the portion of the rafter being designed or checked by using an
I (ignore) zone in the flange restraint data. If the haunch members had simply been omitted
from the rafter groups then the group lengths would have been shorter and the compression
and bending effective lengths could have been underestimated.
All compression effective lengths were calculated by the buckling analysis and automatically
transferred into the member design. The advantage of doing it this way is that different
effective lengths can be used for each design load case. The alternative is to manually input
the effective lengths, however they are then used for every design load case and the design is
usually not as efficient.
The minor axis (out-of-plane) compression effective lengths were also specified as being
braced at each end due to wall and roof bracing that prevents any out-of-plane buckling at the
rafter ends. This has the effect of limiting the minor axis compression effective lengths to no
longer than the rafter group length.
Flange restraints for the columns were placed on the outside (top) flange at each end and at
each girt location. Inside (bottom) flange restraints were placed at the column ends. There are
no column fly braces and therefore no intermediate inside flange restraints were applied.
For each column, the column base plate was assumed to provide full restraint to both column
flanges and hence restraint codes of F (full) were specified for both column flanges at the
base.
781
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Because wall bracing and an eaves strut effectively prevented lateral deflection of both
flanges at the top of the column and because the rafter provided partial (or full) twist restraint,
the restraints applied to the top of the column were assumed to be F (full).
In addition, the stiffness of the haunch meant that the restraining effect of the rafter could be
considered to be applied at the bottom of the haunch, hence additional flange restraints
identical to those at the top of the column were applied to both column flanges at the base of
the haunch. An I (ignore) continuous restraint was also applied to the segment from the
bottom of the haunch to the top of the column so that it would be ignored during the design.
Top flange restraints of L (lateral) were positioned at each purlin location in the rafter design
groups, except that the purlins close to the end of the haunch and near the apex were
conservatively assumed to be at the ends of the haunch and at the apex. Bottom flange
restraints were also positioned at the ends of the haunch and at midspan of the rafter design
groups to coincide with fly braces at those locations. Restraint codes of I (ignore) were
positioned between the first two rafter flange restraints so that the haunches could be excluded
from the calculations.
Fly braces were located at the face of the columns and at the apex, and hence the top and
bottom flange restraints at the ends of the rafter design groups were assumed to be at least F
(full).
The above diagram shows the location and type of all the flange restraints.
Note that the effect of the fly brace at midspan could also have been taken into account by
specifying a full restraint at the fly brace location on the top flange and not specifying
anything on the bottom flange. A full or partial restraint on one flange causes SPACE GASS
to automatically place a partial restraint (at least) on the other flange (see also Effective flange
restraints). This method would, however increase the kt factor marginally.
All of the member design data was input graphically, however it could have been input just as
successfully via a datasheet or by importing it from a text data file. For information about the
graphical input procedure for steel member design data, see also Steel member input methods.
For detailed information about the actual member design data values and settings, see also
Steel member design data.
782
Portal Frame Member Design
The rafters are satisfactory with load factors of 1.15 and 1.05. The 530 UB 92.4 columns have
also passed with load factors of 1.28 on both sides.
The results of a steel member design or check can be shown graphically as in the above
diagram. The member colors matched to the legend show that the columns and left rafter have
passed with load factors greater than 1.10, while the right rafter has passed with a load factor
greater than 1.00.
In this example, because the approximate sizes of the columns and rafters were known in
advance, it was appropriate to simply run a steel member check rather than a design. If the
steel module had been run in design mode instead, the column members may have been
selected as slightly less than 530 UB 92.4 because of their load factors being 1.28 and quite a
bit greater than 1.00.
Thus, if you know that your initial analysis member sizes are close to the final design sizes,
the recommended procedure is to run a steel member check first rather than a design. If the
check results show that the analysis member sizes are almost correct then it is a simple matter
to manually change some of the analysis member sizes and then do a final check to verify that
they are correct.
Alternatively, if your analysis member sizes have not been chosen carefully, you should run a
steel member design and then choose "Update analysis member sizes" from the Steel menu
(see also Updating analysis member sizes) to update the analysis data and bring it in line with
the design data. You should then iterate the analysis-design procedure until the design
member sizes agree with the analysis member sizes.
783
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Mx*
---- = 0.96 < 1.00 (Pass) Member out-of-plane bending (8.4.4.2)
Mox
Failure Crit Start Finish Axial Major Minor Major Minor Load
Mode Case Pos'n Pos'n Force Shear Shear Moment Moment Factor
N* = 77.15 kN (Slender)
Vx* = 0.00 kN (not considered) Vy* = 40.64 kN
Mx* = -285.35 kNm (Compact) My* = 0.00 kNm (Compact)
This appendix considers only the design of the portal frame connections. The portal frame
analysis and member design is covered in Portal frame analysis and Portal frame member
design.
This example bases the member design directly on the forces and moments obtained from the
non-linear analysis. The non-linear analysis results for combination load cases 10 - 14 are
included in the static analysis report (itemised) of the portal frame analysis worked example.
The portal frame has wall girts spaced at 1200mm and 1700mm, and roof purlins spaced at
1000mm, 1200mm and 800mm as shown in the following drawing. The frame is fully
symmetrical about its centre.
787
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
788
Portal Frame Connection Design
Left Baseplate
Left Knee
789
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Ridge
Right Knee
790
Portal Frame Connection Design
Right Baseplate
Concrete:
Concrete: CONCRETE-20 Type: Rectangular
Dimensions (LxWxD): 775x450x395 mm
Grout:
Thickness: 20 mm Fc: 25 MPa
791
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Flange Doubler:
Position: Both
Dimensions (LxWxT): 361.52x70x16 mm
Plate Strength Grade: Normal Fy: 250 MPa
CONNECTION 7 - RIDGE
--------------------
792
Portal Frame Connection Design
Flange Doubler:
Position: Both
Dimensions (LxWxT): 275x72x12 mm
Plate Strength Grade: Normal Fy: 260 MPa
793
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Concrete:
Concrete: CONCRETE-20 Type: Rectangular
Dimensions (LxWxD): 775x450x395 mm
Grout:
Thickness: 20 mm Fc: 25 MPa
794
Portal Frame Connection Design
Concrete: CONCRETE-20
(Length = 775 mm, Width = 450 mm, Depth = 395 mm)
795
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Angle = 2.99°
Transverse stiffeners
Top = 84x12 mm
Bottom = 84x12 mm
sg = 120 mm sp1 = 0 mm
sp2 = 141.52 mm sp3 = 80 mm
spo = 65 mm spi = 65 mm
ae = 30 mm
796
Portal Frame Connection Design
797
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
798
Portal Frame Connection Design
Angle = 5.99°
sg = 120 mm sp1 = 0 mm
sp2 = 141.52 mm sp3 = 0 mm
spo = 65 mm spi = 65 mm
ae = 30 mm
799
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Angle = 2.99°
Transverse stiffeners
Top = 86x6 mm
Bottom = 86x6 mm
sg = 120 mm sp1 = 0 mm
sp2 = 141.52 mm sp3 = 0 mm
spo = 65 mm spi = 65 mm
ae = 30 mm
800
Portal Frame Connection Design
801
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
802
Portal Frame Connection Design
Nts = 81.46 kN
fRfts = 260.06 kN, fRftw = 355.69 kN
Yield line parameter, Ycs = 6739.25 mm
Concrete: CONCRETE-20
(Length = 775 mm, Width = 450 mm, Depth = 395 mm)
803
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
804
Cable Analysis
Cable analysis
This worked example demonstrates the input and analysis of a 30m tall, guyed mast. The
catenary cable equations are used to calculate the axial force in a nominal guy member, which
is then compared to the result obtained from SPACE GASS.
A non-linear analysis is the only type of analysis that can be performed on a structure
containing cable members due to their highly non-linear behaviour.
The guyed mast considered in this example has the following basic properties.
Height: 30m
Number of guys: 3 sets of 3
Radial guy spacing: 120
Guy connections at: 15m, 22.5m and 30m
Distance from base: 12m
Guys: 10mm steel cable
Mast: 406x9.5CHS
The uniformly distributed dead load is not the only load that the structure would be subject to
in real life, however it is the only one considered here. The load cases are limited in order to
simplify the example.
805
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Method of input
It was not possible to input the guyed mast using the structure wizard due to its unusual
geometric configuration. All of the data input was performed using either graphical tools or
datasheets.
Loads
Loading due to the self weight of the structure was input using a datasheet.
Cables have no moment capacity. Hence, intermediate nodes on cables must have all
their rotational degrees of freedom restrained (ie. use RRRFFF).
Input check
As a final check before the analysis was initiated, an output report containing the complete
structural data was viewed. Any errors in the data were corrected and the model was then
ready for analysis.
806
Cable Analysis
Analysis procedure
A non-linear (2nd order) analysis was performed in which both P- and P- effects were
activated, while axial shortening was not.
807
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Analysis results
In the absence of any lateral loads, the guys simply deflect vertically under self weight as
shown in the following deformed shape diagram.
808
Cable Analysis
Deformed shape
This report extract shows all of the input data for the model, together with the intermediate
displacements, forces and moments for guy member 12. Following the report, we compare the
SPACE GASS results for member 12 with a theoretical formular.
This is a guyed mast analysed for the SPACE GASS worked example appendices.
809
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
X Y Z
Node Coord Coord Coord
810
Cable Analysis
1 FFFFFF
5 FFFFFF
6 FFFFFF
7 FFFFFF
811
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
812
Cable Analysis
The following catenary cable equation from Hibbeler (15) for a single catenary element can
be used to verify the results for member 12 shown above.
As you can see, it was necessary to resolve the UDL to the local axis of the member
(multiplying it by the cosine of the angle between the vertical). From this point the solution is
straightforward, the result varying by only 0.3% (ie. 1.469kN vs. 1.465kN).
813
Converting Old Jobs
Converting old jobs
SPACE GASS automatically converts all version 4.0 and newer jobs into the correct format at
the time they are opened. They are then saved with the usual <Job>.SG naming convention.
However, pre-version 4.0 jobs use multiple data files for each job, each of which has a
filename extension of "DAT". In order to open the pre-version 4.0 files with the current
version of SPACE GASS they must first be renamed to the new convention. This can be done
automatically with a batch program called SGName.BAT that is supplied with SPACE GASS.
In order to rename the old data files, you should first open a command (or DOS) prompt
window, go to the folder containing the old data files and then run SGName from your
SPACE GASS program folder. Assuming that the old files are in a folder called C:\OldData
and the SPACE GASS program files are in a folder called C:\Program Files\SPACE
GASS\EXE, the commands necessary to rename them are:
C:
CD\OldData
C:\”Program Files"\”SPACE GASS"\EXE\SGName
Once the files have been renamed, you can access them from the current version of SPACE
GASS as normal. Naturally, they still have to be converted to the latest format, however this
is done automatically as each job is opened by SPACE GASS.
815
Bibliography
Bibliography
1. Harrison H.B. "Computer Methods in Structural Analysis",
pp 248-251, Prentice Hall, 1973.
8. Clarke A.B. and Coverman S.H. "Structural Steelwork: Limit state design",
p 49, Chapman and Hall, London, 1987.
12. Wittrick W.H. and Williams F.W. "Natural Frequencies of Elastic Structures",
Quarterly Journal of Mechanics and Applied Mathematics, Vol. XXIV, Pt. 3, 1971.
817
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
16. AISC-ASD "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design",
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), June 1, 1989.
17. AISC-LRFD "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings", American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Dec 1, 1993.
19. Tessler, A. and Hughes, T.J.R., "A three-node Mindlin plate element with improved
transverse shear", Computer Methods In Applied Mechanics And Engineering 50
(1985) pp 71-101
20. Tessler, A. and Hughes, T.J.R., "An improved treatment of transverse shear in the
Mindlin-type four-node quadrilateral element", Computer Methods In Applied
Mechanics And Engineering 39 (1983) pp 311-335
21. Liu,, J, Riggs, H.R. and Tessler, A. , "A four-node, shear-deformable shell element
developed via explicit Kirchoff constraints", International Journal For Numerical
Methods In Engineering, Vol. 2000, 49, pp 1065-1086
22. Batoz, J., "An explicit formulation for an efficient triangular plate-bending element",
International Journal For Numerical Methods In Engineering, Vol. 18 (1982), pp
1077-1089
23. Batoz, J. and Tahar, M.B., "Evaluation of a new quadrilateral thin plate",
International Journal For Numerical Methods In Engineering, Vol. 18 (1982), pp
1655-1677
24. Hancock Gregory J., "Elastic method of analysis of rigid jointed frames including
second order effects", Steel Construction, Vol. 28, No. 3, September 19947
818
Bibliography
25. Hong Kong Building Department, "Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel
2011", Buildings Department 12/F-18/F Pioneer Centre, 750 Nathan Road, Mongkok,
Kowloon, Hong Kong
26. AISC 360-10, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings", American Institute of
Steel Construction (AISC), June 22, 2010
819
Index
2 Diagrams.....................................29, 444
Sign convention ............................... 107
2nd order analysis ................................. 484
Bends ................................................... 289
See non-linear analysis ..................... 484
Bentley Structural .......................77, 79, 81
3 Bibliography ........................................ 817
Bill of materials ............................501, 773
3D renderer ................................... 246, 458 BIM ...................................................77, 79
Bolts ......................623, 625, 636, 719, 728
A Boundary conditions ............................ 129
A quick frontwidth calculation method 492 See node restraints ........................... 129
Absolute coordinates .................... 295, 323 Bracing..........................................223, 226
Acceleration.......................................... 168 BS5950-1 2000 code specific items .... 600
Align members ..................................... 276 Buckling analysis ................................. 475
Aligning plate axes ............................... 278 Analysis ....................475, 485, 502, 508
Alignment ..................................... 148, 285 Axial force distribution.................... 508
Amplitude ............................................. 444 Cables .............................................. 506
Analysis ................................................ 475 Effective lengths .............................. 504
Buckling analysis ............. 502, 506, 508 Load cases ....................................... 508
Dynamic frequency analysis .... 514, 516 Load factor........................502, 506, 508
Dynamic response analysis ...... 522, 524 Messages.......................................... 494
Static analysis ........................... 476, 494 Mode shapes .....................443, 502, 508
Warnings and errors ......................... 531 Node restraints ................................. 506
Angle sections ...................... 132, 145, 547 Results ......................................512, 776
Animation ............................................. 445 Special considerations ..................... 506
Annotation .................................... 448, 625
Aperture circle ........................ 29, 269, 283 C
Arc generation ...................................... 279 Cables .................................................. 475
Area loads ..................................... 179, 280 Analysis ............................475, 482, 484
Area of section...................................... 132 Buckling analysis............................. 506
Attach ........................... 246, 269, 283, 285 Chord length .................................... 119
Attachments .......................................... 116 Convergence .................................... 482
Auto scaling of base shear .................... 524 Converted to tension-only ............... 119
AutoCAD.............................. 77, 79, 81, 94 Damping ...................................482, 494
Axes ...................................................... 102 Fixity.........................................119, 482
Global axes ....................... 102, 107, 447 Length .............................................. 119
Local axes ......................... 102, 107, 453 Load stepping ...........................482, 494
Local axes for moments and shears ... 29, Loading .....................160, 164, 168, 482
312 Members ...................................119, 482
Axial force distribution......................... 508 Worked example .............................. 805
Axial forces .......................................... 478 CAD ..................................................77, 79
Described.......................................... 478 CAD interface module ........................... 94
Diagrams .......................................... 444 Calculator............................................... 26
Sign convention ................................ 107 Cartesian coordinates ....................295, 323
Axis limits ............................................ 312 Catenary cables .................................... 482
See cables ........................................ 482
B Centre of gravity ...........................501, 773
Bar anchorage ....................................... 656 Changing the appearance of SPACE
Base shear factor................................... 524 GASS ............................................33, 34
Bending effective lengths ..................... 547 Characteristic concrete strength ........... 146
Bending moments ................................. 478 Check boxes ........................................... 60
Described.......................................... 478 Chord length ........................................ 119
821
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
822
Index
823
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
824
Index
825
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
826
Index
Described.......................................... 156 P
Graphics ........................................... 372
Page setup ............................................ 709
Text................................................... 197
Pan ....................................................... 381
Node numbering ................... 402, 491, 493
Paradise solver ......................494, 508, 516
Node restraints ...................... 101, 129, 377
Partial restraint ..................................... 562
Buckling analysis ............................. 506
P-delta effects ...............479, 480, 484, 494
Described.......................................... 129
PDF file.........................................709, 713
Elastic restraint ................................. 129
PDF manual ............................................. 5
Frame data ........................................ 129
Pick .................................................57, 269
General restraint ............................... 129
Picture file............................................ 709
Graphics ........................................... 377
Page setup ........................................ 709
Restraint code ................................... 129
Print preview ................................... 713
Text................................................... 192
Pitch ..................................................... 625
Nodes .................................................... 101
Plane .............................................246, 382
Described.................................. 101, 118
Plate pressure loads.............................. 167
Graphics ........................................... 374
Described ......................................... 167
Text................................................... 189
Graphics............................384, 439, 444
Non-linear analysis ...... 101, 475, 476, 479,
Text .................................................. 204
480, 482, 484, 494
Plates.................................................... 278
Normal members .................................. 119
Align plate axes ............................... 278
Normal window .................................... 269
Contours .......................................... 458
Normalize mode shapes ........................ 516
Datasheet ......................................... 238
Notes..................................................... 378
Described ..........................101, 107, 124
Drawing ........................................... 306
O
Graphics....................................386, 458
Ocean currents .............................. 181, 411 Library ......................................719, 729
Offsets .................................................. 154 Meshing ........................................... 346
See member offsets .......................... 154 Moments for reinforced concrete slabs
See plates .......................................... 124 ..................................................... 107
Opening a job ......................................... 62 Pressure loads ...................167, 384, 439
Operating plane .................................... 382 Reverse plate direction .................... 406
Optimization . 475, 486, 491, 492, 493, 494 Steel connection design ...623, 625, 636,
Ortho............................................. 285, 380 719, 729
Output ................................................... 512 Stress................................................ 458
Buckling analysis ............................. 512 Text .................................................. 191
Described.......................................... 705 Wood-Armer method....................... 107
Dynamic frequency analysis ............ 521 Point ....................................................... 57
Dynamic response analysis .............. 529 Pointer.................................................... 57
Fonts ................................................... 28 Poisson's ratio ...................................... 146
Page setup......................................... 709 Polar coordinates ..........................295, 323
Print graphics.................................... 716 Portal frame builder ............................. 221
Print preview .................................... 713 Prescribed node displacements ............ 157
Print text report................................. 715 Described ......................................... 157
Printing this manual ............................. 5 Graphics....................................389, 444
Printing to a file ........................ 709, 713 Text .................................................. 198
Scale ......................................... 709, 716 Pressure................................................ 167
Static analysis ................................... 501 See area loads .................................. 280
Status report...................................... 717 See plate pressure .............167, 384, 439
Steel connection design .................... 643 Prestress ............................................... 165
Steel member design ........................ 593 See member prestress loads ............. 165
Text format ......................................... 28 Pre-tension ........................................... 164
Worked examples ............. 735, 779, 805 Principal angle ..................................... 132
Print preview........................................ 713
See output ........................................ 705
827
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
828
Index
829
SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
830
Index
831